The URL can be used to link to this page

APPROVED BLD2023-1427+Manufacturer_Specifications_and_Installation_Instructions+10.18.2023_9.13.45_AM+3847113Submittal 3 Ton Convertible Air Handler TEM4BOC37M31 SA September2022 TEM4BOC37-SUB-1A-EN Outline Drawing MINIMUM UNIT CLEARANCE TABLE SERVICE CLEARANCE (RECOMMENDED) SIDES 2' FRONT 21' BACK 0' INLET DUCT I' OUTLET DUCT N/A NOTE: THIS UNIT IS APPROVED FOR INSTALLATION CLEARANCES TO COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL AS STATED ON THE UNIT RATING NAMEPLATE PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Air Handler Model A B C D E F H Flow Control Gas Line Braze TEM4BOC37M31SA 51.27 23.50 1 21.50 21.75 7.01 9.66 24.59 TXV 7/8 All dimensions are in inches TEM4B0C37-SUB-1A-EN Product Specifications MODEL TEM4BOC37M31SA RATED VOLTS/PH/HZ 208-230/1/60 RATINGS(a) See O.D. Specifications INDOOR COIL — Type Plate Fin Rows — F. P.I. 4 - 14 Face Area (sq. ft.) 4.59 Tube Size (in.) 3/8 Refrigerant Control TXV Drain Conn. Size (in.)(b) 3/4 NPT DUCT CONNECTIONS See Outline Drawing INDOOR FAN —Type Centrifugal Diameter -Width (In.) 11 X 8 No. Used 1 Drive - No. Speeds Direct - 5 (c) CFM vs. in. w.g. See Fan Performance Table No. Motors — H.P. 1-1/2 Motor Speed R.P.M. 1050 Volts/Ph/Hz 208-230/1/60 F.L. Amps 4.1 FILTER Filter Furnished? (d) No REFRIGERANT R-410A Ref. Line Connections Brazed Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Gas 7/8 Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Liq. 3/8 DIMENSIONS H x W x D Crated (In.) 52-3/4 x 27-1/2 x 25-1/2 Uncrated 51-3/8 x 23-1/2 x 21-1/8 WEIGHT Shipping (Lbs.) / Net (Lbs.) 155/144 (a) These Air Handlers are A.H.R.I certified with various Split System Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps (AHRI STANDARD 210/240). Refer to the Split System Outdoor Unit Product Data Guides for performance data. (b) 3/4" Male Plastic Pipe (Ref: ASTM 1785-76) (0 ECM Motor (d) Remote filter required. Minimum Airflow CFM TEM4BOC37M31SA Heater Minimum Heat Speed Tap With Heat Without Heat Pump Pump BAYHTR1504BRK, BAYHTR1504LUG, Low Low BAYHTR1505BRK, BAYHTR1505LUG BAYHTR1508BRK, BAYHTR1508LUG, Med-High Med-Low BAYHTR1510BRK, BAYHTR1510LUG BAYHTR1523BRK Med-High Med BAYHTR1517BRK, BAYHTR3517LUG, High Med BAYHTR351OLUG TEM4B0C37-SUB-1A-EN Heater Pressure Drop Table TEM Air Handler Models Airflow CFM Number of Racks Heater Racks 1 2 3 4 Heater Model No. of Racks Air Pressure Drop - Inches W.G. BAYHTR1504 1 1800 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.14 BAYHTR1505 1 1700 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.14 BAYHTR1508 2 1600 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.13 BAYHTR1510 2 1500 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.12 BAYHTR3510 3 1400 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.12 BAYHTR1517 3 1300 0.02 0.04 0.05 0.11 BAYHTR3517 3 1200 0.01 0.04 0.05 0.10 BAYHTR1523 4 1100 0.01 0.03 0.05 0.09 BAYHTR1525 4 1000 0.01 0.03 0.04 0.09 900 0.01 0.03 0.04 0.08 800 0.01 0.03 700 0.01 0.02 600 0.01 0.02 TEM4BOC37-SUB-1A-EN Performance and Electrical Data 1. See Product Data or Air Handler nameplate for approved combinations of Air Handlers and Heaters. 2. Heater model numbers may have additional suffix digits. Table 1. Air Flow Performance TEM4BOC37M31SA(a) EXTERNAL STATIC AIRFLOW (in w.g) Speed Taps - 208 - 230 VOLTS High Med-High Med t Med-Low Low 0.1 1491.6 1418.1 1302.5 1267.8 1140.4 0.2 1459.7 1384.7 1266.3 1230.1 1096.4 0.3 1425.8 1349.2 1227.8 1189.7 1050.3 0.4 1389.8 1311.3 1187.0 1146.8 1002.1 0.5 1351.6 1271.3 1144.0 1101.4 951.7 0.6 1311.4 1229.0 1098.7 1053.3 899.3 0.7 1269.1 1184.4 1051.1 1002.7 844.7 1. Values are with wet coil, no filter, and no heaters 2. CFM Correction for dry coil = Add 3% 3. t = Factory Setting 4. Low = Tap 1, Med-Low = Tap 2, Med = Tap 3, Med-High= Tap 4, High = Tap 5 0) For the TEM4BOC37M31SA in downflow applications, airflow must not exceed 1600 cfm due to condensate blow off. TEM4BOC37-SUB-1A-EN Performance and Electrical Data Table 2. Electrical Data TEM4BOC37M31SA 240 Volt 208 Volt No. of Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Heater Model No. Circuits/ Phases Amps per Circuit Overload Amps per Circuit Overload kW BTUH Circuit Ampacity Protection kW BTUH Circuit Ampacity Protection No Heater 4.1 * 8 15 4.1 * 8 15 BAYHTR1504BRK 1/1 3.8 13100 16.0 28 30 2.9 9800 13.8 25 25 BAYHTR1504LUG BAYHTR1505BRK 1/1 4.8 16400 20.0 33 35 3.6 12300 17.3 29 30 BAYHTR1505LUG BAYHTR1508BRK 1/1 7.7 26200 32.0 48 50 5.8 19700 27.7 42 45 BAYHTR1508LUG BAYHTR1510BRK 1/1 9.6 32800 40.0 58 60 7.2 24600 34.6 51 60 BAYHTR1510LUG BAYHTR1517BRK- Circuit 1 (a) 9.6 32800 40.0 58 60 7.2 24600 34.6 51 60 2/1 BAYHTR1517BRK- 4.8 16400 20.0 25 25 3.6 12300 17.3 22 25 Circuit 2 BAYHTR1523BRK- 9.6 32800 40.0 58 60 7.2 24600 34.6 51 60 Circuit 1 2/1 BAYHTR1523BRK- 9.6 32800 40.0 50 50 7.2 24600 34.6 43 45 Circuit 2 BAYHTR3510LUG 1/3 9.6 32800 23.1 36 40 7.2 24600 20.0 32 35 BAYHTR3517LUG 1/3 14.4 49100 34.6 50 50 10.8 36900 30.0 44 45 BAYHTR1517BRK with single circuit 1/1 14.4 49200 60.0 83 90 10.8 36900 51.9 73 80 power source kit BAYSPEKT201A * = Motor Amps (a) MCA and MOP for circuit 1 contains the motor amps. TE WBOC37-SU BI A-E N Features and Benefits • Painted metal cabinet with captured foil face insulation • 2% or less air leakage • R-4.2 Insulating Value • Multi -Position UP/Down Flow, Horizontal Left/Right • ALL Aluminum Coil • Electric Heaters with polarized plug connections (sold as accessory) • R-410A Thermal Expansion Valve • ECM Motor (3.5 — 5 Ton Models ) • Low Voltage Pigtail Connections • Draw Through Design • Horizontal Drain pan • Fused 24V Power • 3 year warranty • 10-year warranty registered • Optional extended warranty available Important: Condensate management kit is required for all 5 ton air handler models installed in downflow applications. TEWBOC37-SUB-1A-EN 7 About Trane and American Standard Heating and Air Conditioning Trane and American Standard create comfortable, energy efficient indoor environments for residential applications. For more information, please visit www.trane.com or www.americanstandardair.com. C UL US LISTED The manufacturer has a policy of continuous data improvement and it reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. We are committed to using environmentally conscious print practices. TEM4BOC37-SUB-1A-EN os Sep2022 Supersedes (New) ©2022 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioners PrecedentTM Cooling and Gas/ Electric Standard Efficiency 6 to 25 Tons — 60 Hz Model Numbers: YSJ072A - YSJ300A Only qualified personnel should install and service the equipment. The installation, starting up, and servicing of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous and requires specific knowledge and training. Improperly installed, adjusted or altered equipment by an unqualified person could result in death or serious injury. When working on the equipment, observe all precautions in the literature and on the tags, stickers, and labels that are attached to the equipment. September 2022 RT-SVX0716-EN Introduction Read this manual thoroughly before operating or servicing this unit. Warnings, Cautions, and Notices Safety advisories appear throughout this manual as required. Your personal safety and the proper operation of this machine depend upon the strict observance of these precautions. The three types of advisories are defined as follows: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. 1 • Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It could also be used to alert against unsafe practices. ®Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or property -damage only accidents. Important Environmental Concerns Scientific research has shown that certain man-made chemicals can affect the earth's naturally occurring stratospheric ozone layer when released to the atmosphere. In particular, several of the identified chemicals that may affect the ozone layer are refrigerants that contain Chlorine, Fluorine and Carbon (CFCs) and those containing Hydrogen, Chlorine, Fluorine and Carbon (HCFCs). Not all refrigerants containing these compounds have the same potential impact to the environment. Trane advocates the responsible handling of all refrigerants - including industry replacements for CFCs and HCFCs such as saturated or unsaturated HFCs and HCFCs. Important Responsible Refrigerant Practices Trane believes that responsible refrigerant practices are important to the environment, our customers, and the air conditioning industry. All technicians who handle refrigerants must be certified according to local rules. For the USA, the Federal Clean Air Act (Section 608) sets forth the requirements for handling, reclaiming, recovering and recycling of certain refrigerants and the equipment that is used in these service procedures. In addition, some states or municipalities may have additional requirements that must also be adhered to for responsible management of refrigerants. Know the applicable laws and follow them. Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state/national electrical codes. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Required! Failure to wear proper PPE for the job being undertaken could result in death or serious injury. Technicians, in order to protect themselves from potential electrical, mechanical, and chemical hazards, MUST follow precautions in this manual and on the tags, stickers, and labels, as well as the instructions below: Before installing/servicing this unit, technicians MUST put on all PPE required for the work being undertaken (Examples; cut resistant gloves/ sleeves, butyl gloves, safety glasses, hard hat/ bump cap, fall protection, electrical PPE and arc flash clothing). ALWAYS refer to appropriate Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and OSHA guidelines for proper PPE. When working with or around hazardous chemicals, ALWAYS refer to the appropriate SDS and OSHA/GHS (Global Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals) guidelines for information on allowable personal exposure levels, proper respiratory protection and handling instructions. If there is a risk of energized electrical contact, arc, or flash, technicians MUST put on all PPE in accordance with OSHA, NFPA 70E, or other country -specific requirements for arc flash protection, PRIOR to servicing the unit. NEVER PERFORM ANY SWITCHING, DISCONNECTING, OR VOLTAGE TESTING WITHOUT PROPER ELECTRICAL PPE AND ARC FLASH CLOTHING. ENSURE ELECTRICAL METERS AND EQUIPMENT ARE PROPERLY RATED FOR INTENDED VOLTAGE. ©2022 RT-SVX071 B-EN Introduction Follow EHS Policies! Failure to follow instructions below could result in death or serious injury. • All Trane personnel must follow the company's Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) policies when performing work such as hot work, electrical, fall protection, lockout/tagout, refrigerant handling, etc. Where local regulations are more stringent than these policies, those regulations supersede these policies. • Non-Trane personnel should always follow local regulations. Hazard of Explosion or Fire! Failure to follow instructions could result in death or serious injury and equipment or property damage. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. IF YOU SMELL GAS, follow instructions below: • Do not try to light any appliance. • Do not touch any electrical switch. • Do not use any phone in your building. • Open windows and doors. • Alert others and evacuate building immediately • From a phone outside of the building, immediately call your gas supplier. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. Safety Hazards! Failure to follow instructions below could result in death or serious injury and equipment or property damage. Do not use this furnace if any portion has been underwater as it may have rendered the unit hazardous to operate. Immediately call a qualified service technician to inspect the furnace and to replace any part or the control system and any gas control which has been under water. • Should overheating occur, or the unit gas valve fail to shut off, close the gas valve to the furnace before shutting off the electrical supply. Copyright This document and the information in it are the property of Trane, and may not be used or reproduced in whole or in part without written permission. Trane reserves the right to revise this publication at any time, and to make changes to its content without obligation to notify any person of such revision or change. Trademarks All trademarks referenced in this document are the trademarks of their respective owners. Revision History • Added Gas Heat Operation and Maintenance chapter. • Updated Front Matter with new warnings. • Updated General Unit Requirements section in Installation chapter. • Updated TCO1 Instructions section in Installation chapter. • Updated Through -the -Base Gas Installation section in Installation chapter. • Updated Ignition Module section in Unit Start -Up chapter. • Updated roof curb weights. RT-SVX071 B-EN Table of Contents Model Number Description ................... 6 General Information ......................... 8 Unit Inspection ............................ 8 Exterior Inspection ..................... 8 Inspection for Concealed Damage........ 8 Unit Storage .............................. 8 Unit Description ........................... 8 Door Handles ............................. 8 Unit Nameplate ............................ 8 Compressor Nameplate .................... 9 Microchannel Coil Barcode ID ............... 9 LonTalk Communication Interface (Optional) ................................. 9 BACnet Communications Interface (Optional) ................................. 9 System Input Devices and Functions ......... 9 Supply Fan Failure ..................... 9 Clogged Filter Switch (Optional).......... 9 Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch ................................ 9 Compressor Disable (CPR1/2)........... 9 Low Pressure Control ...................... 9 High Pressure Control ..................... 10 Zone Sensors ............................ 10 Manual Changeover (BAYSENS106*) ...................... 10 Manual/Automatic Changeover (BAYSENS108*) ...................... 10 Wall Mounted Relative Humidity Sensor (BAYSENS036*) ............... 10 Duct Mounted Relative Humidity Sensor (BAYSENS037*) ............... 10 Integrated Comfort System (BAYSENS073*) ...................... 10 Integrated Comfort System (BAYSENS074*) ...................... 10 Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS016*) ...................... 10 Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS077*) ...................... 10 Thermostat ........................... 10 High Temperature Sensor (FIAHTST001 *) ....................... 10 Digital Display Zone Sensor (BAYSENS135*) ...................... 10 Touch Screen Programmable Zone Sensor (BAYSENS800) ................ 11 Evaporator Frost Control ................... 11 Discharge Line Temp Switch (DLTS) ........ 11 Smoke Detector Sensor (Optional) .......... 11 Phase Monitor ........................... 11 Pre -Installation ............................. 12 Precautionary Measures ................... 12 First Aid Measures ........................ 12 Dimensions and Weights .................... 13 Dimensional Data ......................... 13 Clearances .............................. 26 Weights ................................. 27 Lifting and Rigging ........................ 28 Installation ................................. 29 Horizontal Units .......................... 29 Ductwork ................................ 29 Roof Curb ............................... 30 Downflow ............................ 30 Rigging .............................. 31 General Unit Requirements ................ 32 Factory Installed Economizer ........... 32 External Vent Hood Installation.......... 32 Temperature Limit Switch Usage for Gas Heat Units ....................... 33 Horizontal Discharge Conversion (6 to 12.5 Ton Units) ............................... 34 TCO1 Instructions ........................ 34 Return Air Smoke Detector ................. 35 Air-Fi® Wireless Communication Interface ................................. 36 Main Electrical Power Requirements ........ 37 Through -the -Base Gas Installation .......... 37 Requirements of Gas Heat ................. 38 Condensate Drain Configuration ............ 39 Drain Pan Removal (Units with Condensate Overflow Switch Option) .............................. 40 Filter Installation .......................... 40 Field Installed Power Wiring ................ 40 Main Unit Power .......................... 40 Standard Wiring ...................... 40 Optional TBUE Wiring (Through -the - Base Electrical Option) ................ 41 Field -Installed Control Wiring ........... 41 Control Power Transformer ............. 41 Controls using 24 VAC ................. 41 4 RT-SVX071 B-EN Table of Contents Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs (Standard Low Voltage Multi conductor Wire) ................................ 44 DC Conductors ....................... 44 Space Temperature Averaging ............. 44 Pre-Start...................................47 Voltage Imbalance ........................ 47 Electrical Phasing (Three Phase Motors) .................................. 47 Compressor Crankcase Heaters ............ 48 Symbio Controls .......................... 48 Unit Start -Up ............................... 50 Sequence of Operation .................... 50 Ignition Module ........................... 50 Return Air Smoke Detector ................. 50 Compressor Start -Up ..................... 50 Hot Gas Reheat .......................... 51 Gas Heat Units ........................... 51 Final System Setup ....................... 51 Maintenance ............................... 52 Monthly Maintenance ..................... 52 Filters ............................... 52 Return Air Smoke Detector Maintenance ......................... 52 Condensate Overflow Switch ........... 52 Cooling Season ....................... 52 Heating Season ....................... 52 Coil Cleaning ......................... 53 Microchannel (MCHE) Coils ............ 53 Annual Maintenance ...................... 54 Final Process ............................ 54 Troubleshooting ............................ 55 Wiring Diagrams ............................ 56 Piping Diagrams ............................ 58 Gas Heat Operation and Maintenance ....... 62 Gas Heat Unit General Information .......... 62 Thermostat .............................. 62 Air Filters ................................ 63 Heating System .......................... 63 Heating Cycle Operation ............... 63 Safety Controls ....................... 64 Heating System Start -Up .................. 64 Heating System Shutdown ................. 65 Turning Off Gas to Unit ................ 65 Heating System Maintenance .............. 65 Condensate Overflow Sensor (Optional) ............................ 66 Limited Warranty ........................... 67 Electric Air Conditioner .................... 67 YSJ Precedent Models ................ 67 RT-SVX071 B-EN 5 Model Number Description Digit 1 — Unit Function Digit 12,13 — Service Sequence Digit 18 — Through -the -Base Provisions Y = DX Cooling, Gas Heat ** = Factory Assigned 0 = No Through -the -Base Provisions A = Through -the -Base Electric Digit 2 — Cooling Efficiency Digit 14 — Fresh Air Selection B = Through -the -Base Gas Pipings C = Through -the -Base Electric and Gas Pipings S = Standard Efficiency 0 = No Fresh Air Manual A = Manual Outside Air Damper 0-50% Digit 19 —Disconnect/Circuit Breaker (three - Digit 3 —Refrigerant Damper 0-50% = Motorized Outside Air Dam P phase only) C = Economizer, Dry Bulb 0-100% without 0 = No Disconnect/No Circuit Breaker J = R-410A Barometric Relief2 1 = Unit Mounted/Non-Fused Disconnect D = Economizer, Dry Bulb 0-100% with 2 = Unit Mounted Circuit Breaker Digit 4,5,6 —Nominal Gross Cooling Barometric Relief' ° E = Economizer, Reference Enthalpy 0-100 /° Di Digit 20— Convenience Outlet Capacity (MBh) without Barometric Relief2 072 = 6 Ton F = Economizer, Reference Enthalpy 0-100% 0 = No Convenience Outlet 090 = 7.5 Ton with Barometric Relief2 A = Unpowered 20A Convenience Outlet 102 = 8.5 Ton G = Economizer, Comparative Enthalpy B = Powered 15A Convenience Outlet 120 = 10 Ton 0-100% without Barometric Relief2 (three-phase only) 150 = 12.5 Ton H = Economizer, Comparative Enthalpy Digit 21—Communications Options 180 = 15 Ton 0-100% with Barometric Relief2 210 = 17.5 Ton K = Downflow Low Leak Economizer, Dry Bulb 240 = 20 Ton with Barometric Relief2 0 = No Communications Interface 300 = 25 Ton M =Downflow Low Leak Economizer, Reference 1 = Advanced Controller with BACnet® Enthalpy with Barometric Relief2 Communications Interface Digit 7 — Major Design Sequence P = Downflow Low Leak Economizer, 2 = Advanced Controller with LonTalk® Comparative Enthalpy with Barometric Relief2 Communications Interface R= Downflow Low Leak Economizer, Differential 3 = Advanced Controller with Air-Fi® Dry Bulb with Barometric Relief2 Communications Interface Digit 8 — Voltage Selection Digit 15 — Supply Fan/Drive Type/Motor Digit 22— Refrigeration System Option 3 = 208-230/60/3 0 = Standard Motor 0 = Standard Refrigeration System 4 = 460/60/3 1 = Optional Oversized/High Static Motor A = Dehumidification Option', 3 W = 575/60/3 2 = Single Zone Variable Air Volume with Digit 23—Controls Expansion Module Digit 9 — Unit Controls Standard Motor 3 = Single Zone Variable Air Volume with 0 = None S = SymbioT" 700 Oversized/High Static Motor 1 = XM-30 Expansion Module 4 = Multiple Zone Variable Air Volume with Standard Motor 2 = XM-32 Expansion Module Digit 10 — Heat Type 5 = Multiple Zone Variable Air Volume with 3 = XM-30 and XM-32 Expansion Module Oversized/High Static Motor 4 = XM-30 Expansion Module (Qty 2) 0 = Base Model 5 = XM-32 Expansion Module (Qty 2) A = Stainless Steel Gas Heat Digit 16 — Hinged Service Access/Filters Digit 24— Smoke Detector Digit 11 — Heating Capacity' 0 = Standard Panels/Standard Filters A = Hinged Access Panels/Standard Filters 0 = No Smoke Detector L = Low Gas Heat B = Standard Panels/2 inch MERV 8 Filters A = Return Air Smoke Detector2 M = Medium Gas Heat C = Hinged Access Panels/2 inch MERV 8 Filters B = Supply Air Smoke Detector' H = High Gas Heat D = Standard Panels/2 inch MERV 13 Filters C = Supply and Return Air Smoke Detectors, 2 E = Hinged Access Panels/2 inch MERV 13 Filters Digit 17 — Condenser Coil Protection 0 = Standard Coil 1 = Condenser with CompleteCoatTM RT-SVX071 B-EN Model Number Description Digit 25— System Monitoring Controls 0 = No Monitoring Control 1 = Clogged Filter Switch2 2 = Condensate Overflow Switch' 3 = Discharge Air Sensing Tube 4 = Clogged Filter Switch and Condensate Overflow Switch, 2 5 = Clogged Filter Switch and Discharge Air Sensing Tube2 6 = Condensate Overflow Switch and Discharge Air Sensing Tube' 7 = Clogged Filter Switch, Condensate Overflow Switch and Discharge Air Sensing Tube', 2 Digit 26— Not Used Digit 27— Unit Hardware Enhancements 0 = No Enhancements 1 = Stainless Steel Drain Pan Digit 28— Short Circuit Current Rating 0 = Standard (5k) SCCR Marking A = Tier 2 (=65K) SCCR Marking Digit 29— Low Ambient4 0 = None A = Low Ambient Cooling to 0°F Model Number Notes Notes: 1. Includes SymbioM Indoor Module. 2. Includes SymbioTm Fresh Air Module. 3. Includes SymbioTM Customer Connection Module. 4. Standard Low Ambient Cooling Limit is 40°F. S. Includes gas piping and shutoff valve (field assembly required). RT-SVX071 B-EN General Information Unit Inspection To protect against loss due to damage incurred in transit, perform inspection immediately upon receipt of the unit. Check carefully for shipping damage. If any damage is found, report it immediately, and file a claim against the transportation company. Exterior Inspection If the job site inspection reveals damage or material shortages, file a claim with the carrier immediately. Specify the type and extent of the damage on the bill of lading before signing. Notify the appropriate sales representative. Important. Do not proceed with installation of a damaged unit without sales representative approval. • Inspect the complete exterior for signs of shipping damages to unit or packing material. • Verify that the nameplate data matches the sales order and bill of lading. • Verify that the unit is properly equipped and there are no material shortages. • Verify the power supply complies with the unit nameplate specifications. Inspection for Concealed Damage Inspect the components for concealed damage as soon as possible after delivery and before it is stored. If concealed damage is discovered: • Notify the carrier's terminal of the damage immediately by phone and by mail. • Concealed damage must be reported within 15 days. • Request an immediate, joint inspection of the damage with the carrier and consignee. • Stop unpacking the unit. • Do not remove damaged material from receiving location. • Take photos of the damage, if possible. • The owner must provide reasonable evidence that the damage did not occur after delivery. Unit Storage Take precautions to prevent condensate from forming inside the unit's electrical compartments and motors if: • The unit is stored before it is installed; or, • The unit is set on the roof curb, and temporary heat is provided in the building. Isolate all side panel service entrances and base pan openings (e.g., conduit holes, S/A and R/ A openings, and flue openings) from the ambient air until the unit is ready for start-up. Note: Do not use the unit's heater for temporary heat without first completing the start-up. The manufacturer will not assume any responsibility for equipment damage resulting from condensate accumulation on the unit's electrical and/or mechanical components. Unit Description Before shipment, each unit is leak tested, dehydrated, charged with refrigerant and compressor oil, and run tested for proper control operation. The condenser coils are all aluminum microchannel. Direct -drive, vertical discharge condenser fans are provided with built-in thermal overload protection. All units come with standard SymbioTm 700 control system with advanced diagnostics. Door Handles Door handles rotate 180 degrees for use on either left- or right-handed doors. Handles will be in the vertical position when latched, as shown in the following figure. Figure 1. Door handles To lock: 1. Verify handle is in the vertical (latched) position. 2. Using a Phillips head screwdriver, push and rotate the handle screw clockwise 1/4 turn. To unlock: Use a Phillps head screwdriver to push and rotate handle screw counterclockwise 1/4 turn. Unit Nameplate A Mylar unit nameplate is located on the unit's corner support next to the filter access panel. It includes the unit model number, serial number, electrical characteristics, refrigerant charge, as well as other pertinent unit data. RT-SVX071 B-EN General Information Compressor Nameplate The nameplate for the compressors are located on the side of the compressor. Microchannel Coil Barcode ID Barcode decal used for coil part identification can be located on the header and top of coil's inlet/outlet side. LonTalk Communication Interface (Optional) The SymbioTM controllers supports communication with LonTalk® open protocol applications. An advanced license is required to enable this feature. The LonTalk module is available factory supplied or as a field -installed kit. BACnet Communications Interface (Optional) The SymbioTM controller provides integrated communication with BACnet® open protocol applications. An advanced license is required to enable this feature. When enabled, the following selections are available: BACnet MS/TP, BACnet IP, or BACnet Zigbee® (Air-Fi®). System Input Devices and Functions The SymbioTm 700 controller requires a zone sensor or thermostat input to operate the unit in a CVZT or WZT configuration. Note: Use of a conventional thermostat will reduce unit functionality. The number of available modes depends on the type of zone sensor or thermostat selected. Descriptions of the basic input devices used with the Symbio 700 network are provided to acquaint the operator with the various modules. Refer to the unit schematic for specific module connections. The following controls are available from the factory for field installation. Supply Fan Failure Supply Fan Proving is active when the Supply Fan is commanded ON. The supply fan speed must be greater than 30 rpm for 40 continuous seconds. If the supply fan speed falls below 30 rpm, supply fan failure diagnostic is generated, and operation is stopped. Clogged Filter Switch (Optional) The unit mounted clogged filter switch monitors the pressure differential across the return air filters. It is mounted in the filter section and is connected to the Fresh Air Options Module. A diagnostic signal is sent to the controller if the pressure differential across the filters is at least 0.5 inch w.c. The contacts will automatically open when the pressure differential across the filters decreases to approximately 0.4 inch w.c. The clogged filter output is energized when the supply fan is operating and the clogged filter switch has been closed for at least 2 minutes. The system will continue to operate regardless of the status of the filter switch. For further details, refer to Installation Instructions ACC-SVN238*-EN. Note: On units equipped with factory installed MERV 13 filters, a clogged filter switch with different pressure settings will be installed. This switch will close when the differential pressure is approximately 0.8 inch w. c. and open when the differential falls to 0.7 inch w.c. Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch A condensate overflow condition will be detected by a condensate overflow float switch. When the condensate level reaches the trip point, the diagnostic condition will be detected. When the condensate overflow input CLOSES for six continuous seconds, the following actions will be taken by the SymbioTm 700 controls: • An auto -reset diagnostic will be generated. All compressor or heating operations will be disabled immediately. Condenser fans and compressors will be de -energized. Supply fan operation will be shutdown. • Once the overflow condition has been cleared and the input is OPEN for six seconds, all diagnostic conditions will be cleared. The unit will return to normal operation. Auto -reset clearing will occur twice each time the unit is powered up. On the third occurrence, the unit will initiate a lock -out and require manual reset. If an auto - reset overflow occurs once, but does not occur again for 72 hours, the trip counter will reset allowing more auto -resets to occur. Compressor Disable (CPR1/2) This input incorporates the low pressure control (LPC) of each refrigeration circuit. If this circuit is open before the compressor is started, the compressor will not be allowed to operate. Anytime this circuit is opened for one continuous second during compressor operation, the compressor for that circuit is immediately turned OFF. The compressor will not be allowed to restart for a minimum of three minutes should the contacts close. If four consecutive open conditions occur during the first three minutes of operation, the compressor for that circuit will be locked out, a diagnostic communicated to the remote panel (if installed), and a manual reset will be required to restart the compressor. Low Pressure Control When the LPC is opened for 1 continuous second, the compressor for that circuit is turned off immediately. The compressor will not be allowed to restart for a minimum of 3 minutes. RT-SVX071 B-EN General Information If four consecutive open conditions occur during an active call for cooling, the compressor will be locked out, a diagnostic generated, if applicable, and a manual reset required to restart the compressor. High Pressure Control The high pressure controls are wired in series between the compressor outputs on the SymbioTM controller and the compressor contactor coils. If the high pressure control switch opens, the controller senses a lack of current while calling for cooling and locks the compressor out. If four consecutive open conditions occur during an active call for cooling, the compressor will be locked out, a diagnostic generated, if applicable, and a manual reset required to restart the compressor. Zone Sensors Manual Changeover (BAYSENS1O6*) This sensor features three system switch settings (Heat, Cool, and Off) and two fan settings (On and Auto). It is a manual changeover control with single setpoint. Manual/Automatic Changeover (BAYSENS1O8*) This sensor features four system switch settings (Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off) and two fan settings (On and Auto). It is a manual or auto changeover control with dual setpoint capability. It can be used with a remote zone temperature sensor BAYSENS077*. Wall Mounted Relative Humidity Sensor (BAYSENSO36*) Field installed, wall mounted humidity sensor that measures temperature and relative humidity. Relative humidity input is used to control activation of dehumidification Duct Mounted Relative Humidity Sensor (BAYSENSO37*) Field installed, duct mounted humidity sensor that measures temperature and relative humidity. Relative humidity input is used to control activation of dehumidification. Integrated Comfort System (BAYSENSO73*) This sensor features remote zone sensing and timed override with override cancellation. It is used with a Trane Integrated ComfortTm building management system. Integrated Comfort System (BAYSENSO74*) This sensor features single setpoint capability and timed override with override cancellation. It is used with a Trane Integrated ComfortTm building management system. Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS016*) This bullet type temperature sensor can be used for outside air (ambient) sensing, return air temperature sensing, supply air temperature sensing, remote temperature sensing (uncovered). Wiring procedures vary according to the particular application and equipment involved. Refer to the unit's wiring diagrams for proper connections. Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENSO77*) This sensor can be used with BAYSENS106*, 108*, 110*, 800* Remote Panels. When this sensor is wired to a BAYSENS800* Remote Panel, wiring must be 18 AWG Shielded Twisted Pair (Belden 8760 or equivalent). Refer to the specific Remote Panel for wiring details. Thermostat The unit must have a thermostat to operate. • BAYSTAT151 One Heat/One Cool Auto changeover digital display thermostat. • BAYSTAT155 Three Heat/Two Cool Auto changeover display thermostat. • BAYSENS150 Three Heat/Two Cool Auto changeover digital display thermostat. Seven day programmable thermostat with night setback. High Temperature Sensor (FIAHTSTOO1*) This sensor connects to the SymbioTm 700 Emergency Stop Input and provides high limit "shutdown" of the unit. The sensor is used to detect high temperatures due to a high thermal event in the air conditioning or ventilation ducts. The sensor is designed to mount directly to the sheet metal duct. Each kit contains two sensors. The return air duct sensor (X13100040010) is set to open at 135°F. The supply air duct sensor (X13100040020) is set to open at 240°F. The control can be reset after the temperature has been lowered approximately 25OF below the cutout setpoint. Digital Display Zone Sensor (BAYSENS135*) LCD display provides heat, cool, auto, on, and off status. Display includes two temperature setpoints, and a lockable setting with °F or °C indicators. 10 RT-SVX071 B-EN General Information Touch Screen Programmable Zone Sensor (BAYSENS800) This sensor uses a BACnet® MS/TP link to communicate zone temperature and setpoints. Sensor includes Auto, Heat, Cool, or Off system switch, as well as Fan Auto or On switch. This is a seven day programmable thermostat with night setback. Notes: • Not compatible with VAV units. Requires BACnet® communications. • For additional sensors, refer to the product catalog. Note: BASYSENS800* with BACnet® enabled on the SymbioTM controller will report fault detection and diagnostics at the zone sensor. This functionality is only applicable if the customer does not have a building management system, and the unit is running standalone with the BAYSENS800. Evaporator Frost Control Frostat is standard on all 6 to 25T units. Discharge Line Temp Switch (DLTS) The DLTS is looped in series with HPC and LPC. It prevents compressor from overheating (over 300°F dome temp) in case of indoor fan failure (cooling) or outdoor fan failure (heating). Smoke Detector Sensor (Optional) This sensor provides high limit "shutdown" of the unit and requires a manual reset. The sensor is used to detect smoke in the air conditioning or ventilation ducts. Notes: • The supply air smoke detector samples supply air. The return smoke detectors sample return air. The smoke detectors are designed to shut off the unit if smoke is sensed. This function is performed by sampling the airflow entering the unit at the return air opening. Follow the instructions provided below to assure that the airflow through the unit is sufficient for adequate sampling. Failure to follow these instructions will prevent the smoke detectors from performing its design function. • Airflow through the unit is affected by the amount of dirt and debris accumulated on the indoor coil and filters. To insure that airflow through the unit is adequate for proper sampling by the return air smoke detector, complete adherence to the maintenance procedures, including recommended intervals between filter changes, and coil cleaning is required. • Periodic checks and maintenance procedures must be performed on the smoke detector to insure that it will function properly. For detailed instructions concerning these checks and procedures, refer to the appropriate section(s) of the smoke detector Installation and Maintenance Instructions provided with the literature package for this unit. In order for the supply air smoke detector or return air smoke detector to properly sense smoke in the supply air stream or return air stream, the air velocity entering the smoke detector unit must be between 500 and 4000 feet per minute. Equipment covered in this manual will develop an airflow velocity that falls within these limits over the entire airflow range specified in the evaporator fan performance tables. Phase Monitor This sensor monitors voltage between the 3 conductors of the 3 phase power supply. Two LED lights are provided: • The green light indicates that a balanced 3 phase supply circuit is properly connected. • The red light indicates that unit operation has been prevented. There are two conditions that will prevent unit operation: — The power supply circuit is not balanced with the proper phase sequence of L1, L2, L3 for the 3 conductors of a 3 phase circuit. — The line to line voltage is not between 180 volts and 633 volts. RT-SVX071 B-EN 11 Pre -Installation Fiberglass Wool! Exposure to glass wool fibers without all necessary PPE equipment could result in cancer, respiratory, skin or eye irritation, which could result in death or serious injury. Disturbing the insulation in this product during installation, maintenance or repair will expose you to airborne particles of glass wool fibers and ceramic fibers known to the state of California to cause cancer through inhalation. You MUST wear all necessary Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) including gloves, eye protection, a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator, long sleeves and pants when working with products containing fiberglass wool. Precautionary Measures: • Avoid breathing fiberglass dust. • Use a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator. • Avoid contact with the skin or eyes. Wear long- sleeved, loose -fitting clothing, gloves, and eye protection. • Wash clothes separately from other clothing; rinse washer thoroughly. • Operations such as sawing, blowing, tear -out, and spraying may generate fiber concentrations requiring additional respiratory protection. Use the appropriate NIOSH approved respirator. First Aid Measures: • Eye Contact - Flush eyes with water to remove dust. If symptoms persist, seek medical attention. • Skin Contact - Wash affected areas gently with soap and warm water after handling. Precautionary Measures • Avoid breathing fiberglass dust. • Use a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator. • Avoid contact with the skin or eyes. Wear long-sleeved, loose -fitting clothing, gloves, and eye protection. • Wash clothes separately from other clothing: rinse washer thoroughly. • Operations such as sawing, blowing, tear -out, and spraying may generate fiber concentrations requiring additional respiratory protection. Use the appropriate NIOSH approved respiration in these situations. First Aid Measures Eye Contact - Flush eyes with water to remove dust. If symptoms persist, seek medical attention. Skin Contact - Wash affected areas gently with soap and warm water after handling. Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Verify that no power is present with a voltmeter. 12 RT-SVX071 B-EN Dimensions and Weights Dimensional Data Figure 2. 6 to 10 tons standard efficiency :::II b ��Mb' - NMMI�7h EVAPORATOR SECTION ACCESS PANEL ALTERNATE CONDENSATE CONNECTION 3/4 - 14 NPT DIA. HOLE [22381 1/2 NPT GAS CONNECTION COMPRESSOR ACCESS PANE (80 MBh, 120 MBh) 3/4 NPT GAS CONNECTION 15- (150 MBh, 200 MBh, 250 MBh) ,i TOP PANEL CONTROL PANEL ACCESS - CONDENSER FAN [1231 9" . [2291 Figure 3. 6 to 10 tons standard efficiency— downflow airflow supply/return, through -the -base utilities 3 5/8" 2MM 1 2" 9 7/8" 2" t ~ 444 MM ~-251 MMy I- 444 MM 4" 102 MM RETURN SUPPLY 32 1/8" 816 MM THROUGH THE BASE CONDENSATE 41 104 M MM �� 27 701 MM MM MM 40 3/4" 1035 MM - THROUGH THE y 2: BASE ELECTRICAL 149 MM SO 7/8" 276 MM T 0 RT-SVX071 B-EN 13 Dimensions and Weights Figure 4. 6 to 10 tons standard efficiency— horizontal airflow supply/return 32-1/4" Figure 5. 6 to 10 tons standard efficiency— unit clearance and roof opening CLEARANCE CLEARANCE 36" (914 MM) HORIZONTAL FLOW - 18" (457 MM) 4dPDOWNFLOW - 36" (914 MM) \ TYPICAL ROOF OPENING CLEARANCE FROM TOP OF UNIT 72" \ 46"' 88 1168 MM 46 \ 2251 MM � \�1168 MM / 53 1/4" \ /1352 MM CLEARANCE 48" (1219 MM) .// CLEARANCE 36" (914 MM) 14 RT-SVX071 B-EN Dimensions and Weights Figure 6. 6 to 10 tons standard efficiency— roof curb E 36 19��` MMl G 'Qq G173/MM 181/4" �CF1861 N?O 34 3/8" 1" 470 MM 873 MM 25 MM �� 1� 168 MM 14" 'G �j �/� 181/z" o4s/MM JFot�RO 355 MM '�� //� 1„ 470 MM 83 7/8"f yO 41"/ l25 MM \130 MM��I�on�o�L 50 3/8"1280 MM 1� MMi �c 30 l9 2" 51 MM Figure 7. 6 to 10 tons standard efficiency — downflow duct connections, field fabricated 17 3/4" 51MM 17 3/4" 33 3/4" 451MM 657 MM 133 3/4 857 MM ALL FLANGES 1 1/4" (31 MM) RT-SVX071 B-EN 15 Dimensions and Weights Figure 8. 6 to 10 tons standard efficiency —swing diameter for hinged door(s) option --- 17„ 432 MM 21 3/8" 543 MM Applicable to Y_C models only v\\� 345/8"----- 879 MM Figure 9. 6 to 25 tons standard efficiency— gas pipe height _< � Note: Height of gas pipe required from inside unit base to gas shut off assembly (factory provided). Model Dimension A inch mm YSJ (072 - 150)A 4 5/8 117 YSJ (180 - 300)A 1 3/6 30 16 RT-SVX071 B-EN Dimensions and Weights Figure 10. 12.5 tons standard efficiency EVAPORATOR SECTION ACCESS PANEL ALTERNATE CONDENSATE DRAIN CONNECTION 3/4 - 14 NPT DIA HOLE C INDOOR TOP PANEL CONTROL BOX SECTION j/ ACCESS PANEL UTDOOR TOP PANEL i & kno wo, %m ow oparos - rr.»4 \ 4 [217]12171 � 99-5/8" (25321 \ 1/2 NPT CONNECTION J (120 MBh) 3/4 NPT GAS CONNECTION (150 MBh, 200 MBh, 250 MBh) 63-1/8" [16041 SERVICE GAUGE PORT ACCESS 1-3/8" (35MM) DIA. HOLE PT CONTROL WIRE (50MM) DIA. HOLE UNIT POWER WIRE 2" (50MM) DIA. HOLE -COMPRESSOR ACCESS PANEL UNIT POWER WIRE 1-3/8" (35MM) DIA. HOLE UNIT POWER WIRE 1-3/8" (35MM) DIA. HOLE Figure 11. 12.5 tons standard efficiency— downflow airflow supply/return, through -the -base utilities LSE RT-SVX071 B-EN 17 Dimensions and Weights Figure 12. 12.5 tons standard efficiency —horizontal airflow, supply and return /4„ MM Figure 13. 12.5 tons standard efficiency —unit clearance and roof opening CLEARANCE CLEARANCE 36" (914 MM) HORIZONTAL FLOW - 18" (457 MM) DOWNFLOW 36" (914 MM) \ TYPICAL ROOF OPENING CLEARANCE FROM TOP OF UNIT 72" \ „�46" 46 99 11/16" 1168 MM \ 2532 MM � 1168 MM/ 63 3/16" 1605 MM CLEARANCE 48" (1219 MM) \ CLEARANCE 36" (914 MM) 18 RT-SVX071 B-EN Dimensions and Weights Figure 14. 12.5 tons standard efficiency— roof curb 1 3/4" 44 MM y� 56 3/8" ' 34 3/8' 1432 MM\` / 873 MM ..................... la- (974 i a8 MM 6 s/s' �Mb M �OM�OW 168 MM 1' ' 25 MM 80 1/2" 83 7/8' 1.18 1/2" 2045 MM 2130 MM 470 MM 25 MM . u 1 25 MM 34; 873 �j 512MM 2" 51 MM Figure 15. 12.5 tons standard efficiency —swing diameter for hinged door(s) option 11" [279] 17-3/8" 21-3/4" [443] [554] 35" [89C RT-SVX071 B-EN 59 7/8' 1521 MM 60 3/8" 1534 MM 19 Dimensions and Weights Figure 16. 6 to 12.5 tons standard efficiency —economizer, manual or motorized fresh air damper BAROMETRIi DIMENSIONS EXTENDS TO 21-5/8" (549MM) WHEN POWERED EXHAUST IS COUPLED WITH LOW LEAK ECONOMIZER IOOD 20 RT-SVX071 B-EN Dimensions and Weights Figure 17. 6 to 12.5 tons standard efficiency —power exhaust RT-SVX071 B-EN Dimensions and Weights Figure 18. 15 to 25 tons standard efficiency— power exhaust 4.4 21.4 Figure 19. 15 to 25 tons standard efficiency GAS CONNECTION 314 NPT (280, 320, 400 MBh) INDOOR TOP PANEL 2" ELECTRICAL CONN SINGLE POIN= POWER "T" MODELS ONLY CONDENSATE 9 44 3/4' p [1135] 31 \ [i 55" \ [1398] 65 5/8" 123" [1668] [3124] \ UNIT CONTROL WIRE UNIT CONTROL WIRE J 2" (50 MM) DIA. HOLE UNIT POWER WIRE - 2" (50 MM) DIA. HOLE L BOX SECTION PANEL -OUTDOOR TOP PANEL 59" D.0 CAB OR [1499] 66" D.1 CAB [1676] `--CONDENSER COIL [2210] \ `SERVICE GAUGE PORT ACCESS 1 3/8" (35 MM) DIA. HOLE 22 RT-SVX071 B-EN Dimensions and Weights Figure 20. 15 to 25 tons standard efficiency— downflow airflow supply/return, through -the -base utilities 667 MM 177 M3653MM002M488MM� 8 21MM 2MM 55 3/8" 205MM 1404MM 55.0577 [1398.4671 THROUGH THROUGH 55.2977 THE BASE THE BASE GAS 11404.5631 ELECTRICAL ONL MODELS ONLY) Figure 21. 15 to 25 ton standard efficiency— horizontal airflow supply/return 2 14 I - 48" 1223MM i 1/4" .133] /2" 31] 6" [153] RT-SVX071 B-EN 23 Dimensions and Weights Figure 22. 15 to 25 tons standard efficiency — unit clearance and roof opening CLEARANCE 36" 914 MM \ CLEARANCE 68"UNIT OUTLINE� \ \ 1727 MM - / CLEARANCE FORM \ TOP OF UNIT 72" MM (1829 MM) ROOF 761/2" / \ \ OPENING 1943 MM / CLEARANCE 48" _\ 81" `\ 1219 MM 2057 MM \' / CLEARANCE 60" 1524 MM Figure 23. 15 to 25 tons standard efficiency —roof curb 1 1/2" (38 MM) PERIMETER CURB FLANGE 80 5/8" 7 7/6" 2048 MM 77" 189 M�Z 1956 MM 1 14 1/16" 357 MM 2" / 51 MM 1" \ 116 7/8" 25 MM 2969 MM 113/16" 46 MM �- 25 MM 1 165 MM, 23 1/4" 591 MM y 25 MM 28 9/16" 725 MM 691/2" 1765 MM Q. OJee� 7 1/2" 117 3/16" 191 MM 2977 MM 81" 2057 MM 24 RT-SVX071 B-EN Dimensions and Weights Figure 24. 15 to 25 ton standard efficiency —swing diameter for hinged door(s) option 32" 809MM ,,,/ I , I- - -",/ 30" 754MM 36" 907M M RT-SVX071 B-EN 25 Dimensions and Weights Clearances Figure 25, p. 26 illustrates the minimum operating and service clearances for either a single or multiple unit installation. These clearances are the minimum distances necessary to assure adequate serviceability, cataloged unit capacity, and peak operating efficiency. Providing less than the recommended clearances may result in condenser coil starvation, "short-circuiting" of exhaust and economizer airflows, or recirculation of hot condenser air. Figure 25. Typical installation clearances for single and multiple unit applications Note 3 Barometric F i Dimensions Extends to 21-5/8" (549 mm) when Powered Exhaust is Coupled with Low Leak Economizer r Hood 26 RT-SVX071 B-EN Dimensions and Weights Weights Table 1. Maximum unit, corner weights (lbs) and center of gravity dimensions (in.) Tons Unit Model No. Maximum Model Weights(a) Corner Weights(b) Center of Gravity (in.) Shipping Net A B C D Length Width 6 YSJ072 1107 1009 364 339 195 209 43 19 7.5 YSJ090 1111 1013 365 340 196 210 43 19 8 YSJ102 1127 1029 370 345 199 213 43 19 10 YSJ120 1137 1039 374 348 200 215 43 19 12.5 YSJ 150 1512 1318 442 446 313 310 50 26 15 YSJ180 2220 2000 671 492 354 483 52 36 17.5 YSJ210 2250 2030 672 509 366 484 53 36 20 YSJ240 2320 2100 754 516 337 493 50 34 25 YSJ300 2370 2150 746 529 363 512 51 35 (a) Weights are approximate. (b) Corner weights are given for information only. Figure 26. Corner weights Center of Gravitv Cc C 0 C Table 2. Factory installed options (FIOPS)/accessory net weights (lb) Accessory YSJ072-120 YSJ 150 YSJ 180-300 6, 7.5, 8.5, 10 Tons 12.5 Tons 15, 17.5, 20, 25 Tons Barometric Relief 10 10 40 Economizer 36 36 91 Hinged Doors 12 12 20 Low Leak Economizer - Downflow 91 91 150 Low Leak Economizer - Horizontal — — 180 Manual Outside Air Damper 26 26 15 Motorized Outside Air Damper 30 30 82 Oversized Motor 14 — 30 Powered Convenience Outlet 38 50 50 Powered Exhaust 80 80 110 Reheat Coil 16 20 33 Roof Curb 105 111 235 Smoke Detector, Supply 5 5 5 Smoke Detector, Return 7 7 5 Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger 6 6 5 Through -the -Base Electrical 13 13 10 Through -the -Base Gas 5 5 10 RT-SVX071 B-EN 27 Dimensions and Weights Table 2. Factory installed options (FIOPS)/accessory net weights (lb) (continued) Accessory YSJ072-120 YSJ150 YSJ180-300 6, 7.5, 8.5, 10 Tons 12.5 Tons 15, 17.5, 20, 25 Tons Unit Mounted Circuit Breaker 5 5 10 Unit Mounted Disconnect 5 5 10 Notes: 1. Weights for options not listed are <5 lbs. 2. Net weight should be added to unit weight when ordering factory -installed accessories. 3. Weights are approximate. Lifting and Rigging Heavy Object! Failure to follow instructions below could result in unit dropping which could result in death or serious injury, and equipment or property -only damage. Ensure that all the lifting equipment used is properly rated for the weight of the unit being lifted. Each of the cables (chains or slings), hooks, and shackles used to lift the unit must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the unit. Lifting cables (chains or slings) may not be of the same length. Adjust as necessary for even unit lift. Improper Unit Lift! Failure to properly lift unit in a LEVEL position could result in unit dropping and possibly crushing operator/technician which could result in death or serious injury, and equipment or property -only damage. Test lift unit approximately 24 inches (61 cm) to verify proper center of gravity lift point. To avoid dropping of unit, reposition lifting point if unit is not level. Figure 27. Rigging and center of gravity — 6 to 12.5 tons ATTAC CABLE Figure 28. Rigging and center of gravity— 15 to 25 tons 28 RT-SVX071 B-EN Installation Horizontal Units If the unit is installed at ground level, elevate it above the snow line. Provide concrete footings at each support location with a "full perimeter" support structure or a slab foundation for support. Refer to the weights information in the Dimensions and Weights chapter for the unit's operating and point loading weights when constructing a footing foundation. If anchoring is required, anchor the unit to the slab using hold down bolts or isolators. Isolators should be installed to minimize the transmission of vibrations into the building. Risk of Roof Collapsing! Failure to ensure proper structural roof support could cause the roof to collapse, which could result in death or serious injury and property damage. Confirm with a structural engineer that the roof structure is strong enough to support the combined weight of the roofcurb, the unit, and any accessories. For rooftop applications, ensure the roof is strong enough to support the combined unit and support structural weight. Refer to maximum unit and corner weights (center of gravity) dimensions in the Dimensions and Weights section for the unit operating weights. If anchoring is required, anchor the unit to the roof with hold-down bolts or isolators. Check with a roofing contractor for proper waterproofing procedures. Ductwork Supply and return air openings as viewed from the rear of the unit are shown in the following drawings. Figure 29. 6 to 10 tons standard efficiency — horizontal airflow supply/return Figure 30. 12.5 tons standard efficiency — horizontal airflow, supply and return Figure 31. 15 to 25 ton standard efficiency — horizontal airflow supply/return m, Supply and return air openings as viewed from a downflow configuration are shown in the following drawings. Elbows with turning vanes or splitters are recommended to minimize air noise due to turbulence and to reduce static pressure. When attaching the ductwork to the unit, provide a water tight flexible connector at the unit to prevent operating sounds from transmitting through the ductwork. All outdoor ductwork between the unit and the structure should be weather proofed after installation is completed. RT-SVX071 B-EN 29 Installation Figure 32. 6 to 10 tons standard efficiency — downflow airflow supply/return, through -the -base utilities : rn Figure 33. 12.5 tons standard efficiency— downflow airflow supply/return, through -the -base utilities Figure 34. 15 to 25 tons standard efficiency — downflow airflow supply/return, through -the -base utilities -55311' 205MM 1904MM �- 48" 223MM - 55.05)) [1398.96�] THROUGH THROUGH - 55.2977 THE B .E THE BASE GAS [1404.5631 ELECTRICAL OMLYMODE Roof Curb Downflow The roof curbs for these units consists of a `full perimeter" enclosure to support the unit just inside of the unit base rail. The 12.5 ton standard efficiency units contain a support base alignment rail and will extend past the end of the roof curb as shown in figures below Before installing any roof curb, verify: • It is the correct curb for the unit. • The includes the necessary gaskets and hardware. • The purposed installation location provides the required clearance for proper operation. • Insure that the curb is level and square. The top surface of the curb must be true to assure an adequate curb -to unit seal. Combustible Materials! Failure to maintain proper clearance between the unit and combustible materials could cause a fire which could result in death, serious injury, or property damage. Refer to unit nameplate and installation instructions for proper clearances. Verify that appropriate materials were used in the construction of roof and ductwork. Combustible materials should not be used in the construction of ductwork or roof curb that is in close proximity to heater elements or any hot surface. Any combustible material on the inside of the unit base should be removed and replaced with appropriate material. Step-by-step curb assembly and installation instructions ship with each accessory roof curb kit. Follow the instructions carefully to assure proper fit -up when the unit is set into place. Note: To assure proper condensate flow during operation, the unit (and curb) must be level. If the unit is elevated, a field constructed catwalk around the unit is strongly recommended to provide easy access for unit maintenance and service. Recommendations for installing the Supply Air and Return Air ductwork joining the roof curb are included in the curb instruction booklet. Curb ductwork must be fabricated and installed by the installing contractor before the unit is set into place. Note: For sound consideration, cut only the holes in the roof deck for the ductwork penetrations. Do not cut out the entire roof deck within the curb perimeter. 30 RT-SVX071 B-EN Installation Figure 35. View for base to roof curb alignment on C.0 cabinet on a 50" x 84" roof curb Base Aligr Figure 36. View for base to roof curb alignment on C.0 cabinet on a 60" x 84" roof curb If a Curb Accessory Kit is not used: • The ductwork can be attached directly to the factory - provided flanges around the unit's supply and return air openings. Be sure to use flexible duct connections at the unit. • For "built-up" curbs supplied by others, gaskets must be installed around the curb perimeter flange and the supply and return air opening flanges. Rigging Heavy Object! Failure to follow instructions below could result in unit dropping which could result in death or serious injury, and equipment or property -only damage. Ensure that all the lifting equipment used is properly rated for the weight of the unit being lifted. Each of the cables (chains or slings), hooks, and shackles used to lift the unit must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the unit. Lifting cables (chains or slings) may not be of the same length. Adjust as necessary for even unit lift. See Dimensions and Weights section for rigging illustration, and center -of -gravity dimensional data. Refer to the typical unit operating weights table before proceeding. 1. Confirm unit does not need additional moves by fork lift. 2. Prepare unit for rigging as follows: • 6 to 12.5 ton units: Remove all drill screws fastening wood protection to metal base rail. Remove all screws securing wooden protection to wooden top crate. • 15 to 25 ton units: Remove the front base rail bumper protection. Note: For unit protection, the top crate should remain in place during lifting. If it must be removed prior to lifting, protect unit from damage. Top crate must be removed prior to operation. Improper Unit Lift! Failure to properly lift unit in a LEVEL position could result in unit dropping and possibly crushing operator/technician which could result in death or serious injury, and equipment or property -only damage. Test lift unit approximately 24 inches (61 cm) to verify proper center of gravity lift point. To avoid dropping of unit, reposition lifting point if unit is not level. 3. Rig the unit as shown in the weights section. Attach adequate strength lifting slings to all four lifting brackets in the unit base rail. Do not use cables, chains, or slings except as shown. 4. Install a lifting bar, as shown in the Dimensions and Weights chapter, to protect the unit and to facilitate a uniform lift. The minimum distance between the lifting hook and the top of the unit should be 7 feet. 5. Test -lift the unit to ensure it is properly rigged and balanced, make any necessary rigging adjustments. Figure 37. Fork pockets — 6 to10 ton standard efficiency units REMO� FORK BRAD REMOVE 2 METAL RUNNERS AND 3 WOODEN BOARDS RT-SVX071 B-EN 31 Installation Figure 38. Fork pockets —12.5 ton standard efficiency units REMOVE 10 FORK LIFT BRACKETS NOTICE REMOVE THIS ROOFCURS ALIGNMENT BRACKET PRIOR TO SETTING UNIT ONTO OD- INCH ROOFCURB ONLY Figure 39. Fork pockets —15 to 25 ton standard efficiency units REMOVEF REMOVE WOODEN BOARDS 6. Lift the unit enough to allow the removal of base fork pocket protection components as shown in the following figures. 7. When C cabinet (digit 39 = C) units are installed on smaller existing roof curb (50"x 84") for replacement applications, do not remove alignment bracket. This bracket helps assure proper alignment of duct openings. 8. Downflow units; align the base rail of the unit with the curb rail while lowering the unit onto the curb. Make sure that the gasket on the curb is not damaged while positioning the unit. General Unit Requirements The checklist listed below is a summary of the steps required to successfully install a commercial unit. This checklist is intended to acquaint the installing personnel with what is required in the installation process. It does not replace the detailed instructions called out in the applicable sections of this manual. • Check the unit for shipping damage and material shortage; file a freight claim and notify appropriate sales representative. • Verify correct model, options and voltage from unit nameplate. • Verify that the installation location of the unit will provide the required clearance for proper operation. • Assemble and install the roof curb (if applicable). Refer to the latest edition of the curb installers guide that ships with each curb kit. • Fabricate and install ductwork; secure ductwork to curb. • Install pitch pocket for power supply through building roof. (If applicable) • Rigging the unit. • Set the unit onto the curb; check for levelness. • Ensure unit -to -curb seal is tight and without buckles or cracks. • Install and connect a condensate drain line to the evaporator drain connection. Factory Installed Economizer • Ensure the economizer has been pulled out into the operating position. Refer to the economizer installers guide for proper position and setup. • Install all access panels. External Vent Hood Installation Note: This procedure applies only to 15 to 25 tons Gas Heat Models only. 1. Remove and discard the cover plate located on the gas heat panel. Important: • Make sure you read the label located on the cover plate before you discard it. • Do not discard the fastening screws! They will be needed to install the vent hood. 32 RT-SVX071 B-EN Installation Figure 40. Discard cover plate 2. Locate the vent hood behind the panel, on the right side of the burner assembly. Figure 41. Vent hood shipping location 3. Install the vent hood on the gas heat panel using the screws removed in Step 1. Make sure it is properly secured to the panel. Figure 42. Vent hood installation Temperature Limit Switch Usage for Gas Heat Units Units are factory shipped in the downflow discharge configuration but can be field converted to a horizontal discharge configuration. Some, but not all units require a different TC01 limit switch, which is either attached to the combustion blower motor (6 to 12.5T) or to the installed TC01 limit switch (15 to 25T) if horizontal discharge configuration is used. If any of the units are installed in the downflow discharge configuration and have the alternate TC01 limit switch provided, remove the additional TC01 limit switch which is either attached to the combustion blower motor (6 to 12.5T) or to the installed TC01 limit switch (15 to 25T) and discard. For detailed instructions, refer to "TC01 Instructions," p. 34. Table 3. TC01 tripping values Tons Unit Model Number TCO1 Tripping Values - Downflow/Horizontal YSJ072A**(O,A)L 105F 6 YSJ072A**(O,A)M 120F YSJ072A**(O,A)H 140F YSJ090A**(O,A)L 120F/110F 7.5 YSJ090A**(O,A)M 130F/135F YSJ090A**(O,A)H 125F/150F YSJ102A**(0,A)L 120F/110F 8.5 YSJ102A**(0,A)M 130F/135F YSJ102A**(O,A)H 125F/150F YSJ120A**(O,A)L 136F 10 YSJ120A**(O,A)M 125F/140F YSJ120A**(O,A)H 130F/150F YSJ150A**(O,A)L 125F/130F 12.5 YSJ150A**(O,A)M 130F YSJ150A**(O,A)H 110F YSJ180A**(O,A)L 140E-Y/150-7 15 YSJ180A**(O,A)M 150E-Y/195F-Y YSJ180A**(O,A)H 150E-Y/200E-Y RT-SVX071 B-EN 33 Installation Table 3. TC01 tripping values (continued) Tons Unit Model Number TC01 Tripping Values - Downflow/Horizontal YSJ210A**(O,A)L 140E-3"/150-7" 17.5 YSJ210A**(0,A)M 150E-3"/195F-3" YSJ210A**(O,A)H 150E-3"/200E-3" YSJ240A**(O,A)L 140E-3"/150-7" 20 YSJ240A**(0,A)M 150E-3"/195F-3" YSJ240A**(0,A)H 150E-3"/200E-3" YSJ300A**(O,A)L 140E-3"/150-7" 25 YSJ300A**(O,A)M 150E-3"/195F-3" YSJ300A**(O,A)H 150E-3"/200E-3" Horizontal Discharge Conversion (6 to 12.5 Ton Units) Notes: • 15 to 25 ton units require purchase of an accessory kit for conversion. • 6 to 12.5 ton units move the supply cover to return opening and return cover to supply opening. Supplies Needed by Installer for Conversion: 3 ounce tube of high temperature RTV sealant (500'F / 260'C, similar to Dow Corning 736). Note: Failure to use recommended sealant could result in unit performance loss. If a unit is to be converted to a horizontal discharge, the following conversion must be performed: 1. Remove RETURN and SUPPLY duct covers. 2. Place SUPPLY DUCT COVER over down -flow return opening. (insulation side down) 3. Using self -drilling screws, (or screws removed from duct cover), screw through dimples to attach DUCT COVER to base. Figure 43. Supply duct cover Supply Duct Cover V I ' G G` Screw into 4 dimples on top edge 4. On original RETURN DUCT COVER, apply'/4'(6 mm.) continuous bead of 500'F RTV sealant around flange (opposite insulation side), as shown. Figure 44. Return duct cover 5. Slide RETURN DUCT COVER (insulation side up) into supply opening until inward edge of duct cover engages with the 2 retaining clips on the duct flange. Secure outward edge of the duct cover with two screws. Notes: • If unit is equipped with Return Air Smoke Detector, refer to field conversion instructions for horizontal discharge before installing return air duct. • If unit is equipped with Discharge Air Sensing option refer to the following figure for proper tube positioning based on unit supply duct orientation / tonnage or refer to literature ACC-SVN240*-EN for more details. Figure 45. Supply and return opening ductcover Insulation side — Return duct Insulation side up cover 6. After completing installation of the duct covers for horizontal discharge, proceed to TCO-1 instructions. TC01 Instructions Note: For complete Gas Heat User information, Operation, Start-up, Shutdown and Maintenance refer to "Gas Heat Operation and Maintenance, " p. 62. If the unit being installed has a different TCO1 value Table 3, p. 33, the limit control TCO1 must be replaced with the extra limit control shipped in the heater compartment. Replace TCO1 following the instructions in steps 1 through 3 below. If the unit being installed does not need to replace TCO1 limit switch, skip steps 1 through 3 and go on to next step in the installation process. 1. Remove the heat section access panel. 2. Remove TCO1 from shipping location, which is either attached to the combustion blower motor (6 to 12.5 34 RT-SVX071 B-EN Installation tons) or to the installed TC01 limit switch (15 to 25 tons) 3. Replace and discard the existing TC01 originally installed at the factory for down flow operation with the TC01 shipped which is either attached to the Figure 46. TC01 instrcutions Location of TC01 lire to be installed YS7(072-1SO)A Note: The TC01 switch is attached by 2 screws in the location shown. The switch has short legs on it so use caution when sliding out of vestibule face during removal. Return Air Smoke Detector The factory installed Return Air Smoke Detector is installed in the downflow discharge position for YSJ180-300* models. No additional field setup is required. If a unit is to be converted to horizontal discharge for the YSJ180-300* models, the following conversion must be performed: 1. If the unit has an economizer, it must be pulled out in the operating position. 2. Remove the 2 screws from the mounting brackets. Note: Refer to downflow view for screw locations of the YSJ180-300* models. combustion blower motor (6 to 12.5 tons) or to the installed TC01 limit switch (15 to 25 tons) for horizontal operation. 4. Replace heat section access panel. Additional TC01 limit switch to be used for horizontal discharge field conversion on of TC01 limit installed YS](180-300)A Figure 47. Downflow bracket installation (view from horizontal return duct) 3. Lift the tube and bracket from the downflow duct opening. Rotate the tube and bracket assembly 90 degrees ensuring that the holes on the aluminium sensing tube face away from the unit and face the return air ductwork. Note: Refer to horizontal views below of the YSJ180- 300* models. RT-SVX071 B-EN 35 Installation Figure 48. Horizontal bracket installation (top view of unit) Note: Check to insure that the flexible tubing lies flat on the base pan surface. 4. Slide the top bracket down the aluminium sensing tube. • For YSJ180-300* models with standard or low leak economizers, also secure the tube to the top right side of the horizontal opening flange (right side when viewed from outside unit facing horizontal supply). See Figure 49, p. 36. Figure 49. Horizontal bracket installation (view from horizontal return duct) 5. Using the remaining 2 screws and bracket removed in step 2, secure the bottom bracket. Air-Fi® Wireless Communication Interface The factory installed wireless communications interface is installed in the downflow discharge position. If a unit is to be converted to horizontal discharge, the following conversion must be performed: 1. If the unit has an economizer, it must be pulled out in the operating position. 2. Remove the screw from the mounting bracket. Refer to downflow view for screw and bracket location. Figure 50. Wireless communication interface - dowflow 3. Mount the bracket in the horizontal discharge location. Refer to horizontal view for screw and bracket location. Figure 51. Wireless communication interface - horizontal Note: Cable ties must be removed to allow the cable to extend to the horizontal mounting location. 36 RT-SVX071 B-EN Installation Main Electrical Power Requirements Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors! Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. For variable frequency drives or other energy storing components provided by Trane or others, refer to the appropriate manufacturer's literature for allowable waiting periods for discharge of capacitors. Verify with a CAT III or IV voltmeter rated per NFPA 70E that all capacitors have discharged. Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state/national electrical codes. • Verify that the power supply complies with the unit nameplate specifications. • Inspect all control panel components; tighten any loose connections. • Connect properly sized and protected power supply wiring to a field-supplied/installed disconnect switch and to the main power terminal block (HTB1) in the unit control panel. • Install proper grounding wires to an earth ground. Through -the -Base Gas Installation Important. All phases of this installation must comply with NATIONAL, STATE, and LOCAL CODES. In absence of local codes, the installation must conform with American National Standard- Z223. la- National Fuel Gas Code Latest Revision. Note: For complete Gas Heat User information, Operation, Start-up, Shutdown and Maintenance refer to "Gas Heat Operation and Maintenance, " p. 62. 1. Field connections are made by first removing the access panel for the heat section on the front of the unit. 2. The gas piping assembly ships inside this section and includes the shut-off valve, a pressure tap for testing, and the necessary unions for field connection. For through the base access, remove the factory -provided cap from the base pan opening. See Figure 52, p. 37 and Figure 53, p. 38. 3. Route field piping through this hole to the dimension shown in Table 4, p. 37. 4. Place the assembly through the cabinet opening as shown in Figure 53, p. 38 and Figure 54, p. 38, and make the union connection to the field piping and to the gas train. Table 4. Through -the -base gas piping dimension Model Dimension A (inch) YSJ(072-150)A--(O,A) (L, M, H) 4 5/8 YSJ(180-300)A* (0,A)(L, M, H) 1 3/16 Figure 52. Through -the -base gas pipe height DETAIL A istomer Gas Supply Pipe rommet RT-SVX071 B-EN 37 Installation Figure 53. Through -the -base gas pipe assembly for YSJ(180-300)A Grommet Gromm 3/4" x 6 1/2" Pipe Nipple 9 90' Street Elbow Gas Shut-off Valve 3/4" x 2 1/2" Pipe Nipple Pipe Union- 90' StreetElbc Figure 54. Through -the -base gas pipe assemblies for YSJ(072-150)A J r 1/2" and 3/4" Gas Pipe Connection Table 5. Through -the -base gas pipe assembly components for YSJ(072-150)A (inch) Component Description Connection Size 1/2 inch 3/4 inch A Grommets '/z '/ B TBUG bracket - - c 90' Elbow '/z '/ 3/4" x 8 1/2" Pipe Nipple Elbow SEE DETAIL A Plate U Tee 3/4" x 4" Pipe Nipple Cap " x 2 1/2" Pipe Nipple Table 5. Through -the -base gas pipe assembly components for YSJ(072-150)A (inch) (continued) Component Description Connection Size 1/2 inch 3/4 inch D Pipe fitting % x 71/ '/4 x 6'/2 E Gas ball valve '/z F Street elbow % '/4 G Pipe fitting % x 2 % '/4 x 2% H Tee pipe '/z '/4 I Pipe fitting % x 4 '/4 x 4 Pipe cap '/ 3/4 K Pipe fitting / x 2% '/4 x 2 L Pipe union /z % M Pipe fitting '/2 x4'/2 %x 5'/4 For detailed Through -the -Base Gas Installation instructions, refer to the Through -the -Base Gas Piping 3 to 25 Tons Gas/Electric Packaged Units Installation Instructions (ACC-SVN17'-EN) provided with Through -the - Base Gas Installation kit. Requirements of Gas Heat The unit gas train and optional through -the -base gas shut- off valve are rated at 0.50 PSIG maximum. A pressure reducing regulator is recommended to prevent this maximum from being exceeded. These components must be isolated during field gas piping test that exceed 0.50 PSIG. It is recommended that the field piping be capped prior to the unit gas train or optional through -the -base gas shut-off valve if present. 38 RT-SVX071 B-EN Installation • Gas supply line properly sized and connected to the unit gas train. • All gas piping joints properly sealed. • Gas piping leak checked with a soap solution. If piping connections to the unit are complete, do not pressurize piping in excess of 0.50 PSIG or 14—inch W.C. to prevent component failure. • Drip leg installed in the gas piping near the unit. • Flue Exhaust clear of any obstruction. Table 6. Gas heat data YSJ(072-150)A YSJ(180-300)A Heating Input Rate— 80,000 — 250,000 250,000 320,000 400,000 Btu/h Minimum Supply Gas 4.5/11.5 4.5/11.5 6/11.5 Pressure NG/LP (in. w.c.) Maximum Supply Gas 14 Pressure (in. w.c.) Manifold Gas Pressure — 1st Stage -NG (in. w.c.) 1.8 1.7 1.8 1.7 Manifold Gas Pressure — 2nd Stage -NG (in. w.c.) 3.5 3.3 3.5 3.3 Condensate Drain Configuration Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Verify that no power is present with a voltmeter. An evaporator condensate drain connection is provided on each unit. Refer to the ductwork section in the Installation chapter for the appropriate drain location. The 6 to 12.5 tons condensate drain pan is convertible. Refer to the ductwork section in the Installation chapter for the drawings. It can be converted to drain condensate out the front side of the unit or through the base. To convert drain condensate out the front of unit: 1. Remove evaporator access panel and supply air access panels. 2. Remove the support panel that the condensate drain pan exits through. 3. Slide the condensate drain pan out of the unit and rotate 180°. 4. Slide the condensate drain pan back into the unit, align the drain with the grommeted opening in the rear support panel and push until the coupling is seated in the grommet. 5. Replace the front support panel by aligning the panel with tabs in the raceway. Align the condensate drain pan support in the grommeted hole as the panel is put in place. 6. Replace evaporator access panel and supply air access panels. To convert drain condensate through the base of unit: 1. Remove evaporator access panel and supply air access panels. 2. Remove the support panel that the condensate drain pan exits through. 3. Slide the condensate drain pan out of the unit. 4. Place on a level surface in the position it was removed from the unit. 5. Remove the plug knockout in the bottom of the drainpan to convert it to through the base drainage. 6. Plug the original condensate drain opening with a field supplied 3/4" NPT plug. 7. Slide the condensate drain pan back into the unit, align the drain support with the grommeted opening in the rear support panel and push until the support is seated in the grommet. 8. Replace the front support panel by aligning the panel with tabs in the raceway. Align the plugged condensate drain pan coupling in the grommeted hole as the panel is put in place. 9. Replace evaporator access panel and supply air access panels. A condensate trap must be installed at the unit due to the drain connection being on the "negative pressure" side of the fan. Install the P-Trap using the guidelines in Figure 55, p. 40. A condensate drain line must be connected to the P-Trap. Pitch the drain lines at least 1/2 inch for every 10 feet of horizontal run to assure proper condensate flow. Do not allow the horizontal run to sag causing a possible double trap condition which could result in condensate backup due to "air lock". RT-SVX071 B-EN 39 Installation Figure 55. Condensate trap installation PANEL ENCLOSURE �75 INCH NUT /-FEMALE CONNECTOR 'll'' ,,�__CLLANOUT PLUG Note: Minimum if unit static is higher trap must be taller to drain appropriately. Drain Pan Removal (Units with Condensate Overflow Switch Option) Before drain pan removal, the switch wire must be disconnected from wire tie on panel and/or any tape before drain pan can be removed. Care must be taken so the wire does not catch on the bottom of indoor coil or any protrusion. Note: When reversing the drain pan, on some units, the condensate overflow switch will need to be moved to the second hole in its bracket to avoid contact with headers or indoor coil. Filter Installation The quantity of filters is determined by unit size. Access to the filters is obtained by removing the filter access panel. Note: Do not operate the unit without filters. Field Installed Power Wiring Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state/national electrical codes. An overall dimensional layout for the field installed wiring entrance into the unit is illustrated in the Dimensions and Weights chapter. To insure that the unit's supply power wiring is properly sized and installed, follow the following guidelines. Verify that the power supply available is compatible with the unit's nameplate ratings. The available supply power must be within 10% of the rated voltage stamped on the nameplate. Use only copper conductors to connect the power supply to the unit. Use Copper Conductors Only! Failure to use copper conductors could result in equipment damage as the equipment was not designed or qualified to accept other types of conductors. Important. If the unit is not equipped with an optional factory installed non -fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker, a field supplied disconnect switch must be installed at or near the unit in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC latest edition). Main Unit Power Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state/national electrical codes. Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Verify that no power is present with a voltmeter. Standard Wiring 1. Location of the applicable electrical service entrance is illustrated in the Dimensions and Weights chapter. Complete the unit's power wiring connections at HTB1 main power terminal block in unit control panel. Refer to the customer connection diagram that is shipped with the unit for specific termination points. 2. Provide proper grounding for the unit in accordance with local and national codes. 40 RT-SVX071 B-EN Installation Optional TBUE Wiring (Through -the - Base Electrical Option) Location of the applicable electrical service is illustrated below. Refer to the customer connection diagram that is shipped with the unit for specific termination points. The termination points, depending on the customer option selected would be a factory mounted non -fused disconnect switch (UDC) or circuit breaker (UCB). If neither a factory mounted non -fused disconnect switch (UDC) or circuit breaker (UCB) was factory mounted, field wiring connections should be terminated in the control box at main panel power terminal block (HTB1). Provide proper grounding for the unit in accordance with local and national codes. Notes: • Black gasket is shipped from the factory and is located in the literature Ship With bag in the control box. Apply black gasket around conduit plate on all four sides after installation to prevent air leakage from the building entering the electrical enclosures. • Seal any unused unit penetrations and around conduit and wiring at all unit and curb penetrations. Field -Installed Control Wiring Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Verify that no power is present with a voltmeter. Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state/national electrical codes. An overall layout of the various control options available with the required number of conductors for each control device is illustrated in the wiring diagram located on main control box door. All field wiring must conform to NEC guidelines as well as state and local codes. Control Power Transformer The 24 volt control power transformers are to be used only with the accessories called out in this manual. Transformers rated greater than 50 VA are equipped with internal circuit breakers. If a circuit breaker trips, turn "Off' all power to the unit before attempting to reset it. Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Verify that no power is present with a voltmeter. The transformers are located in the control panel. The circuit breaker is located on the right side of the transformer and can be reset by pressing in on the black reset button. Controls using 24 VAC Before installing any connecting wiring, refer to the Dimensions and Weights chapter for the electrical access locations provided on the unit and Table 7, p. 43 for AC conductor sizing guidelines, and; 1. Use copper conductors unless otherwise specified. 2. Ensure that the AC control wiring between the controls and the unit's termination point does not exceed 2.5 ohms/conductor for the length of the run Component Failure! Resistance in excess of two and a half (2.5) ohms per conductor could result in component failure due to insufficient AC voltage supply. Do not exceed two and a half (2.5) ohms per conductor for the length of the run. Note: Be sure to check all loads and conductors for grounds, shorts, and mis-wiring. 3. Do not run the AC low voltage wiring in the same conduit with the high voltage power wiring. 4. Route low voltage wiring per illustrations below. RT-SVX071 B-EN 41 Installation Figure 56. Low voltage wiring — B cabinet Figure 57. Low voltage wiring — C cabinet 42 RT-SVX071 B-EN Installation Figure 58. Low voltage wiring — D cabinet Figure 59. Main control panel low voltage wiring —B/C/D cabinet 14 - _- - \1l { Table 7. Recommended wire lengths Table 7. Recommended wire lengths (continued) Wire Size Maximum recommended wire length from unit controller to sensor AWG mm2 Meters Feet 22 0.33 0-46 0-150 20 0.50 47-73 151-240 18 0.75 74-117 241-385 16 1.30 118-185 386-610 Maximum recommended wire Wire Size length from unit controller to sensor AWG mm2 Meters Feet 14 2.00 186-296 611-970 Note: The total resistance of these low voltage wires must not exceed 2.5 4/conductor. Any resistance greater than 2.5 4 may cause the control to malfunction due to an excessive voltage drop. RT-SVX071 B-EN 43 Installation Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs (Standard Low Voltage Multi conductor Wire) Before installing any connecting wiring between the unit and components utilizing a DC analog input\output signal, refer to the Dimensions and Weights chapter for the electrical access locations provided on the unit. • Table 8, p. 44 lists the conductor sizing guidelines that must be followed when interconnecting the DC binary output devices and the system components utilizing a DC analog input/output signal to the unit. Notes: — Resistance in excess of 2.5 ohms per conductor can cause deviations in the accuracy of the controls. — Ensure that the wiring between controls and the unit's termination point does not exceed two and a half (2.5) ohms/conductor for the length of the run. • Do not run the electrical wires transporting DC signals in or around conduit housing high voltage wires. DC Conductors Table 8. Zone sensor module wiring Distance from Unit to Control Recommended Wire Size 0 - 150 feet 22 gauge 0 - 45.7 m 0.33 mm2 151 - 240 feet 20 gauge 46 - 73.1 m 0.50 mm2 Table 8. Zone sensor module wiring (continued) Distance from Unit to Control Recommended Wire Size 241 -385 feet 18 gauge 73.5 - 117.3 m 0.75 mm2 386 - 610 feet 16 gauge 117.7-185.9m 1.3mm2 611 - 970 feet 14 gauge 186.2 - 295.7 m 0.2 mm2 Note: See SymbioTm 700 unit controls schematic, 1213- 4349, for controls wiring. Space Temperature Averaging Space temperature averaging is accomplished by wiring a number of remote sensors in a series/parallel circuit. Using the BAYSENS016* or BAYSENS077*, at least four sensors are required to accomplish space temperature averaging. • Example #1 illustrates two series circuits with two sensors in each circuit wired in parallel. The square of any number of remote sensors is required. • Example #2 illustrates three sensors squared in a series/parallel circuit. Using BAYSENS077*, two sensors are required to accomplish space temperature averaging. • Example #3 illustrates the circuit required for this sensor. lists the temperature versus resistance coefficient for all sensors. 44 RT-SVX071 B-EN Installation Figure 60. Examples EXAMPLE #i ZSM REMOTE SENSORS #1 #2 #3 #4 to — — — — — — — — I F-1 -- 2 0 2 I O O O 0 1 (D-- ------- J---------1 2 EXAMPLE #2 Z S M REMOTE SENSORS #1 #2 #3 0 L 2 O 2 O 1 2 o q� 1 1 #4 #5 #6 II II II 1 2 O 2 O 2 �I 1 1 #7 #8 #9 II II I L O O 0 c,1 I— — 1 — E — 1 — E — 1 — — EXAMPLE #3 Z S M REMOTE SENSORS #1 #2 0 1 1 2 01 2 1 2 Note: Wiring pin numbers are for reference only. There are multiple smoke detector systems that could have differently numbered pins. For correct wiring details, please refer to the specific smoke detector literature that accompanied this unit. Remote Sensor #1 Remote Sensor #2 VVVV VVVV Remote Sensor #3 Remote Sensor #4 VVVV VVVV ZSM ZSM TERMINAL # 1 TERMINAL # 2 Remote Sensor #1 Remote Sensor #2 Remote Sensor #3 VVVV\1��VVVV\1��VVVV Remote Sensor #4 Remote Sensor #5 Remote Sensor #6 VVVV\l�VVVV\l��VVVV Remote Sensor ##77 �Remote Sensor #8 Remote Sensor #9 VVUV\ �UVVV�9'UVUV ZSM TERMINAL # 1 Remote Sensor #1 Remote Sensor #2 VVVVVVVV :T VVVV VVVV ZSM TERMINAL # 1 ZSM TERMINAL # 2 ZSM TERMINAL # 2 RT-SVX071 B-EN 45 Installation Table 9. Temperature vs. resistance Temperature Nominal Resistance (kOhms) Degrees °F Degrees °C -20 -28.9 170.1 -15 -26.1 143.5 -10 -23.3 121.4 -5 -20.6 103.0 0 -17.8 87.56 5 -15.0 74.65 10 -12.2 63.80 15 -9.4 54.66 20 -6.7 46.94 25 -3.8 40.40 30 -1.1 34.85 35 1.7 30.18 40' 4.4 26.22 45° 7.2 22.85 50° 10.0 19.96 55° 12.8 17.47 60° 15.6 15.33 65° 18.3 13.4 70° 21.1 11.89 75° 23.9 10.50 80° 26.7 9.297 85' 29.4 8.247 90° 32.2 7.330 95° 35.0 6.528 Table 10. Sizing natural gas pipe mains and branches Iron Pipe Size (IPS) Inches Length of Pipe (Ft.) %" Pipe 3/d' Pipe V Pipe 1'/4" Pipe 11/2' Pipe 15 76 176 345 750 1220 30 52 120 241 535 850 45 43 99 199 435 700 60 38 86 173 380 610 75 77 155 345 545 Note: Capacity of Pipe of Different Diameters and Lengths in Cu. Meter Per Hr. with Pressure Drop of 74.6 Pa and Specific Gravity of 0.60. Table 11. Iron pipe size (SI) millimeters Iron Pipe Size (SI) Millimeters Length of Pipe (Meters) 15 mm Pipe 20 mm Pipe 25 mm Pipe 32 mm Pipe 40 mm Pipe 4.6 2.15 4.98 9.76 21.23 34.54 9.1 1.47 3.39 6.82 15.14 24.06 13.7 1.21 2.80 5.63 12.31 19.82 18.3 1.07 2.43 4.89 10.76 17.27 22.9 - 2.18 4.38 9.76 15.40 Note: Capacity of Pipe of Different Diameters and Lengths in Cu. Meter Per Hr. with Pressure Drop of 74.6 Pa and Specific Gravity of 0.60. Figure 61. Schematic diagram for field gas piping to Units 1/8" NPT Test Plug Field supplied Grounds" Union �- Gas Supply Line / / Gas shutoff (Field Supplied Unit Access outside unit cabinet.) Drip Leg Gas Train 46 RT-SVX071 B-EN Pre -Start Use the checklist provided below in conjunction with the "General Unit Requirements" checklist to ensure that the unit is properly installed and ready for operation. Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors! Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Verify with a CAT III or IV voltmeter rated per NFPA 70E that all capacitors have discharged. • Check all electrical connections for tightness and "point of termination" accuracy. • Verify that the condenser airflow will be unobstructed. Rotating Components! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in rotating components cutting and slashing technician which could result in death or serious injury. During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product it may be necessary to work with live and exposed rotating components. Have a qualified or licensed service individual who has been properly trained in handling exposed rotating components, perform these tasks. • Verify that the condenser fan and indoor blower turn freely without rubbing and are properly tightened on the shafts. • Verify that a condensate trap is installed and the piping is properly sized and pitched. • Verify that the correct size and number of filters are in place. • Inspect the interior of the unit for tools and debris and install all panels in preparation for starting the unit. Voltage Imbalance Three phase electrical power to the unit must meet stringent requirements for the unit to operate properly. Measure each leg (phase -to -phase) of the power supply. Each reading must fall within the utilization range stamped on the unit nameplate. If any of the readings do not fall within the proper tolerances, notify the power company to correct this situation before operating the unit. Excessive three phase voltage imbalance between phases will cause motors to overheat and eventually fail. The maximum allowable voltage imbalance is 2 percent. Measure and record the voltage between phases 1, 2, and 3 and calculate the amount of imbalance as follows: 100xAV-VD % Voltage Imbalance = AV where; Volt1 + Volt2 + Volt3 AV (Average Voltage) = • V1, V2, V3 = Line Voltage Readings • VD = Line Voltage reading that deviates the farthest from the average voltage. Example: If the voltage readings of the supply power measured 221, 230, and 227, the average volts would be: 221 + 230 + 221 = 226 Avg. VD (reading farthest from average) = 221 The percentage of Imbalance equals: 100+226+221 = 2.2% 226 The 2.2 percent imbalance in this example exceeds the maximum allowable imbalance of 2.0 percent. This much imbalance between phases can equal as much as a 20 percent current imbalance with a resulting increase in motor winding temperatures that will decrease motor life. the voltage imbalance is over 2 percent, notify the proper agencies to correct the voltage problem before operating this equipment. Electrical Phasing (Three Phase Motors) The compressor motor(s) and the supply fan motor are internally connected for the proper rotation when the incoming power supply is phased as A, B, C. Proper electrical supply phasing can be quickly determined and corrected before starting the unit by using an instrument such as an Associated Research Model 45 Phase Sequence Indicator and following the steps below: RT-SVX071 B-EN 47 Pre -Start Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors! Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Verify with a CAT III or IV voltmeter rated per NFPA 70E that all capacitors have discharged. 1. Turn the field supplied disconnect switch that provides power to the main power terminal block or to the "Line" side of the optional factory mounted disconnect switch to the "Off' position. 2. Connect the phase sequence indicator leads to the terminal block or to the "Line" side of the optional factory mounted disconnect switch as follows; • Brown (phase A) to L1 • Orange (phase B) to L2 • Yellow (phase C) to L3 3. Close the field supplied main power disconnect switch or circuit protector switch that provides the supply power to the unit. Note: Upon closing main power disconnect and the unit mounted disconnect switch or circuit breaker, the phase monitor will verify proper phasing. If LED on face of the monitor is red, correct supply power fault. Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When it is necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. To prevent injury or death from electrocution, it is the responsibility of the technician to recognize this hazard and use extreme care when performing service procedures with the electrical power energized. 4. Observe the ABC and CBA phase indicator lights on the face of the sequencer. The ABC indicator light will glow if the phase is ABC. If the CBA indicator light glows, open the disconnect switch or circuit protection switch and reverse any two power wires. 5. Restore the main electrical power and recheck the phasing. If the phasing is correct, open the disconnect switch or circuit protection switch and remove the phase sequence indicator. Compressor Crankcase Heaters Each compressor can be equipped with a crankcase heater (On some units the crankcase heater comes standard). The proper operation of the crankcase heater is important to maintain an elevated compressor oil temperature during the "Off' cycle to reduce oil foaming during compressor starts. Oil foaming occurs when refrigerant condenses in the compressor and mixes with the oil. In lower ambient conditions, refrigerant migration to the compressor could increase. When the compressor starts, the sudden reduction in crankcase pressure causes the liquid refrigerant to boil rapidly causing the oil to foam. This condition could damage compressor bearings due to reduced lubrication and could cause compressor mechanical failures. Before starting the unit in the "Cooling" mode, set the system switch to the "Off' position and turn the main power disconnect to the "On" position and allow the crankcase heater to operate a minimum of 8 hours. Before closing the main power disconnect switch, insure that the "System" selection switch is in the "Off' position and the "Fan" selection switch is in the "Auto" position. Close the main power disconnect switch and the unit mounted disconnect switch, if applicable. Note: Upon closing main power disconnect and the unit mounted disconnect switch or circuit breaker, the phase monitor will verify proper phasing. If LED on face of the monitor is red, correct supply power fault. Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When it is necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. To prevent injury or death from electrocution, it is the responsibility of the technician to recognize this hazard and use extreme care when performing service procedures with the electrical power energized. Symbio Controls The SymbioTm 700 supports a Service Test Mode that can be used to energize the various components of the system, either to support general system startup tasks or to support troubleshooting. The user can initiate Service Test Mode through the controller user interfaces, including the Symbio Service and Installation mobile application. The modes shown below can be initiated. Depending on the equipment configuration, the controller will energize the 48 RT-SVX071 B-EN Pre -Start appropriate outputs. A user -selected timeout value will determine how long the controller will remain in any given state once initiated. For detailed information on how each Service Test State is interpreted based on the equipment's Figure 62. Symbio 700 service test mode Tools Service Tesl rode Exp n Data Lnga Service Protocol Conlrguralion P conf iguration Reggnal Speci}icalw3 In t4Ii(j nr SNYr eS TGP2 Programs Backup Hesiore Updele Fnrnware fl f Service Test Mode Test u Hne Fanon Coal coal 2 Heat 1 Heal 2 Heat 3 Heat 4 De}mst 0 configuration, see ACC-APG002*-EN, Symbio 700 for Precedent Packaged Rooftop Air -Conditioners Application Guide. Serwce Test Mode T.. rra- Fan On . Hear 1 Hear 2 Hear 3 Heal 4 oelrn5l I' O 1im RT-SVX071 B-EN 49 Unit Start -Up Sequence of Operation See ACC-APG002*-EN, Application Guide, SymbioT"' 700 Controller with PrecedentTM Packaged Rooftop Air - Conditioners. Ignition Module Two -stage (IGN) runs self -check (including verification that the gas valve is de -energized). (IGN) checks the high limit switches (TC01 and TCO2) for normally closed contacts, the pressure switch (PS) for normally open contacts, and the flame rollout (FR) switch for continuity. (IGN) energizes inducer blower on high speed to check pressure switch closure. If the pressure switch is closed, the inducer blower starts a 20 second pre -purge (15 seconds on high speed followed by 5 seconds on low speed). If the pressure switch (PS) is still open, the inducer blower will continue to be energized on high speed until pressure switch closure. After pre -purge completes, the IGN energizes the first stage gas output for first stage heat demand and energizes second stage gas output for second stage heat and detects flame and de -energizes spark. At this point indoor fan would start with its minimum speed for the corresponding heat (first stage or second stage) demand. The (IGN) enters a normal operating loop where all inputs are continuously monitored. If a call for second stage heat is initiated after a call for first stage heat is established, the (IGN) energizes the second stage of the gas valve and the second stage of inducer blower. When the zone thermostat is satisfied, the (IGN) de - energizes the gas valve. The (IGN) senses loss of flame. The (IGN) initiates a 5 second inducer blower post purge. The Symbio 700 initiates a 90 second indoor blower delay off at current speed. The (IGN) de -energizes the inducer blower at the end of the post purge. The Symbio 700 de - energizes the indoor blower at the end of the selected indoor blower delay off Note: For complete Gas Heat User information, Operation, Start-up, Shutdown and Maintenance refer to "Gas Heat Operation and Maintenance," p. 62. Table 12. Ignition module diagnostics Steady OFF No Power/Failure/ Internal Failure Steady ON Normal — No Call for heat Slow Flash Rate Normal, call for heat (%second on, % second off) 1 Flash Loss of Communication Table 12. Ignition module diagnostics (continued) System Lockout: Failed to detect or 2 Flashes sustain flame. (failure to ignite, no spark, low/no gas pressure, etc.) Pressure switch problem detected. (no 3 Flashes vent air flow, bad CBM, closed at initial call for heat). Auto reset. High Limit switch protection device 4 Flashes open (excessive heat in combustion chamber, low airflow). Auto reset. Flame sensed and gas valve not 5 Flashes energized, or flame sensed and no call for heat. Flame Rollout Switch open. (CBM 6 Flashes failure, incorrect gas pressure, incorrect primary air). Requires manual reset of the switch. 7 Flashes Weak Flame 8 Flashes Internal Error 9 Flashes Hardware Mismatch Return Air Smoke Detector The return air smoke detector is designed to shut off the unit if smoke is sensed in the return air stream. Sampling the airflow entering the unit at the return air opening performs this function. In order for the smoke detector to properly sense smoke in the return air stream, the air velocity entering the unit must be between 500 and 4000 feet per minute. Equipment covered in this manual will develop an airflow velocity that falls within these limits over the entire airflow range specified in the evaporator fan performance tables. There are certain models however, if operated at low airflow, will not develop an airflow velocity that falls within the required 500 to 4000 feet per minute range. For these models, the design airflow shall be greater than or equal to the minimum CFM specified in the table provided below. Failure to follow these instructions will prevent the smoke detector from performing its design function. Compressor Start -Up Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When it is necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. 50 RT-SVX071 B-EN Unit Start -Up 1. Attach a set of service gauges onto the suction and discharge gauge ports for each circuit. Proceed to the next Service Test step if continuing from previous component start-up or until the desired start- up component test is started. 2. After the compressor and condenser fan have started and operated for approximately 30 minutes, observe the operating pressures. Compare the operating pressures to the label on the access panel. 3. Check system superheat. Follow the instruction listed on the superheat charging curve in the Service Facts. Superheat should be within ±5°F of the superheat chart value. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each refrigerant circuit. 5. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power disconnect switch to the "Off' position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Remove electromechanical test mode connections (if applicable). Hot Gas Reheat Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When it is necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Set the unit to Service Test step Reheat. Once the unit is in the reheat test mode, verify that the 3 way valve has shifted to the reheat position and that the supply temperature rises 10OF more than when in cooling mode stage 2. Monitor the suction pressure for 15 minutes. The suction pressure should remain within 5 psi of normal cooling operation. If the unit has a 2 speed outdoor fan and if the outdoor air temperature is below 70°F, verify that the OD fan is in low speed. 1. Clamp an amp meter around one of 1 st stage heater power wires at the heater contactor. 2. Using the Service Test Guide in Figure 62, p. 49, continue the SERVICE TESTstart-up procedure for each compressor circuit. Select the next desired Service Test Mode if continuing from previous component start up or exit Service Test if complete. Gas Heat Units Open the main disconnect switch to shut the unit off and to reset the RTRM. Follow the Test Guide in Figure 62, p. 49 to start the unit in the heating mode. Momentarily jump across the Test 1 and Test 2 terminals on LT61 one additional time if continuing from previous component start-up or until the desired start- up component Test is started. When starting the unit for the first time or servicing the heaters, it is a good practice to start the heater with the main gas supply turned "Off'. Once the ignition system and components have been checked, open the main power disconnect switch to reset the unit. Final System Setup After completing all of the pre -start and startup procedures outlined in the previous sections (i.e., operating the unit in each of its modes through all available stages of cooling and heating), perform these final checks before leaving the unit: • Program the Night Setback (NSB) panel (if applicable) for proper unoccupied operation. Refer to the programming instructions for the specific panel. • Verify that the Remote panel "System" selection switch, "Fan" selection switch, and "Zone Temperature" settings for automatic operation are correct. • Inspect the unit for misplaced tools, hardware, and debris. • Verify that all exterior panels including the control panel doors and condenser grilles are secured in place. • Close the main disconnect switch or circuit protector switch that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal block or the unit mounted disconnect switch. Safety Alert! Failure to follow instructions below could result in death or serious injury. In addition to the following tasks, you MUST: • Follow all instructions in the unit's Installation, Operation, and Maintenance manual, including warnings, cautions, and notices. • Perform all required tasks in any applicable Service Alerts and Service Bulletins. • Review and understand all information provided in Submittals and Design Specifications. RT-SVX071 B-EN 51 Maintenance Hazardous Service Procedures! Failure to follow all precautions in this manual and on the tags, stickers, and labels could result in death or serious injury. Technicians, in order to protect themselves from potential electrical, mechanical, and chemical hazards, MUST follow precautions in this manual and on the tags, stickers, and labels, as well as the following instructions: Unless specified otherwise, disconnect all electrical power including remote disconnect and discharge all energy storing devices such as capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Monthly Maintenance Before completing the following checks, turn the unit OFF and lock the main power disconnect switch open. Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Verify that no power is present with a voltmeter. Filters Inspect the return air filters. Clean or replace them if necessary. Return Air Smoke Detector Maintenance Airflow through the unit is affected by the amount of dirt and debris accumulated on the indoor coil and filters. To insure that airflow through the unit is adequate for proper sampling by the return air smoke detector, complete adherence to the maintenance procedures, including recommended intervals between filter changes, and coil cleaning is required. Periodic checks and maintenance procedures must be performed on the smoke detector to insure that it will function properly. For detailed instructions concerning these checks and procedures, refer to the appropriate section(s) of the smoke detector Installation and Maintenance Instructions provided with the literature package for this unit. Condensate Overflow Switch During maintenance, the switch float (black ring) must be checked to ensure free movement up and down. Cooling Season • Check the unit's drain pans and condensate piping to ensure that there are no blockages. • Inspect the evaporator and condenser coils for dirt, bent fins, etc. If the coils appear dirty, clean them according to the instructions described in "Coil Cleaning" later in this section. • Manually rotate the condenser fans to ensure free movement and check motor bearings for wear. Verify that all of the fan mounting hardware is tight. • Inspect the F/A-R/A damper hinges and pins to ensure that all moving parts are securely mounted. Keep the blades clean as necessary. • Verify that all damper linkages move freely; lubricate with white grease, if necessary. • Check supply fan motor bearings; repair or replace the motor as necessary. • Verify that all wire terminal connections are tight. • Remove any corrosion present on the exterior surfaces of the unit and repaint these areas. • Generally inspect the unit for unusual conditions (e.g., loose access panels, leaking piping connections, etc.) • Make sure that all retaining screws are reinstalled in the unit access panels once these checks are complete. • With the unit running, check and record the following: — ambient temperature — compressor suction and discharge pressures (each circuit) — superheat (each circuit) Record this data on an "operator's maintenance log" like the one shown in Table 14, p. 54. If the operating pressures indicate a refrigerant shortage, measure the system superheat. For guidelines, see "Compressor Start - Up," p. 50. Important. Do not release refrigerant to the atmosphere! If adding or removing refrigerant is required, the service technician must comply with all federal, state and local laws. Heating Season • Inspect the unit's air filters. If necessary, clean or replace them. • Check supply fan motor bearings; repair or replace the motor as necessary. • Inspect both the main unit control panel and heat section control box for loose electrical components and 52 RT-SVX071 B-EN Maintenance terminal connections, as well as damaged wire insulation. Make any necessary repairs. • Verify that the electric heat system operates properly. Coil Cleaning Regular coil maintenance, including annual cleaning, enhances the unit's operating efficiency by minimizing the following: • Compressor head pressure and amperage draw • Evaporator water carryover • Fan brake horsepower • Due to increase static pressure losses • Airflow reduction Hazardous Chemicals! Failure to follow this safety precaution could result in death or serious injury. Coil cleaning agents can be either acidic or highly alkaline and can burn severely if contact with skin or eyes occurs. Handle chemical carefully and avoid contact with skin. ALWAYS wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) including goggles or face shield, chemical resistant gloves, boots, apron or suit as required. For personal safety refer to the cleaning agent manufacturer's Materials Safety Data Sheet and follow all recommended safe handling practices. At least once each year, or more often if the unit is located in a "dirty" environment, clean the condenser coils using the instructions outlined below. Be sure to follow these instructions as closely as possible to avoid damaging the coils. Note: For units equipped with hail guards follow removal procedure listed below. Hail Guard Removal • Remove shipping screws (ones without washers). • Lift hail guards up so screws with washers go to top of keyhole. • Remove hailguard by sliding washer head screw through keyhole. To clean refrigerant coils, use a soft brush and a sprayer (either a garden pump -up type or a high-pressure sprayer). A high -quality detergent is also required; suggested brands include "SPREX A.C.", "OAKITE 161 ", "OAKITE 166" and "COILOX". If the detergent selected is strongly alkaline (ph value exceeds 8.5), add an inhibitor. Microchannel (MCHE) Coils Coil Damage! Failure to follow instructions below could result in coil damage. DO NOT use any detergents with microchannel condenser coils. Use pressurized water or air ONLY, with pressure no greater than 600psi. For additional information regarding the proper microchannel coil cleaning procedure, refer to RT- SVB83*-EN Due to the soft material and thin walls of the MCHE coils, the traditional field maintenance method recommended for Round Tube Plate Fin (RTPF) coils does not apply to microchannel coils. Moreover, chemical cleaners are a risk factor to MCHE due to the material of the coil. The manufacturer does not recommend the use of chemical cleaners to clean microchannel coils. Using chemical cleaners could lead to warranty claims being further evaluated for validity and failure analysis. The recommended cleaning method for microchannel condenser coils is pressurized water or air with a non - pinpoint nozzle and an ECU of at least 180 with pressure no greater than 600 psi. To minimize the risk of coil damage, approach the cleaning of the coil with the pressure washer aimed perpendicular to the face of the coil during cleaning. Note: For more details on microchannel coil cleaning, please refer to bulletin RT-SVB83*-EN. Hail Guard Reinstallation Reinstall hail guards by aligning the keyholes over the washer screw heads, and slide into place. If your installation requires seismic or special wind load compliance, reinstall shipping screws. Hot Gas Reheat Additional Oil Compressor Damage! Use of incorrect refrigerant and oil could result in compressor damage and improper unit operation. Use only refrigerant and oil specified on the unit nameplate. Additional refrigerant oil has been added in the factory for all Hot Gas Reheat units. If major components (MCHE coil, valve assembly, etc.) are replaced or serviced, the following steps must be taken: 1. Measure the amount of oil removed during servicing. 2. When recharging the unit after servicing, replace the amount of oil removed, as measured in step 1. Verify oil added is the correct type. RT-SVX071 B-EN 53 Maintenance 3. For compressor replacements and/or additional questions, contact Technical Support. Annual Maintenance Clean and repaint any corroded surface. Table 13. Unit data log Final Process For future reference, record the unit data below in the blanks provided. Complete Unit Model Number Unit Serial Number Wiring Diagram Numbers (from unit control panel) Connections Schematics Table 14. Sample maintenance log Refrigerant Circuit #1 Refrigerant Circuit #2 Current Suct. Disch. Liquid Suct. Disch. Liquid Date Ambient Compr. Super- Sub- Compr. Super- Sub - Temp F/C Oil Press. Psig/ Press Psig/ Press Psig/ heat F/ cool Oil Press. Psig/ Press Psig/ Press Psig/ heat F/ cool Level kPa kPa kPa C F/C Level kPa kPa kPa C F/C ok ok low low ok ok low low -ok ok low low ok ok low low -ok -ok low low ok ok low low Note: Check and record the data requested above each month during the cooling season with the unit running. 54 RT-SVX071 B-EN Troubleshooting See ACC-APG002'-EN, Application Guide, SymbioTm 700 Controller with PrecedentTM Packaged Rooftop Air - Conditioners. RT-SVX071 B-EN 55 Wiring Diagrams Note: Wiring diagrams can be accessed using e-Library by entering the diagram number in the literature order Table 15. Wiring diagrams number search field or by contacting technical support. Schematic Type Controls Voltage Drawing Description Number Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134334 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, POWER, DUAL COMPRESSOR, DUAL CONDENSER FAN, STD SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134335 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, POWER, DUAL COMPRESSOR, SINGLE CONDENSER FAN, HIGH SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134336 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, POWER, DUAL COMPRESSOR, DUAL CONDENSER FAN, HIGH SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134337 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 2, POWER, SINGLE INDOOR FAN, COOLING ONLY/ ELECTRIC HEAT, STD SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 230V 12134338 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 2, POWER, SINGLE INDOOR FAN, 2-STAGE GAS HEAT, 230V, STD SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 460V/575V 12134339 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 2, POWER, SINGLE INDOOR FAN, 2-STAGE GAS HEAT, 460V/575V, STD SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134340 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 2, POWER, DUAL INDOOR FAN, COOLING ONLY/ ELECTRIC HEAT, STD SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 230V 12134341 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 2, POWER, DUAL INDOOR FAN, 2-STAGE GAS HEAT, 230V, STD SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 460V/575V 12134342 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 2, POWER, DUAL INDOOR FAN, 2-STAGE GAS HEAT, 460V/575V, STD SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134343 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 2, POWER, SINGLE INDOOR FAN, COOLING ONLY/ ELECTRIC HEAT, HIGH SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 230V 12134344 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 2, POWER, SINGLE INDOOR FAN, 2-STAGE GAS HEAT, 230V, HIGH SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 460V/575V 12134345 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 2, POWER, SINGLE INDOOR FAN, 2-STAGE GAS HEAT, 460V/575V, HIGH SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134346 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 2, POWER, DUAL INDOOR FAN, COOLING ONLY/ ELECTRIC HEAT, HIGH SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 230V 12134347 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 2, POWER, DUAL INDOOR FAN, 2-STAGE GAS HEAT, 230V, HIGH SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 460V/575V 12134348 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 2, POWER, DUAL INDOOR FAN, 2-STAGE GAS HEAT, 460V/575V, HIGH SCCR Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134349 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 3, CONTROLS, SYMBIO 700 UNIT CONTROLS Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134538 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 3, CONTROLS, SYMBIO 700 UNIT CONTROLS, HEAT PUMP Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134443 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 4, CONTROLS, ADAPTER BOARD UNIT CONTROLS, DUAL COMPRESSOR, SINGLE FAN Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134444 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 4, CONTROLS, ADAPTER BOARD UNIT CONTROLS, DUAL COMPRESSOR, DUAL FAN Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134445 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 5, CONTROLS, INDOOR OPTIONS Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134438 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 6, CONTROLS, FRESH AIR OPTIONS Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134446 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 7, CONTROLS, CUSTOMER CONNECTION OPTIONS Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134447 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 8, CONTROLS,STEPPER MOTOR CONTROLLER Main Unit Symbio 700 All 12134448 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 9, CONTROLS, XM30/XM32 EXPANSION MODULES 56 RT-SVX071 B-EN Wiring Diagrams Table 15. Wiring diagrams (continued) Schematic Type Controls Voltage Drawing Number Description Main Unit Symbio 700 All X39004322 LABEL; FUSE TABLE Component Location Symbio 700 All 12134449 DIAGRAM; COMPONENT LOCATION, COOLING/ELECTRIC, B CABINET Component Location Symbio 700 All 12134450 DIAGRAM; COMPONENT LOCATION, GAS, B CABINET Component Location Symbio 700 All 12134451 DIAGRAM; COMPONENT LOCATION, COOLING/ELECTRIC, C CABINET Component Location Symbio 700 All 12134452 DIAGRAM; COMPONENT LOCATION, GAS, C CABINET Component Location Symbio 700 All 12134453 DIAGRAM; COMPONENT LOCATION, COOLING/ELECTRIC, D CABINET Component Location Symbio 700 All 12134454 DIAGRAM; COMPONENT LOCATION, GAS, D CABINET Component Location Symbio 700 All 12134539 DIAGRAM; COMPONENT LOCATION, COOLING/ELECTRIC, D CABINET, HEAT PUMP Component Location Symbio 700 All 12134540 DIAGRAM; COMPONENT LOCATION, GAS, D CABINET, DUAL FUEL Electric Heat Symbio 700 230V 12134301 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, ELECTRIC HEAT- 9 & 18 KW 240V Electric Heat Symbio 700 230V 12134302 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, ELECTRIC HEAT- 27 & 36 KW 240V Electric Heat Symbio 700 230V 12134303 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, ELECTRIC HEAT- 54 KW 240V Electric Heat Symbio 700 460V/575V 12134304 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, ELECTRIC HEAT- 9 & 18 KW 460V/575V Electric Heat Symbio 700 460W575V 12134305 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, ELECTRIC HEAT- 27 & 36 KW 460W575V Electric Heat Symbio 700 460W575V 12134306 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, ELECTRIC HEAT- 54 KW 460W575V Electric Heat Symbio 700 230V 12134307 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, ELECTRIC HEAT- 18 KW 240V Electric Heat Symbio 700 230V 12134308 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, ELECTRIC HEAT- 36 KW 240V Electric Heat Symbio 700 230V 12134309 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, ELECTRIC HEAT- 54 & 72 KW 240V Electric Heat Symbio 700 460W575V 12134310 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, ELECTRIC HEAT- 18 KW 460V/575V Electric Heat Symbio 700 460W575V 12134311 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, ELECTRIC HEAT- 36 KW 460W575V Electric Heat Symbio 700 460W575V 12134312 SCHEMATIC; SHEET 1, ELECTRIC HEAT- 54 & 72 KW 460W575V Electric Heat Symbio 700 All X39004311 LABEL; FUSE REPLACEMENT, ELECTRIC HEAT, 300V/600V Supplimental Symbio 700 All 12134327 DIAGRAM; POWER EXHAUST Supplimental Symbio 700 All 12134461 DIAGRAM; SCHEMATIC - CONVENIENCE OUTLET OPTION Supplimental Symbio 700 All 12134352 LABEL; DIAGRAM, LOW AMBIENT RT-SVX071 B-EN 57 CO Figure 63. Piping diagram - 6 to 12.5 tons standard efficiency (YSJ072-150) AIR AIR l Figure 64 X 0 J W M Z AIR Piping diagram — 6 to 12.5 tons standard efficiency — hot gas reheat (YSJ072-150) COIL AIR o Figure 65. Piping diagram— 15to 25 tons standard efficiency (YSJ180-300) COIL AIR AIR Figure 66. Piping diagram —15 to 25 tons standard efficiency— hot gas reheat (YSJ180-300) :OIL AIR AIR Gas Heat Operation and Maintenance Gas Heat Unit General Information Hazard of Explosion or Fire! Failure to follow instructions could result in death or serious injury and equipment or property damage. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. IF YOU SMELL GAS, follow instructions below: • Do not try to light any appliance. • Do not touch any electrical switch. • Do not use any phone in your building. • Open windows and doors. • Alert others and evacuate building immediately • From a phone outside of the building, immediately call your gas supplier. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. Safety Hazards! Failure to follow instructions below could result in death or serious injury and equipment or property damage. Do not use this furnace if any portion has been underwater as it may have rendered the unit hazardous to operate. Immediately call a qualified service technician to inspect the furnace and to replace any part or the control system and any gas control which has been under water. • Should overheating occur, or the unit gas valve fail to shut off, close the gas valve to the furnace before shutting off the electrical supply. Safety Hazards! Failure to follow instructions below could result in death or serious injury. • Never perform any maintenance procedures until the electrical power to the unit is turned off. • Never perform any maintenance procedures until the gas valve to the gas supply is turned off. • Never remove any panels from the unit while it is operating. • Never remove panels or parts from the unit that are not discussed in this manual. • Never cover the unit, since it is designed to operate year round. The unit has a complex design. To ensure that it performs safely and gives long lasting services, some of the maintenance work must be performed by a qualified service person. When a service person is referred to in this manual it is describing a service technician who has had special training or a number of years experience in servicing this type of equipment. It is your responsibility to select a qualified service company that can provide a service person of this caliber. Thermostat Room thermostats are delicate temperature sensing controls. Their main function is to energize and de -energize the heating or cooling circuit to maintain the temperature setting you select. Many thermostats contain a room thermometer to indicate the approximate room temperature and a temperature scale at the adjustment indicator to select the desired indoor air temperature. In addition, most thermostats have a selector mode switch with Heat, Off and Cool positions and a fan switch with On and Off positions. When the switch is positioned at Off your unit will not operate in either the heat or cool modes. If the selector switch is set at Heat the unit will automatically cycle on and off to maintain the desired temperature setting. The unit will also operate automatically when the selector switch is positioned at Cool. The fan selector switch can be used to operate the indoor fan continuously by positioning it at On. When set to Auto the fan will only operate when required during the heating or cooling cycles. To ensure that the thermostat operates properly, it must be level and positioned to avoid the influence of such external heat sources as lamps, televisions or other heat producing appliances. 62 RT-SVX071 B-EN Gas Heat Operation and Maintenance Note: Single zone VA is designed to be used with a zone sensor. If a unit is configured for Single zone VAV operation but is connected to a thermostat, the control will revert to multi -speed (2-speed) indoor fan control and staged compressor control. This drastically reduces the energy savings available with this design. Figure 67. Gas unit overview It is very important to keep the central duct system air filters clean. Be sure to inspect them at least once each month when the system is in constant operation. (In new homes, check the filters every week for the first 4 weeks.) See the following table for the required filter size(s). If you have disposable type filters, replace them with new filters of the same type and size. Do not attempt to clean disposable filters. Permanent type filters can be cleaned by washing them with a mild detergent and water. Ensure that the filters are thoroughly dry before reinstalling them in the unit (or duct system). It may be necessary to replace permanent filters annually if washing fails to clean the filter, be sure to use the same type and size as was originally installed. Table 16. Recommended standard filters Tons Unit Model Number QtYt Filter Size (L x W x D) 6 YSJ072A**(0,A)(L,M,H) 2 18 x 24 x 2 3 24x16x2 7.5 YSJ090A**(0,A)(L,M,H) 2 18x24x2 3 24x16x2 8.5 YSJ102A**(O,A)(L,M,H) 2 j 18x24x2 3 1 24x16x2 Air Filters Filters are to be used with this unit. Units ship from the factory with filters installed. Table 16. Recommended standard filters (continued) Tons Unit Model Number Qty Filter Size (L x W x D) 10 YSJ120A**(0,A)(L,M,H) 2 18x24x2 3 24x16x2 12.5 YSJ150A**(O,A)(L,M,H) 3 18x18x2 3 24x18x2 15 YSJ180A-*(O,A)(L,M,H) 8 20 x 24 x 2 17.5 YSJ210A**(0,A)(L,M,H) 8 20 x 24 x 2 20 YSJ240A**(O,A)(L,M,H) 8 20 x 24 x 2 25 YSJ300A**(0,A)(L,M,H) 8 20 x 24 x 2 Heating System Heating Cycle Operation The unit heating system is a solid-state electronic ignition control that lights the furnace burners each time the thermostat calls for heat. At the end of each heating cycle the furnace burners are extinguished. This type of system is called Direct Spark Ignition (DSI). A normal heating cycle begins when the air temperature drops below the thermostat setting. The thermostat then energizes the heating electrical circuit that starts and controls the furnace burners. Shortly after the burners RT-SVX071 B-EN 63 Gas Heat Operation and Maintenance ignite the indoor fan starts and circulates warm air through the conditioned space. When the air temperature rises to the thermostat setting the thermostat deenergizes the heating electrical circuit, which in turn extinguishes the burners. The indoor fan continues to circulate warm air until most of the heat is removed from the unit's combustion chamber. Safety Controls • The unit is equipped with an automatic reset safety limit control to prevent overheating. When the control opens, it shuts down the heating electrical circuit until the unit cools down sufficiently. Inadequate airflow (i.e., caused by dirty filters or defective fan motor) may cause the unit to cycle on and off as the limit trips and automatically resets. If you suspect the unit is cycling on its limit control, immediately contact a service person for instructions • If flames from the burner are not properly drawn into the heat exchanger, a flame rollout protection control will open causing the furnace to shut off. The cause must be investigated by a qualified service person. • If installed, the condensate overflow switch will shut down the unit before a drain pan overflow occurs. Heating System Start -Up Because your unit has an automatic ignition system, it is easy to start the heating cycle at the beginning of the heating season. In order for the unit to operate properly and safely, the furnace needs air for both combustion and ventilation. Check to make sure that all air openings are unobstructed and there is adequate clearance around the unit to provide good air flow. Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors! Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. For variable frequency drives or other energy storing components provided by Trane or others, refer to the appropriate manufacturer's literature for allowable waiting periods for discharge of capacitors. Verify with a CAT III or IV voltmeter rated per NFPA 70E that all capacitors have discharged. 1. Set the thermostat's heating adjustment lever at its lowest setting. 2. Move the selector switch to the Off position. 3. Turnoff all electric power to the unit. Risk of Burn! Failure to follow instructions could result in serious injury. NEVER attempt to manually light the burner. 4. This unit is equipped with an ignition device which automatically lights the burners. 5. Remove the access panel that contains the following label: Figure 68. Label REMOVE THIS PANEL TO GAIN ACCESS TO THE GAS V_UVE 6. Change the ON/OFF switch to the OFF position. Note: Some valves require the knob to be pushed in slightly before turning. Hazard of Explosion or Fire! Failure to follow instructions could result in death or serious injury and equipment or property damage. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. IF YOU SMELL GAS, follow instructions below: • Do not try to light any appliance. • Do not touch any electrical switch. • Do not use any phone in your building. • Open windows and doors. • Alert others and evacuate building immediately. • From a phone outside of the building, immediately call your gas supplier. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. 7. Wait (five) minutes to clear out any gas. If you then smell gas, STOP and proceed with the instructions as per above Warning. If you do not smell gas, go to the next step. 8. Change the ON/OFF switch to the ON position. 9. Replace panel removed in Step 5. 10. Turn on all electric power to unit. 11. Set thermostat to desired temperature and move the selector switch to the ON position. The unit will now operate automatically. 12. If the unit will not operate, follow the instructions in "Turning Off Gas to Unit," p. 65 and call your service technician or gas supplier. 64 RT-SVX071 B-EN Gas Heat Operation and Maintenance Important. The unit is to be adjusted to obtain an air rise 5. Replace panel removed in Step 3. within that specified on the nameplate. Heating System Shutdown To shut down the heating system for brief periods of time simply adjust the thermostat selector switch to the "Off' position. Property Damage! Furnace failure could cause property damage, such as frozen water pipes. If the unit is shut down during the cold weather months, provisions must be taken to prevent freeze- up of all water pipes and water receptacles. Whenever your house or building is to be vacant, arrange to have someone inspect your structure for proper temperature. This is very important in below -freezing weather. Coil Freeze -Up! Failure to follow instruction below could result in equipment damage. Drain and vent coils when not in use. Trane recommends glycol protection in all possible freezing applications. Use a glycol approved for use with commercial cooling and heating systems and copper tube coils. Turning Off Gas to Unit 1. Set the thermostat to lowest setting. Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors! Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. For variable frequency drives or other energy storing components provided by Trane or others, refer to the appropriate manufacturer's literature for allowable waiting periods for discharge of capacitors. Verify with a CAT III or IV voltmeter rated per NFPA 70E that all capacitors have discharged. 2. Turn off all electric power to the unit if service is to be performed. 3. Remove the access panel that contains the label shown in Figure 68, p. 64. 4. Change ON/OFF switch to the "OFF" position. Heating System Maintenance Hazard of Explosion or Fire! Failure to follow instructions could result in death or serious injury and equipment or property damage. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. IF YOU SMELL GAS, follow instructions below: • Do not try to light any appliance. • Do not touch any electrical switch. • Do not use any phone in your building. • Open windows and doors. • Alert others and evacuate building immediately. • From a phone outside of the building, immediately call your gas supplier. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. Complete the following unit inspections and service routines at the beginning of each heating season. Important. These steps should only be performed by a qualified service technician. 1. Inspect the control panel wiring and heating controls to make sure connections are tight and wiring insulation is intact. 2. Turn the unit on and off at the thermostat to be sure the ignition control and spark electrode are operating properly. 3. Turn off the gas supply with the unit operating to verify that the gas valves closes and that a re -ignition cycle is initiated by the ignition control. 4. Check the operation of the gas ignition system 5. Check the burner manifold pressure. A 1/8 inch pipe plug is provided in the gas valve for this purpose. 6. Visually inspect all of the unit's flue product passage ways for excessive deposit build up and corrosion. If build up or corrosion is apparent, perform the necessary repairs. 7. Arrange for a qualified serviceman to inspect the unit every other heating season to maintain safe and efficient operation. 8. Visually check the main burner flames. They should be bright blue flames extending into the heat exchanger sections. 9. Never store anything flammable or combustible around or near the unit. RT-SVX071 B-EN 65 Gas Heat Operation and Maintenance Condensate Overflow Sensor (Optional) If installed, the condensate overflow switch will shut down the unit before a drain pan overflow occurs. 66 RT-SVX071 B-EN Limited Warranty Electric Air Conditioner YSJ Precedent Models This warranty is extended by Trane to the original purchaser and to any succeeding owner of the real property to which the Electric/ Electric Air Conditioner is originally affixed and applies to products purchased and retained for use within the U.S.A. and Canada. The Company warrants for a period of 12 months from initial start-up or 18 months from date of shipment, whichever is less, that the company products covered by this order (1) are free from defects in material and workmanship and (2) have the capacities and ratings set forth in the Company's catalogs and bulletins. There is no warranty against corrosion, erosion or deterioration. If any part of your Air Conditioner fails because of a manufacturing defect within three years (36 months) from the date of the original purchase, warrantor will furnish without charge the required replacement part. If the heat exchanger fails because of a manufacturing defect within ten years from the date of start-up, warrantor will furnish without charge a replacement heat exchanger. In addition, if the optional, factory installed, stainless steel heat exchanger fails because of a manufacturing defect within fifteen years from the date of start-up, warrantor will furnish without charge a replacement heat exchanger. Any local transportation, related service labor and diagnosis calls are not included. In addition, if the sealed motor -compressor fails because of a manufacturing defect within the fourth through fifth year from the date of original purchase, warrantor will furnish without charge the required replacement compressor. Warrantor's obligations and liabilities under this warranty are limited to furnishing F.O.B. warrantor factory or warehouse at warrantor designated shipping point, freight allowed to buyer's city, replacement parts for warrantor's products covered under this warranty. Warrantor shall not be obligated to pay for the cost of lost refrigerant. No liability shall attach to warrantor until products have been paid for and then liability shall be limited solely to the purchase price of the equipment under warranty shown to be defective. THE WARRANTY AND LIABILITY SET FORTH HEREIN ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND LIABILITIES, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR IN NEGLIGENCE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN LAW OR IN FACT, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR USE, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL WARRANTOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. The Company makes certain further warranty protection available on an optional extra -cost basis. Any further warranty must be in writing, signed by an officer of the company. The warranty and liability set forth herein are in lieu of all other warranties and liabilities, whether in contract or in negligence, express or implied, in law or in fact, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for particular use. In no event shall the company be liable for any incidental or consequential damages. * This warranty is for commercial usage of said equipment and not applicable when the equipment is used for a residential application. Commercial use is any application where the end purchaser uses the product for other than personal, family or household purposes. **A five year limited warranty is provided for the optional "Low Leak" economizer. RT-SVX071 B-EN 67 Trane and American Standard create comfortable, energy efficient indoor environments for commercial and residential applications. For more information, please visit trane.com or americanstandardair.com. Trane and American Standard have a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserve the right to change design and specifications without notice. We are committed to using environmentally conscious print practices. RT-SVX071 B-EN 15 Sep 2022 Supersedes RT-SVX071A-EN (June 2022) ©2022 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioners Precedent"' — Electric/Electric 3 to 10 Tons - 60 Hz Model Numbers: TSC036G - TSC060G THC037E - THC067E Model Numbers: TSC072H - TSC120H THC048F - THC120F Model Numbers: THC036E - THC072E Only qualified personnel should install and service the equipment. The installation, starting up, and servicing of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous and requires specific knowledge and training. Improperly installed, adjusted or altered equipment by an unqualified person could result in death or serious injury. When working on the equipment, observe all precautions in the literature and on the tags, stickers, and labels that are attached to the equipment. April 2020 RT-SVX22V-EN Introduction Read this manual thoroughly before operating or servicing this unit. Warnings, Cautions, and Notices Safety advisories appear throughout this manual as required. Your personal safety and the proper operation of this machine depend upon the strict observance of these precautions. The three types of advisories are defined as follows: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It could also be used to alert against unsafe practices. Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or property -damage only accidents. Important Environmental Concerns Scientific research has shown that certain man-made chemicals can affect the earth's naturally occurring stratospheric ozone layer when released to the atmosphere. In particular, several of the identified chemicals that may affect the ozone layer are refrigerants that contain Chlorine, Fluorine and Carbon (CFCs) and those containing Hydrogen, Chlorine, Fluorine and Carbon (HCFCs). Not all refrigerants containing these compounds have the same potential impact to the environment. Trane advocates the responsible handling of all refrigerants -including industry replacements for CFCs and HCFCs such as saturated or unsaturated HFCs and HCFCs. Important Responsible Refrigerant Practices Trane believes that responsible refrigerant practices are important to the environment, our customers, and the air conditioning industry. All technicians who handle refrigerants must be certified according to local rules. For the USA, the Federal Clean AirAct (Section 608) sets forth the requirements for handling, reclaiming, recovering and recycling of certain refrigerants and the equipment that is used in these service procedures. In addition, some states or municipalities may have additional requirements that must also be adhered to for responsible management of refrigerants. Know the applicable laws and follow them. Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state electrical codes. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Required! Failure to wear proper PPE for the job being undertaken could result in death or serious injury. Technicians, in order to protect themselves from potential electrical, mechanical, and chemical hazards, MUST follow precautions in this manual and on the tags, stickers, and labels, as well as the instructions below: Before installing/servicing this unit, technicians MUST put on all PPE required for the work being undertaken (Examples; cut resistant gloves/sleeves, butyl gloves, safety glasses, hard hat/bump cap, fall protection, electrical PPE and arc flash clothing). ALWAYS refer to appropriate Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and OSHA guidelines for proper PPE. • When working with or around hazardous chemicals, ALWAYS refertothe appropriate SDSand OSHA/GHS (Global Harmonized System of Classification and Labeling of Chemicals) guidelines for information on allowable personal exposure levels, proper respiratory protection and handling instructions. If there is a risk of energized electrical contact, arc, or flash, technicians MUST put on all PPE in accordance with OSHA, NFPA 70E, or other country -specific requirements for arc flash protection, PRIOR to servicing the unit. NEVER PERFORM ANY SWITCHING, DISCONNECTING, OR VOLTAGE TESTING WITHOUT PROPER ELECTRICAL PPE AND ARC FLASH CLOTHING. ENSURE ELECTRICAL METERS AND EQUIPMENT ARE PROPERLY RATED FOR INTENDED VOLTAGE. © 2020 RT-SVX22V-EN Introduction Follow EHS Policies! Failure to follow instructions below could result in death or serious injury. • All Trane personnel must follow the company's Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) policies when performing work such as hot work, electrical, fall protection, lockout/tagout, refrigerant handling, etc. Where local regulations are more stringent than these policies, those regulations supersede these policies. • Non-Trane personnel should always follow local regulations. Copyright This document and the information in it are the property of Trane, and may not be used or reproduced in whole or in part without written permission. Trane reserves the right to revisethis publication at anytime, and to make changes to its content without obligation to notify any person of such revision or change. Trademarks All trademarks referenced in this document are the trademarks of their respective owners. Revision History • Implementation of separation of circuit control box, 3- phase OD motors, and Title 24 and SZVAV options • Affects 6 to 10 ton standard efficiency models • Added Sequence of Operation to Start -Up RT-SVX22V-EN Table of Contents Model Number Descriptions -3 to 10 Tons (TN) 7 Model Number Descriptions - 3 to 5 Tons (TN - 17 Plus) ................................ 10 Model Number Notes ............... 11 General Information .................... 12 Unit Inspection ..................... 12 Storage ........................... 12 Unit Nameplate .................... 12 Compressor Nameplate .............. 12 Microchannel Coil Barcode ID ......... 12 Unit Description .................... 12 Economizer Control Actuator (Optional) 12 System Input Devices & Functions ..... 13 Low Pressure Control ................ 14 High Pressure Control ............... 14 Power Exhaust Control (Optional) ..... 14 Lead/Lag Control (Dual Circuit Only) ... 14 Evaporator Frost Control ............. 15 Discharge Line Temp Switch (DLTS) ... 16 Smoke Detector Sensor (Optional) ..... 16 Phase Monitor ..................... 16 Single Zone Variable Air Volume / Displace- ment Ventilation (Optional) ........... 16 Human Interface - 5 Inch Color Touchscreen (Optional) ......................... 16 Installation ............................. 17 Pre -Installation ....................... 17 Dimensions and Weights ................ 18 Unit Clearances ...................... 18 Installation ............................. 27 Foundation .......................... 27 Horizontal Units .................... 27 Ductwork ............................ 27 Roof Curb ......................... 28 Rigging ........................... 29 General Unit Requirements ............ 30 Factory Installed Economizer ......... 30 Temperature Limit Switch Usage for Electric Heat Units ..........................30 Horizontal Discharge Conversion (3 to 5 Ton Units)................................31 Horizontal Discharge Conversion (6 to 10 Ton Units)................................31 TCO-A Instructions ...................32 Return Air Smoke Detector .............33 Air-FiTI Wireless Communication Interface 33 Main Electrical Power Requirements .....34 Electric Heat Requirements ............34 Low Voltage Wiring (AC & DC) Requirements ..............34 Condensate Drain Configuration .........34 Filter Installation ......................35 Field Installed Power Wiring ............35 Main Unit Power ......................36 Standard Wiring .....................36 Optional TBUE Wiring (Through -the -Base Electrical Option) ....................36 Field Installed Control Wiring ..........37 Control Power Transformer ...........37 Controls using 24 VAC ................37 Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs (Standard Low Voltage Multi conductor Wire) 37 DC Conductors ......................38 Space Temperature Averaging (ReliaTelTM on- ly)...................................43 Pre-Start................................46 Voltage Imbalance .....................46 Electrical Phasing (Three Phase Motors) ..46 Compressor Crankcase Heaters (Optional) 47 ReliaTelTM Controls ..................47 Test Modes ...........................48 Electromechanical Controls Test Procedure ......................48 Unit Start -Up ............................50 Sequence of Operation ...................50 ReliaTeIT°^ Controls ..................50 ReliaTeITI Controls - Constant Volume (CV) 50 4 RT-SVX22V-EN ReliaTelT" Control Cooling without an Econo- mizer ............................. 50 Three -Stages of Cooling ............. 50 ReliaTeITI Control Evaporator Fan Operation (for Gas Units) ..................... 50 ReliaTeITI Control Evaporator Fan Operation (for Cooling Only Units) .............. 51 Low Ambient Operation ............. 51 Multi -Speed Indoor Motor ............ 51 Fan Output% ....................... 51 Multi -Zone VAV Sequence of Operation . 51 Supply Air Pressure Control .......... 51 Supply Air Static Pressure Limit ....... 52 Supply Air Temperature Controls ...... 52 Supply Air Setpoint Reset ............ 52 Zone Temperature Control ........... 52 Variable Air Volume Applications (Single Zone VAV)........................... 53 Discharge Air Cool Setpoint Adjustment 53 ReliaTeITI Control Cooling with an Economiz- er................................ 53 ReliaTelTM Control Dehumidification ... 54 Dehumidification Coil Purge Cycle ..... 54 ReliaTelT" Control Cooling with an Economiz- er................................ 54 Economizer Set -Up ................. 55 ReliaTeITI Control Heating Operation (for Cooling Only Units) ................. 55 ReliaTeITM Control Heating Operation (for Gas Units) ............................. 55 Ignition Module .................... 55 Drain Pan Condensate Overflow Switch (Op- tional) ............................ 56 Electromechanical Controls ............ 56 Electromechanical Control Cooling without an Economizer ..................... 56 Electromechanical Control Evaporator Fan Operation (for Gas Units) ............ 56 Electromechanical Evaporator Fan Operation (for Cooling Only Units) .............. 56 Economizer Set -Up ................. 56 Electromechanical Control Cooling with an Economizer ........................ 57 Electromechanical Control Heating Operation Table of Contents (for Cooling Only Units) ...............57 Electromechanical Control Heating Operation (for Gas Units) ......................57 Ignition Module Low, Medium and High Heat 57 Drain Pan Condensate Overflow Switch (Op- tional) .............................57 Verifying Proper Air Flow ...............58 Units with 5-Tap Direct Drive Indoor Fan .58 Units with Belt Drive Indoor Fan ........58 Units with Direct Drive Indoor Fan - Electro- mechanical Control ..................59 ReliaTelTM Units with Direct Drive Indoor Fan (10 Ton Standard Efficiency, 6(074) to 10 Ton High Efficiency, and optional 7.5 (092) to 8.5 Ton Standard Efficiency) ..............59 Units with Constant CFM Direct Drive Indoor Fan................................60 17 Plus units with the constant CFM direct drive indoor fan .....................60 Variable Air Volume Applications (Traditional VAV)..............................61 Supply Duct Static Pressure Control ....62 Traditional VAV Standalone Operation ..62 Supply Air Temperature Reset .........62 Return Air Smoke Detector ............63 Economizer Start -Up .................63 Compressor Start -Up .................64 Dehumidification Option ..............64 Final System Setup ..................65 Maintenance ............................66 Fan Belt Adjustment - Belt Drive Units ....66 Monthly Maintenance ..................67 Filters..............................67 Return Air Smoke Detector Maintenance 67 Cooling Season .....................67 Heating Season .....................67 Coil Cleaning .......................67 Microchannel (MCHE) Coils ...........68 Round Tube Plate Fin (RTPF) Coils ......68 Annual Maintenance ...................69 Final Process ..........................69 Troubleshooting .........................70 RT-SVX22V-EN 5 Table of Contents ReliaTeITI Control .................... 70 System Status Checkout Procedure ..... 70 Method 1 .......................... 70 Resetting Cooling and Ignition Lockouts 71 Zone Temperature Sensor (ZTS) Service Indi- cator ................................ 72 Clogged Filter Switch ................ 72 Fan Failure Switch .................. 72 Condensate Overflow Switch ......... 72 Zone Temperature Sensor (ZTS) Test ... 72 Test 1 - Zone Temperature Thermistor (ZTEMP) ........................... 72 Test 2 - Cooling Set Point (CSP) and Heating Set Point (HSP) ..................... 72 Test 3 - System Mode and Fan Selection 72 Test 4 - LED Indicator Test, (SYS ON, HEAT, COOL & SERVICE) .................. 72 Relative Humidity Sensor Test ........ 73 Programmable & Digital Zone Sensor Test ........................ 73 ReliaTeIT" Refrigeration Module (RTRM) De- fault Chart ......................... 73 Unit Operation without a Zone Sensor .. 73 Unit Economizer Control (ECA) Troubleshoot- ing.................................. 73 ReliaTeIT°^ Control .................. 73 Electromechanical Control ........... 74 Unit Economizer Control (ECA) Test Proce- dures ............................... 75 Electromechanical Control ........... 75 Troubleshooting procedures for Direct Drive Plenum Fan .......................... 76 Unit Wiring Diagrams Numbers .......... 77 Limited Warranty ....................... 80 Electric Air Conditioner ................ 80 TCD, TCH, TSC and THC (Parts Only) ... 80 Models Less Than 20 Tons for Commercial Use* .............................. 80 6 RT-SVX22V-EN Model Number Descriptions - 3 to 10 Tons (T/Y) Digit 1 — Unit Type T = DX Cooling Y = DX Cooling, Gas Heat Digit 2 — Efficiency S = Standard Efficiency H = High Efficiency Digit 3 — Airflow C = Convertible Digit 4,5,6 — Nominal Gross Cooling Capacity (MBh) 036 = 3 Ton 048 = 4 Ton 060 = 5 Ton 072=6Ton 074 = 6 Ton, Dual Compressor 090 = 7.5 Ton, Single Compressor 092 = 7.5 Ton, Dual Compressor 102 = 8.5 Ton 120=10Ton Digit 7 — Major Design Sequence E = R-410A Refrigerant F = Microchannel Type Condenser Coilsl G = Microchannel Type Evaporator and Condenser Coils H = Major Design Sequence Digit 8 — Voltage Selection 1 = 208/230/60/1 3 = 208-230/60/3 4 = 460/60/3 W = 575/60/3 Digit 9 — Unit Controls E = Electromechanical R = ReliaTeIT" Microprocessor Digit 10 — Heating Note: Applicable to Digit 1, T models only. 0 = No Electric Heat A = 5 kW (1 phase)2 B = 6 kW (3 phase) C = 9 kW (3 phase) D = 10 kW (1 phase)2 E = 12 kW (3 phase) F = 14 kW (1 phase)2 G = 18 kW (1&3 phase) J = 23 kW (3 phase) K = 27 kW (3 phase) N = 36 kW (3 phase) P = 54 kW (3 phase) Note: Applicable to Digit 1, Y models only. L = Low Heat M = Medium Heat H = High Heat X = Low Heat, Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger Y= Medium Heat, Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger Z = High Heat, Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger Digit 11 — Minor Design Sequence A = First Sequence3 B = Second Sequence4 Digit 12, 13 — Service Sequence ** = Factory Assigned Digit 14 — Fresh Air Selection 0 = No Fresh Air A = Manual Outside Air Damper 0-50%5 B = Motorized Outside Air Damper 0 50%6 C = Economizer, Dry Bulb 0-100% without Barometric Relief7 D = Economizer, Dry Bulb 0-100% with Barometric Relief7 E = Economizer, Reference Enthalpy 0- 100% without Barometric Relief7,8 F = Economizer, Reference Enthalpy 0- 100% with Barometric Relief7,8 G = Economizer, Comparative Enthalpy 0-100% without Barometric Relief7,8 H = Economizer, Comparative Enthalpy 0-100% with Barometric ReliefT8 K = Low Leak Economizer with Barometric Relief M = Low Leak Economizer with Barometric Relief P = Low Leak Economizer with Comparative Enthalpy with Barometric Relief Digit 15 — Supply Fan/Drive Type/Motor 0 = Standard Drive9 1 = Oversized Motor 2 = Optional Belt Drive Motorio 6 = Single Zone VAV11,12 7 = Multi -Speed Indoor Fan13 E = VAV Supply Air Temperature Controls Standard Motor12 Digit 16 — Hinged Service Access/Filters 0 = Standard Panels/Standard Filters A = Hinged Access Panels/Standard Filters B = Standard Panels/2" MERV 8 Filters C = Hinged Access Panels/2" MERV 8 Filters D = Standard Panels/2" MERV 13 Filters E = Hinged Access Panels/2" MERV 8 Filters Digit 17 — Condenser Coil Protection 0 = Standard Coil 1 = Standard Coil with Hail Guard 2 = Black Epoxy Coil Pre -Coated Condenser Coil13 3 = Black Epoxy Coil Pre -Coated Condenser Coil with Hail Guard14 4 = CompleteCoat'' with Condenser Coil 5 = CompleteCoat' with Hail Guard Digit 18 — Through -the -Base Provisions Note: Applicable to Digit 1, T or Y models only. 0 = No Through -the -Base Provisions A = Through -the -Base Electric15 Note: Applicable to Digit 1, Y models only. B = Through -the -Base Gas Piping16 C = Through -the -Base Electric and Gas Pipingl6 Digit 19 — Disconnect/Circuit Breaker (three-phase only) 0 = No Disconnect/No Circuit Breaker 1 = Unit Mounted/Non-Fused Disconnect15 2 = Unit Mounted Circuit Breaker15 Digit 20— Convenience Outlet 0 = No Convenience Outlet A = Unpowered Convenience Outlet B = Powered Convenience Outlet (three-phase only)17 Digit 21— Communications Options$ 0 = No Communications Interface 1 = Trane® Communications Interface 2 = LonTalk® Communications Interface 3 = Novar 2024 Controls18 4 = Novar 3051 Controls without Zone Sensor18 5 = Novar 3051 Controls Interface with DCV18 6 = BACnetOO Communications Interface 7 = Trane® Air-Fi'" Communications Interface19 Digit 22— Refrigeration System Option 0 = Standard Refrigeration System20 B = Dehumidification Option21,22 Digit 23— Refrigeration Controls Note: Applicable to Digit 7 = E, F, G,H. 0 = No Refrigeration Contro123 1 = FrostatT"" 24,25 Digit 24— Smoke Detector26 0 = No Smoke Detector A = Return Air Smoke Detector27.28 B = Supply Air Smoke Detector C = Supply and Return Air Smoke Detectors27,28 D = Plenum Smoke Detector Digit 25— System Monitoring Controls 0 = No Monitoring Contro129 1 = Clogged Filter Switch29 2 = Fan Filter Switch29 3 = Discharge Air Sensing Tube29 4 = Clogged Filter Switch and Fan Filter Switch29 5 = Clogged Filter Switch and Discharge Air Sensing Tube29 6 = Fan Failure Switch and Discharge Air RT-SVX22V-EN Model Number Descriptions - 3 to 10 Tons (T/Y) Sensing Tube29 7 = Clogged Filter Switch, Fan Failure Switch and Discharge Air Sensing Tube29 8 = Novar Return Air Sensor (NOVAR 2024)30,18 9 = Novar Zone Temp Sensor (NOVAR 3051)31,18 A = Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch) B = Clogged Filter Switch29 and Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch C = Fan Failure Switch29 and Condensate Drain Pan Switch D = Discharge Air Sensing29 and Condensate Overflow Switch E = Clogged Filter Switch29, Fan Failure Switch and Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch F = Clogged Filter Switch29, Discharge Air Sensing Tube29 and Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch G = Fan Failure Switch, Discharge Air Sensing Tube29 and Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch H = Clogged Filter Switch29, Fan Failure Switch29, Discharge Air Sensing29 and Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch Digit 26- System Monitoring Controls 0 = No Monitoring Control A = Demand Control Ventilation (CO2)32,33 B = Low Leak Economizer with FDD (Fault Detection & Diagnostics) C = FDD (Fault Detection & Diagnostics) with DCV (Demand Control Ventilation) Digit 27- Unit Hardware Enhancements 0 = No Enhancements 1 = Stainless Steel Drain Pan Digit 31- Advanced Unit Controls 0 = Standard Unit Controls 1 = Human Interface Model Number Notes 1. Standard on T/YSC 6, 7.5 (single and dual systems), 8.5, 10 ton standard efficiency models and T/ YHC 4, 5, 6, 7.5, 8.5, 10 ton MCHE high efficiency models (except for 4, 5, 6 ton dehumidification models). 2. Available on 3 to 5 ton models. 3. Available for all models except gas/electric, 3 to 5 tons high efficiency, single phase. 4. Available for gas/electric, 3 to 5 tons, high efficiency, single phase models. 5. Manual outside air damper will ship factory supplied within the unit, but must be field installed. 6. Motorized outside air damper is not available on multi -speed or SZVAV (single zone variable air volume) products. 7. Economizer with barometric relief is for downflow configured units only. Order economizer without barometric relief for horizontal configuration. Barometric relief for horizontal configured units must be ordered as field installed accessory. 8. Not available with electromechanical controls. Multi -speed, direct drive motor with no belt drive option is standard on 3 to 5 ton, standard efficiency, 14 SEER units. Multi - speed, direct drive motor with a belt drive option is available for 3 to 5 ton,15 SEER units. On 6 to 10 tons, multispeed direct drive is standard on all 10 ton and 6 (074) to 8.5 ton high efficiency. Belt drive is standard on all other units. Table 1, p. 9. 10. Reference Table 1, p. 9. 11. Single zone VAV is only available on 6to 10tons high efficiency and 7.5 to 10 ton standard efficiency products with ReliaTeITM controls. 12. Discharge air sensing is also standard equipment on units with single zone and supply air temperature control VAV. 13. Multi -speed indoor fan available only on 6, 7.5 & 8.5 tons high efficiency, and 7.5 to 10 ton products with ReliaTeITM controls. 14. Epoxy coil and epoxy with hail guard options are not available for units with microchannel condenser coil. 15. Through -the -base electric required when ordering disconnect/circuit breaker options. 16. Includes gas piping and shutoff (field assembly required). 17. Requires use of disconnect or circuit breaker. Reference Table 1, p. 9. 18. Novar is not available with SZVAV products. 19. Must be used with BACnet® open protocol. 20. Standard metering devices are TXVs. 21. Requires selection of 2" pleated filters (option B or C) for Digit 16. 22. Not available on all single phase or standard efficiency. 23. High pressure control is standard on all units. 24. FrostatT°^ cannot be field installed in electro-mechanical units. 25. FrostatTM standard on Y/TSC036 to 060G and TNSC090H electromechanical, multi -speed and SZVAV (single zone variable air volume) products. 26. Not available with high temperature duct sensor accessory. 27. The return air smoke detector may not fit up o r work properly on the PrecedentTl units when used in conjunction with 3rd party accessories such as bolt on heat wheels, economizers and power exhaust. Do not order the return air smoke detectors when using this type of accessory. 28. Return air smoke detector cannot be ordered with Novar controls. 29. These options are standard when ordering Novar controls. 30. This option is used when ordering Novar controls. 31. Novar sensor utilized with Digit 21 = (4) Novar 3051 controls without zone sensor. 32. Demand control ventilation not available with electromechanical controls. 33. Demand control ventilation option includes wiring only. The CO2 sensor is afield -installed only option. 8 RT-SVX22V-EN Model Number Descriptions - 3 to 10 Tons (T/Y) Table 1. Digit 15 Selection Details Digit 15 = 0 Standard Efficiency 3 Phase (3 to 5 Ton) = Multispeed Direct Drive Motor 3 Phase 6 to 8.5 Ton = Bet Drive 3 Phase (10 Ton) = Ultra High Efficiency Direct Drive Plenum Fan High Efficiency 1 Phase = High Efficiency Multispeed Direct Drive Motor 3 Phase (3 to 5 ton) = High Efficiency Multispeed Direct Drive Motor 3 Phase 3 to 5 ton w De umi i ication = Belt Drive Motor 3 Phase 6 074 to 10 ton = Ultra High Efficiency Direct Drive Plenum Fan Digit 15 = 2 Standard Efficiency 3 Phase = Not Available High Efficiency 1 Phase = Not Available 3 Phase 3 to 5 tons = May be Ordered 3 Phase (3 to 5 tons w/dehumidification) = Not Available 3 Phase 6 to 10 tons = Not Available Table 2. Not Available in Model Number Standard Efficiency 3 to 5 Tons and 10 Ton w 575V High Efficiency 3 to 5 Tons w/Standard Indoor Motor w 460V High Efficiency 575V RT-SVX22V-EN Model Number Descriptions - 3 to 5 Tons (T/Y - 17 Plus) Model Number Descriptions - 3 to 5 Tons (T/Y - 17 Plus) Digit 1 - Unit Type T DX Cooling Y DX Cooling, Gas Heat Digit 2 - Efficiency S Standard Efficiency H High Efficiency Digit 3 - Airflow C Convertible Digit 4,5,6 - Nominal Gross Cooling Capacity (MBh) 037 3 Ton 047 4 Ton 067 5 Ton Digit 7 - Major Design Sequence E R-410A Refrigerant Digit 8 - Voltage Selection 3 208-230/60/3 4 460/60/3 W 575/60/3 Digit 9 - Unit Controls R ReliaTelTI Microprocessor Digit 10 - Heating Capacity Note: Applicable to Digit 1, T models only 0 No Electric Heat B 6 kW (3 phase) E 12 kW (3 phase) G 18 kW (1&3 phase) J 23 kW (3 phase) Note: Applicable to Digit 1, Y models only L Low Heat M Medium Heat H High Heat X Low Heat, Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger Y Medium Heat, Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger Z High Heat, Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger Digit 11 - Minor Design Sequence A First Sequence15 Digit 12,13 - Service Sequence ** Factory Assigned Digit 14 - Fresh Air Selection 0 No Fresh Air A Manual Outside Air Damper 0-50%1 B Motorized Outside Air Damper 0-50% C Economizer, Dry Bulb 0-100% without Barometric Relief4 D Economizer, Dry Bulb 0-100% with Barometric Relief4 E Economizer, Reference Enthalpy 0-100% without Barometric Relief4 F Economizer, Reference Enthalpy 0-100%with Barometric Relief4 G Economizer, Comparative Enthalpy 0-100% without Barometric Relief4 H Economizer, Comparative Enthalpy 0-100% with Barometric Relief4 K Low Leak Economizer with Barometric Relief M Low Leak Economizer with Reference Enthalpy with Barometric Relief P Low Leak Economizer with Comparative Enthalpy with Barometric Relief Digit 15 - Supply Fan/Drive Type/ Motor 0 Standard Drive3 6 Single Zone VAV20 E VAV Supply Air Temperature Control Standard Motor20 Digit 16 - Hinged Service Access/Filters 0 Standard Panels/Standard Filters A Hinged Access Panels/Standard Filters B Standard Panels/2" MERV 8 Filters C Hinged Access Panels/2" MERV 8 Filters D Standard Panels/2" MERV 13 Filters E Hinged Access Panels/2" MERV 13 Filters Digit 17 - Condenser Coil Protection Standard Coil Standard Coil with Hail Guard Black Epoxy Pre -Coated Condenser Coil Black Epoxy Pre -Coated Condenser Coil with Hail Guard CompleteCoatT" Condenser Coil CompleteCoatT" Condenser Coil with Hail Guard Digit 18 - Through the Base Provisions 0 No Through -the -Base Provisions A Through -the -Base Electric5 B Through -the -Base Gas Piping12 C Through -the -Base Electric and Gas Piping12 Digit 19 - Disconnect/Circuit Breaker (three-phase only) 0 No Disconnect/No Circuit Breaker 1 Unit Mounted Non -Fused Disconnects 2 Unit Mounted Circuit Breakers Digit 20 - Convenience Outlet 0 No Convenience Outlet A Unpowered Convenience Outlet B Powered Convenience Outlet (three-phase only)6 Digit 21 - Communications Options 0 No Communications Interface 3 Novar 2024 Controls 4 Novar 3051 Controls without Zone Sensor 5 Novar 3051Controls Interface with DCV Digit 22 - Refrigeration System Option 0 Standard Refrigeration System? B Dehumidification Option16 Digit 23 - Refrigeration Controls Note: Applicable to Digit 7 = E 0 No Refrigeration Contro12 1 FrostatT"" Digit 24 - Smoke Detector13 0 No Smoke Detector A Return Air Smoke Detector8,9 B Supply Air Smoke Detector C Supply and Return Air Smoke Detectors8,9 D Plenum Smoke Detector Digit 25 - System Monitoring Controls 0 No Monitoring Control10 1 Clogged Filter Switchlo 2 Fan Failure Switchlo 3 Discharge Air Sensing Tubelo 4 Clogged Filter Switch and Fan Failure Switchlo 5 Clogged Filter Switch and Discharge Air Sensing Tubelo 6 Fan Failure Switch and Discharge Air Sensing Tubelo 7 Clogged Filter Switch, Fan Failure Switch and Discharge Air Sensing Tubelo 8 Novar Return Air Sensor (NOVAR 2024)11,19 9 Novar Zone Temp Sensor (NOVAR 3051)14,19 10 RT-SVX22V-EN Model Number Descriptions - 3 to 5 Tons (T/Y - 17 Plus) A Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch B Clogged Filter Switch10 and Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch C Fan Failure Switch10 and Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch D Discharge Air Sensing10 and Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch E Clogged Filter Switch10, Fan Failure Switch10 and Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch F Clogged Filter Switch10, Discharge Air Sensing Tubelo and Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch G Fan Failure Switch10, Discharge Air Sensing Tube10 and Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch H Clogged Filter Switch10, Fan Failure Switch10, Discharge Air Sensing10 and Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch Digit 26 - System Monitoring Controls 0 No Monitoring Controls A Demand Control Ventilation (COW7,18 B Low Leak Economizer with FDD (Fault Detection & Diagnostics) C FDD (Fault Detection & Diagnostics) with DCV (Demand Control Ventilation) Digit 27 - Unit Hardware Enhancements 0 No Enhancements 1 Stainless Steel Drain Pan Digit 31 - Advanced Unit Controls 0 Standard Unit Controls 1 Human Interface Model Number Notes 1. Manual outside air damper will ship factory supplied within the unit, but must be field installed. 2. High pressure control is standard on all units. 3. Direct drive is standard for 3 to 5 ton variable stage units. Digit 15=0,6 3 Phase (3-5 ton) - High Efficiency Constant CFM 4. Economizer with Barometric Relief is for downflow configured units only. Order Economizer without Barometric Relief for horizontal configuration. Barometric Relief for horizontal configured units must be ordered as field installed accessory. 5. Through the base electric required when ordering disconnect/circuit breaker options. 6. Requires use of Disconnect or Circuit Breaker. Not Available High Efficiency 3 to 5 ton w/Standard Indoor Motor w/460V or 575V 7. Standard metering devices are TXVs. 8. The return air smoke detector may notfit up or work properly on the Precedent units when used in conjunction with 3rd party accessories such as bolt on heat wheels, economizers and power exhaust. Do not order the return air smoke detectors when using this type of accessory. 9. Return Air Smoke Detector cannot be ordered with Novar Controls. 10. These options are standard when ordering Novar Controls. 11. This option is used when ordering Novar Controls. 12. Includes gas piping and shutoff (field assembly required). 13. Not available with high temperature duct sensor accessory. 14. Novar Sensor utilized with Digit21 =(4) Novar3051 Controls without Zone Sensor. 15. Available for T/Y 3,4,5 ton high efficiency models. 16. Requires selection of 2" Pleated Filters (option B or C) for Digit 16. 17. Demand Control Ventilation not available with electromechanical controls. 18. Demand Control Ventilation Option includes wiring only. The CO2 sensor is a field -installed only option. 19. Novar is not available with SZVAV products. 20. Discharge Air Sensing is also standard equipment on units with Single Zone and Supply Air Temperature Control VAV. 21. RT-SVX22V-EN 11 General Information Unit Inspection As soon as the unit arrives at the job site • Verifythatthe nameplate data matches the data on the sales order and bill of lading (including electrical data). • Verify that the power supply complies with the unit nameplate specifications. • Visually inspect the exterior of the unit, including the roof, for signs of shipping damage. If the job site inspection of the unit reveals damage or material shortages, file a claim with the carrier immediately. Specify the type and extent of the damage on the "bill of lading" before signing. • Visually inspect the internal components for shipping damage as soon as possible after delivery and before it is stored. Do not walk on the sheet metal base pans. • If concealed damage is discovered, notify the carrier's terminal of damage immediately by phone and by mail. Concealed damage must be reported within 15 days. • Request an immediate joint inspection of the damage by the carrier and the consignee. Do not remove damaged material from the receiving location. Take photos of the damage, if possible. The owner must provide reasonable evidence that the damage did not occur after delivery. • Notify the appropriate sales representative before installing or repairing a damaged unit. Storage Take precautions to prevent condensate from forming inside the unit's electrical compartments and motors if: 1. the unit is stored before it is installed; or, 2. the unit is set on the roof curb, and temporary heat is provided in the building. Isolate all side panel service entrances and base pan openings (e.g., conduit holes, Supply Air and Return Air openings, and flue openings) from the ambient air until the unit is ready for start-up. Note: Do not use the unit's heater for temporary heat without first completing the start-up procedure detailed under "Unit Start -Up," p. 50". The manufacturer will not assume any responsibility for equipment damage resulting from condensate accumulation on the unit's electrical and/or mechanical components. Unit Nameplate A Mylar unit nameplate is located on the unit's corner support next to the filter access panel. It includes the unit model number, serial number, electrical characteristics, refrigerant charge, as well as other pertinent unit data. Compressor Nameplate The nameplateforthe compressors are located on the side of the compressor. Microchannel Coil Barcode ID Barcode decal used for coil part identification can be located on the header and top of coil's inlet/outlet side. Unit Description Before shipment, each unit is leak tested, dehydrated, charged with refrigerant and compressor oil, and run tested for proper control operation. The condenser coils are either aluminum fin, mechanically bonded to copper tubing or all aluminum microchannel. Direct -drive, vertical discharge condenser fans are provided with built-in thermal overload protection. There are two control systems offered for these units. The electromechanical control option uses a thermostat to perform unitfunctions. The ReliaTeIT°^ Control Module is a microelectronic control system that is referred to as "Refrigeration Module" (RTRM). The acronym RTRM is used extensively throughout this document when referring to the control system network. These modules through Proportional/Integral control algorithms perform specific unit functions that governs unitoperation in responseto;zone temperature, supply air temperature, and/or humidity conditions depending on the application. The stages of capacity control for these units are achieved by starting and stopping the compressors. The RTRM is mounted in the control panel and is factory wired to the respective internal components. The RTRM receives and interprets information from other unit modules, sensors, remote panels, and customer binary contacts to satisfy the applicable request for cooling. Economizer Control Actuator (Optional) Electromechanical Control The ECA monitors the mixed airtemperature, ambient dry bulb temperature and local minimum position setpoint sensors, if selected, to control dampers to an accuracy of +/- 5% of stroke. The actuator is spring returned to the closed position any time that power is lost to the unit. It is capable of delivering up to 25 inch pounds of torque and is powered by 24 VAC. ReliaTell" Control The ECA monitors the mixed air temperature, return air temperature, minimum position setpoint (local or remote), power exhaust setpoint, CO2 setpoint, CO2, and ambient dry bulb/enthalpy sensor or comparative humidity (return air humidity against ambient humidity) sensors, if selected, to control dampers to an accuracy of 12 RT-SVX22V-EN +/- 5% of stroke. The actuator is spring returned to the closed position any time that power is lost to the unit. It is capable of delivering up to 25 inch pounds of torque and is powered by 24 VAC. RTCI - ReliaTelT"^ Trane Communication Interface (Optional) This module is used when the application calls for an ICSTM building management type control system. It allows the control and monitoring of the system through an ICS panel. The module can be ordered from the factory or ordered as a kit to be field installed. Follow the installation instruction that ships with each kit when field installation is necessary. RLCI - ReliaTelT" LonTalk Communication Interface (Optional) This module is used when the application calls for an ICSTM building management type control system that is LonTalk. It allowsthe control and monitoring of the system through an ICS panel. The module can be ordered from the factory or ordered as a kit to be field installed. Follow the installation instruction that ships with each kit when field installation is necessary. RBCI - ReliaTelT"' BACnet® Communications Interface (Optional) This module is used when the application calls for an open BACnet protocol. It allows the control and monitoring of the system through an ICS panel. The module can be ordered from the factory or as a kit to be field installed. Followthe installation instructions that ships with each kit when field installation is necessary. RTOM - ReliaTelTM Options Module (Standard on 17 Plus, 6 Ton(074), 7.5 Ton & 8.5 Ton High Efficiency with ReliaTel, 10 Ton with ReliaTel) The RTOM monitorsthe supply fan proving, clogged filter, supply air temperature, exhaust fan setpoint, supply air tempering, FrostatTM , smoke detector, and Variable Speed Fan Control (17 Plus units only). Refer to system input devices and functions for operation. System Input Devices & Functions The RTRM must have a zone sensor or thermostat input in order to operate the unit. The flexibility of having several mode capabilities depends upon the type of zone sensor or thermostat selected to interface with the RTRM. The descriptions of the following basic Input Devices used within the RTRM network areto acquaintthe operatorwith their function as they interface with the various modules. Refer to the unit's electrical schematic for the specific module connections. The following controls are available from the factory for field installation. General Information Supply Fan Failure Input (Optional) The Fan Failure Switch can be connected to sense indoor fan operation: FFS (Fan Failure Switch) If air flow through the unit is not proven by the differential pressure switch connected to the RTOM (factory set point 0.07 "w.c.) within 40 seconds nominally, the RTRM will shut off all mechanical operations, lock the system out, send a diagnostic to ICS, and the SERVICE output will flash. The system will remain locked out until a reset is initiated either manually or through ICS. Clogged Filter Switch (Optional) The unit mounted clogged filter switch monitors the pressure differential across the return air filters. It is mounted in the filter section and is connected to the RTOM. A diagnostic SERVICE signal is sent to the remote panel if the pressure differential acrossthe filters is at least 0.5" w.c. The contacts will automatically open when the pressure differential across the filters decreases to approximately 0.4" w.c. The clogged filter output is energized when the supply fan is operating and the clogged filter switch has been closed for at least 2 minutes. The system will continue to operate regardless of the status of the filter switch. Note: On units equipped with factory installed MERV 13 filters, a clogged filter switch with different pressure settings will be installed. This switch will close when the differential pressure is approximately 0.8' w.c. and open when the differential falls to 0.7" w.c. Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch (Optional) ReliaTel Option This input incorporates the Condensate Overflow Switch (COF) mounted on the drain pan and the ReliaTel Options Module (RTOM). When the condensate level reaches the trip point for 6 continuous seconds, the RTOM will shut down all unit functions until the overflow condition has cleared. The unit will return to normal operation after 6 continuous seconds with the COF in a non -tripped condition. If the condensate level causes unit shutdown more than 2 times in a 3 days period, the unit will be locked -out of operation requiring manual reset of diagnostic system through Zone Sensor or Building Automation System (BAS). Cycling unit power will also clear the fault. Electromechanical Option This input incorporates the condensate overflow switch (COF), COF Relay, COF Time Delay. When the condensate level reaches the trip point, the COF relay energizes and opens the 24VAC control circuit which disables the unit. Oncethe 24VAC control circuit is opened, a delaytimerwill prevent unit start-up for three minutes. RT-SVX22V-EN 13 General Information Compressor Disable (CPR1/2) This input incorporates the low pressure control (LPC) of each refrigeration circuit and can be activated by opening a field supplied contact installed on the LTB. If this circuit is open before the compressor is started, the compressor will not be allowed to operate. Anytime this circuit is opened for 1 continuous second during compressor operation, the compressor for that circuit is immediately turned "Off". The compressor will not be allowed to restart for a minimum of 3 minutes should the contacts close. If four consecutive open conditions occur during the first three minutes of operation, the compressor forthat circuit will be locked out, a diagnostic communicated to the remote panel (if installed), and a manual reset will be required to restart the compressor. Low Pressure Control ReliaTelT"^ Control When the LPC is opened for 1 continuous second, the compressor for that circuit is turned off immediately. The compressor will not be allowed to restart for a minimum of 3 minutes. If four consecutive open conditions occur during an active call for cooling, the compressor will be locked out, a diagnostic communicated to ICST"", if applicable, and a manual reset required to restart the compressor. On dual compressor units only the affected compressor circuit is locked out. Electromechanical Control When the LPC is opened, the compressor forthat circuit is turned off immediately. The compressor will restart when the LPC closes. High Pressure Control ReliaTel Control The high pressure controls are wired in series between the compressor outputs on the RTRM and the compressor contactor coils. If the high pressure control switch opens, the RTRM senses a lack of current while calling for cooling and locks the compressor out. If four consecutive open conditions occur during an active call for cooling, the compressor will be locked out, a diagnostic communicated to ICSTM, if applicable, and a manual reset required to restart the compressor. On dual compressor units only the affected compressor circuit is locked out. Electromechanical Control When the HPC is opened, the compressor for that circuit is turned off immediately. The compressor will restart when the HPC closes. Power Exhaust Control (Optional) ReliaTel Control The powerexhaustfan is started wheneverthe position of the economizer dampers meets or exceed the power exhaust setpoint when the indoor fan is on. With the optional ventilation override accessory, the power exhaust fan is independent of the indoor fan. The setpoint panel is located in the return air section and is factory set at 25%. Electromechanical Control The power exhaust fan is started whenever the indoor fan is on and the adjustable damper limit switch DLS is closed. Lead/Lag Control (Dual Circuit Only) ReliaTel Control Only Lead/Lag is a selectable input located on the RTRM. The RTRM is configured from the factory with the Lead/Lag control disabled. To activatethe Lead/Lag function, simply cut the wire connected to J3-8 at the RTRM. When it is activated, each time the designated lead compressor is shut off due to the load being satisfied, the lead compressor or refrigeration circuit switches. When the RTRM is powered up, i.e. after a power failure, the control will default to the number one circuit compressor. Lead/ Lag is not available on Multi -Speed Indoor Fan, or Single Zone Variable Air Volume (SZVAV) products. Zone Sensor Module (ZSM) (BAYSENS106*) This electronic sensor features three system switch settings (Heat, Cool, and Off) and two fan settings (On and Auto). It is a manual changeover control with single setpoint. (Cooling Setpoint Only) Zone Sensor Module (ZSM) (BAYSENS108* This electronic sensor features four system switch settings (Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off) and two fan settings (On and Auto). It is a manual or auto changeover control with dual setpoint capability. It can be used with a remote zone temperature sensor BAYSENS077*. Zone Sensor (BAYSENS110*) This electronic sensor features four system switch settings (Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off) and two fan settings (On and Auto) with four system status LED's. It is a manual or auto changeover control with dual setpoint capability. It can be used with a remote zone temperature sensor BAYS E N S077 *. Wall Mounted Relative Humidity Sensor (BAYSENS036*) Field installed, wall mounted humidity sensor is used to control activation of Enhanced Dehumidification and the Hot Gas Reheat Dehumidification options. Humidity set points can be selected for relative humidity levels between 14 RT-SVX22V-EN 40% and 60% by adjusting the DEHUMID setting on the ReliaTel Options Module. See Figure 58, p. 38. Duct Mounted Relative Humidity Sensor (BAYSENS037*) Field installed, duct mounted humidity sensor is used to control activation of Enhanced Dehumidification and the hot gas reheat dehumidification options. Humidity set points can be selected for relative humidity levels between 40% and 60% by adjusting the DEHUMID setting on the ReliaTel Options Module. See Figure 58, p. 38. Programmable Zone Sensor - (BAYSENS119* This 7 day programmable sensorfeatures 2, 3 or 4 periods for Occupied or Unoccupied programming per day. If the power is interrupted, the program is retained in permanent memory. If power is off for an extended period of time, only the clock and day may have to be reset. The Zone Sensor allows selection of 2, 3 or 4 system modes (Heat, Cool, Auto, and Off), two fan modes (On and Auto). It has dual temperature selection with programmable start time capability. The occupied cooling set point ranges between 45 and 98 ° F. The heating set point ranges between 43 and 96°F. A liquid crystal display (LCD) displays zone temperature, temperature set points, day of the week, time, and operational mode symbols. The Option Menu is used to enable or disable applicable functions, i.e.; Morning Warm-up, Economizer minimum position override during unoccupied status, Fahrenheit or Centigrade, Supply air tempering, Remote zone temperature sensor, 12/24 hour time display, Smart fan, and Computed recovery. During an occupied period, an auxiliary relay rated for 1.25 amps @ 30 volts AC with one set of single pole double throw contacts is activated. Status Inputs (4 Wires Optional) The ZSM can be wired to receive four (4) operating status signals from the RTRM (HEAT, COOL, SYSTEM "ON", SERVICE). Four (4) wires from the RTRM should be connected to the appropriate terminals (7, 8, 9 & 10) on the ZSM. Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS073*) This electronic sensor features remote zone sensing and timed override with override cancellation. It is used with a Trane Integrated ComfortT" building management system. Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS074*) This electronic sensor features single setpoint capability and timed override with override cancellation. It is used with a Trane Integrated ComfortTm building management system. General Information Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS0161 This bullet type temperature sensor can be used for outside air (ambient) sensing, return air temperature sensing, supply air temperature sensing, remote temperature sensing (uncovered). Wiring proceduresvary according to the particular application and equipment involved. Refer to the unit's wiring diagrams for proper connections. Remote Zone Sensor (BAYSENS0771 This electronic sensor can be used with BAYSENS106*, 108*,110*,119* Remote Panels. When this sensor is wired to a BAYSENS119* Remote Panel,wiring must be 18AWG Shielded Twisted Pair (Belden 8760 or equivalent). Referto the specific Remote Panel for wiring details. Wireless Zone Sensor (BAYSENS050) This electronic sensor features five system settings (Auto, Off, Cool, Heat, and Emergency Heat) and with On and Auto fan settings. It is a manual or auto changeover control with dual setpoint capability. Other features include a timed override function, lockable system settings, and Fahrenheit or Celsius temperature display. Included with the wireless zone sensor will be a receiver that is to be mounted inside the unit, a mounting bracket, and a wire harness. Electromechanical Control The unit must have a thermostat to operate. • BAYSTAT151 • Single Stage - 1 Heat/1 Cool • BAYSTAT155 • Multi Stage - 3 Heat/2 Cool - Can be Used for Economizer Operation • BAYSENS150 • Multi stage - 3 Heat/2 Cool Programmable Thermostat High Temperature Sensor (BAYFRST001* This sensor connects to the RTRM Emergency Stop Input on the LTB and provides high limit "shutdown" of the unit. The sensor is used to detect high temperatures due to a high thermal event in the air conditioning or ventilation ducts. The sensor is designed to mount directly to the sheet metal duct. Each kit containstwo sensors. The return air duct sensor (X1310004001) is set to open at 135°F. The supply air duct sensor (X1310004002) is set to open at 240°F. The control can be reset after the temperature has been lowered approximately 25°F below the cutout setpoint. Evaporator Frost Control ReliaTell" Option This input incorporates the FrostatT" control (FOS) mounted in the indoor coil circuit and can be activated by RT-SVX22V-EN 15 General Information closing a field supplied contact installed in parallel with the FOS. If this circuit is closed before the compressor is started, the compressor will not be allowed to operate. Anytime this circuit is closed for 1 continuous second during compressor operation, the compressor for that circuit is immediately turned "Off". The compressor will not be allowed to restart for a minimum of 3 minutes should the FOS open. Frostat is standard on multi -speed indoor motors and single zone VAV products (SZVAV). Electromechanical Option This input incorporates the FrostatTl control (FOS) mounted inthe indoorcoil circuitoron suction line before equalizer port of TXV and can be activated by opening a field supplied contact installed in series with the FOS. If this circuit is open before the compressor is started, the compressor will not be allowed to operate. Anytime this circuit is opened during compressor operation, the compressor for that circuit is immediately turned "Off". The compressor will restart when the FOS closes. FrostatTl is standard on TSC036G-06OG electromechanical control products. Discharge Line Temp Switch (DLTS) The DLTS is looped in series with HPC and LPC. It prevents compressor from overheating (over 300°F dome temp) in case of indoor fan failure (cooling) or outdoor fan failure (heating). Smoke Detector Sensor (Optional) This sensor provides high limit "shutdown" of the unit and requires a manual reset. The sensor is used to detect smoke in the air conditioning or ventilation ducts. Notes: • The supply air smoke detector samples supply air. The return and plenum air smoke detectors sample return air. The smoke detectors are designed to shut off the unit if smoke is sensed. This function is performed by sampling the airflow entering the unit at the return air opening. Follow the instructions provided below to assure that the airflowthrough the unit is sufficient for adequate sampling. Failure to followthese instructions will prevent the smoke detectors from performing its design function. • Airflow through the unit is affected by the amount of dirt and debris accumulated on the indoor coil and filters. To insure that airflow through the unit is adequate for proper sampling by the return air smoke detector, complete adherence to the maintenance procedures, including recommended intervals between filter changes, and coil cleaning is required. • Periodic checks and maintenance procedures must be performed on the smoke detector to insure that it will function properly. For detailed instructions concerning these checks and procedures, refer to the appropriate section(s) of the smoke detector Installation and Maintenance Instructions provided with the literature package for this unit. In order for the supply air smoke detector or return air smoke detector to properly sense smoke in the supply air stream or return air stream, the air velocity entering the smoke detector unit must be between 500 and 4000 feet per minute. Equipment covered in this manual will develop an airflow velocity that falls within these limits over the entire airflow range specified in the evaporator fan performance tables. Phase Monitor This sensor monitors voltage between the 3 conductors of the 3 phase power supply. Two LED lights are provided: • The green light indicates that a balanced 3 phase supply circuit is properly connected. • The red light indicates that unit operation has been prevented. There are two conditions that will prevent unit operation: • The power supply circuit is not balanced with the proper phase sequence of L1, L2, L3 for the 3 conductors of a 3 phase circuit. • The line to line voltage is not between 180 volts and 633 volts. Single Zone Variable Air Volume / Displacement Ventilation (Optional) This sensor offers full supply fan modulation across the available airflow range. In addition to full supply fan modulation, the unit controls the discharge air temperature to a varying discharge air temperature setpoint in order to maintain Space Temperature. Human Interface - 5 Inch Color Touchscreen (Optional) The 5 inch Color Touchscreen Human Interface provides an intuitive user interface to the rooftop unit that speeds up unit commissioning, shortens unit troubleshooting times, and enhances preventative maintenance measures. The human interface includes several features including: • Data trending capabilities by means of time series graphs • Historical alarm messages • Real-time sensor measurements • On board system setpoints • USB port that enables the downloading of component runtime information as well as trended historical sensor data • Customized reports 16 RT-SVX22V-EN Installation Pre -Installation Fiberglass Wool! Exposition to glass wool fibers without all necessary PPE equipment could result in cancer, respiratory, skin or eye irritation, which could result in death or serious injury. Disturbing the insulation in this product during installation, maintenance or repair will expose you to airborne particles of glass wool fibers and ceramic fibers known to the state of California to cause cancer through inhalation. You MUST wear all necessary Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) including gloves, eye protection, a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator, long sleeves and pants when working with products containing fiberglass wool. Precautionary Measures • Avoid breathing fiberglass dust. • Use a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator. • Avoid contact with the skin or eyes. Wear long- sleeved, loose -fitting clothing, gloves, and eye protection. • Wash clothes separately from other clothing: rinse washer thoroughly. • Operations such as sawing, blowing, tear -out, and spraying may generate fiber concentrations requiring additional respiratory protection. Use the appropriate NIOSH approved respiration in these situations. First Aid Measures Eye Contact - Flush eyes with water to remove dust. If symptoms persist, seek medical attention. Skin Contact - Wash affected areas gently with soap and warm water after handling. Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Remove power to the unit and gain access to the electric heat elements by removing the horizontal supply cover. Visually inspect the heater elements for the following: 1. Elements that are no longer secured to the white ceramic insulator. 2. Elements touching each other or touching metal. 3. Severely kinked, drooping, or broken elements. If an element has detached from its ceramic insulator, carefully put it back into place. Replace the heater elements if they present symptoms noted in item Step 2 or Step 3 above. RT-SVX22V-EN 17 Dimensions and Weights Unit Clearances Figure 1, p. 18 illustrates the minimum operating and service clearances for either a single or multiple unit installation. These clearances are the minimum distances necessary to assure adequate serviceability, cataloged unit capacity, and peak operating efficiency. Providing less than the recommended clearances may result in condenser coil starvation, "short-circuiting" of exhaust and economizer airflows, or recirculation of hot condenser air. Figure 1. Typical installation clearances for single & multiple unit applications �6 0' 182! 2134 MM 1. For horizontal discharge unit, this measurement is reduced to 1'6" (457 MM) to minimize duct extensions. 2. When equipped with economizer or barometric relief damper, clearance distance is to be measured from protruding hood instead of base. 3. Clearance is the same if any unit is rotated 180°. 4. Addition clearance required when barometric damper or economizer is installed. TSC036-06OG & THC036-THCO37E Units TSC072-120H, THC047-072E, THC048-12OF Units 18 RT-SVX22V-EN Dimensions and Weights Figure 2. Corner weights . Center of Gravitv Heavy Objects! Failure to follow instructions below or properly lift unit could result in unit dropping and possibly crushing CE operator/technician which could result in death or < serious injury, and equipment or property -only damage. Ensure that all the lifting equipment used is properly rated for the weight of the unit being lifted. Each of the cables (chains or slings), hooks, and shackles used to lift the unit must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the unit. Lifting cables (chains or slings) may not be of the same length. Adjust as necessary for even unit lift. Improper Unit Lift! Failure to properly lift unit could result in unit dropping and possibly crushing operator/technician which could result in death or serious injury, and equipment or property -only damage. Test lift unit approximately 24 inches to verify proper center of gravity lift point. To avoid dropping of unit, reposition lifting point if unit is not level. Table 3. Maximum unit & corner weights (lbs) and center of gravity dimensions (in.) - cooling models 0 C Tons Unit Model No. Maximum Model Weights(a) Corner Weights(b) Center of Gravity (in.) Shipping Net A B C D Length Width 3 TSC036G 537 431 201 155 25 50 29 8 4 TSC048G 557 452 213 159 27 53 29 8 5 TSC060G 603 498 218 140 50 90 27 12 6 TSC072H 762 667 218 186 131 132 44 21 7.5 TSC090H 772 679 186 217 106 170 34 21 7.5 TSC092H 940 797 249 235 163 149 46 21 8.5 TSC102H 938 837 273 222 183 159 47 22 10 TSC120H 1058 960 320 218 233 189 40 24 3 THC036E 555 481 157 122 95 107 31 19 4 THC048E 787 692 220 178 132 163 40 23 4 THC048F 737 642 208 177 128 130 44 22 5 THC060E 841 746 241 193 139 173 39 22 5 THC060F 774 679 219 189 135 137 43 21 6 THC072E 943 845 274 172 186 213 41 24 6 THC072F 883 740 228 219 155 138 47 21 6 THC074F 1016 918 309 207 223 178 40 24 7.5 THC092F 1026 928 315 209 224 180 40 24 8.5 THC102F 1035 937 316 212 227 181 49 24 10 THC120F 1326 1132 326 326 258 222 53 27 (a) Weights are approximate. (b) Corner weights are given for information only. RT-SVX22V-EN 19 Dimensions and Weights Figure 3. Rigging and center of gravity ATTA( CABLE Table 4. Factory installed options (fiops)/accessory net weights (lbs)(a),(b) Accessory TSC036G-06OG THC036E,THCO37E Net Weight THC047E-067E THC048E-060E THC048F-06OF Net Weight TSC072H-102H THC072E/F Net Weight TSC120H THC074F-102F Net Weight THC120F Net Weight 3 to 5 Tons 4 to 5 Tons 6 to 8.5 Tons 6, 7.5, 8.5, 10 10 Barometric Relief 7 10 10 10 10 Belt Drive Option (3 phase only) 31 31 — — — Coil Guards 12 20 20 20 30 Economizer 26 36 36 36 36 Electric Heaters(c) 15 30 31 44 50 Hinged Doors 10 12 12 12 12 Low Leak Economizer 68 93 93 93 93 Manual Outside Air Damper 16 26 26 26 26 Motorized Outside Air Damper 20 30 30 30 30 Novar Control 8 8 8 8 8 Oversized Motor 5 8 8 — — Powered Convenience Outlet 38 38 38 38 50 Powered Exhaust 40 40 80 80 80 Reheat Coil 12(d) 14 15 20(e) 30 Roof Curb 61 78 78 78 89 Smoke Detector, Supply 5 5 5 5 5 Smoke Detector, Return 7 7 7 7 7 Through -the -Base Electrical 8 13 13 13 13 Through -the -Base Gas 5 5 5 5 5 Unit Mounted Circuit Breaker 5 5 5 5 5 Unit Mounted Disconnect 5 5 5 5 5 460W575V(f) 29 29 — — — (a) Weights for options not listed are <5 lbs. (b) Net weight should be added to unit weight when ordering factory -installed accessories. (c) Applicable to cooling units only. (d) Reheat weight here is only applicable to THC036E models. (e) Reheat weight for this value only applicable to 7.5 and 8.5 Ton High Efficiency "I"' models. (f) Apply weight with all 460V and 575V 17 Plus Two -Stage Cooling units. 20 RT-SVX22V-EN Dimensions and Weights Figure 4. Cooling and gas/electric — 3 to 5 tons Figure 7. Cooling and gas/electric —3 to 5 tons standard efficiency(a),(b) standard efficiency, 3 tons high efficiency — TOP PANEL horizontal airflow supply/return(a) —PORkTOR access PANEL rvOexsER rAry 3 3/16" 61 MM 0 2/8" 038 41/4" M 108 MM ® 3753MM 59123 1ALTERNATE MM CONDENSATE DRAIN 3/4 - 14 NPT DIA. HOLE CONDENSER MIL RETURN NIT CONTROL WIRE 3 8/is" ® za i/4 z/au (zz MM) DLA. HOLE M S,RvICE IS POT ACESS 13/8"(35 MM7RowC4 3/4" nOLE SUPPLY 12 MM 3 i492Mn 42 MM s 41M�^ 0 DE 9/M� 2-(51 MM)To1OAL. o O 13 1/4 337 MM 143 MM ° -Mn 171/4" 87/8" Gas CONNsrnON-1/z NPT(80, 100 Men) 2a4 men a3Mn, 438 MM 225 MM 3/4 NPT (120, 130, 150 MEh) 3/4-14 NPT CD MPREssoR DRAIN CONNECTION A<Ce55 vnxElcO CONDENSER COIL (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. (b) 1/2 NPT or 3/4 NPT gas connection = (Y_C models only); 2" electrical connection: single point power when heat installed (T_C models only) Figure 8. Cooling and gas/electric —3 to 5 tons Figure 5. Cooling and gas/electric - 3 tons high standard efficiency, 3 tons high efficiency— efficiency(a)•(b) unit clearance and roof opening(a) CLEARANCE evA access T"N Tar PANELoxoexsER Enx CLEARANCE 36" (914 M� HORIZONTAL FLOW - MM) MM) OR S"DOWNFLOW 36" (914 MM) ANEL // `\\TYPICAL ROOF OPENING CLEARANCE FROM 3s 1/4' TOP OF UNIT 72" 41M4- toe 68 3/16" 40" 37It " \ MM 940 MM A1re8NaTe ® 1732 1016 3/a '�� ° "Pr o?Ao e ® J / cox0srvssR cmL \ / 4 1/Z" ft 3 81s- 0 • ® a /a'/erttz�mml ou�HOLe -/ 1130 MM g,/a, z59 4z 3/4" 41M4 i 3/a pis nDini oin.Rnoie�SE CLEARANCE 48" (1219 MM) CLEARANCE 36" (914 MM) v49 Ps9iM i"ieizs MMi oa. How (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. 1/2 NPT 045 cONN—.N— / n RCOMPRESSOR r (a)All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. (b) 1/2 NPT gas connection = (Y_C models only); 2" electrical connection: single point power when heat installed (T_C models only) Figure 6. Cooling and gas/electric —3 to 5 tons standard efficiency, 3 tons high efficiency downflow airflow supply/return— through - the -base utilities(a) (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 9. Cooling and gas/electric —3 to 5 tons standard efficiency, 3 tons high efficiency — roof curb(a) c pq q N 36 lg1a rNMI 1 3/4" Fq bc�N GE �44 MM NCF a PQ,P 37 7/16" 951 MM 25 3/16 14 9/16" r4Sz4MM 640 MM 370 MM 1M 318 61 13/16" MJ 'O • 1101 213jM 16 46 MM 1 53/16 14" 656 MM FORH o/y 35 MM 425 NM O�'rZ00(y 1 3/4" p �44 MM S cYF F `YNC. 6513/16" 7/8" Fy 1670 MM 1038 MM 417/16 (I�zgM 512MM 1053 MM a Ml 1 M MJ 512MM G�P�NG�36n (,9 (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. RT-SVX22V-EN 21 Dimensions and Weights Figure 10. Cooling and gas/electric —3 to 5 standard Figure 12. Cooling and gas/electric —3 to 5 tons efficiency, 3 tons high efficiency — downflow standard efficiency, 3 tons high efficiency — duct connections, field fabricated(a) economizer & barometric relief damper hood(a) P C24 3/8" (619MM)i4— 6 3/16" 14- / 171/16" (433 MM) IGES 1 1/4" (32 MM) (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 11. Cooling and gas/electric —3 to 5 tons standard efficiency, 3 tons high efficiency — economizer, manual or motorized fresh air damper, power exhaust(a) .re�e: � 16 uz iaiv nn (a)All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 13. Cooling and gas/electric —3 to 5 tons standard efficiency, 3 tons high efficiency — swing diameter for hinged door(s) option v � 17 acn M8m 16" 406 MM Applicable to 22 1/4" Y_C models only 565 MM Figure 14. Gas/electric - 3 to 10 tons standard and high efficiency— gas pipe height (Y models only)(a),(b) I I ! -1� 22 RT-SVX22V-EN (a)All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. (b) Height of gas pipe required from inside unit base togas shut off assem- bly (factory provided) Figure 15. Cooling and gas/electric —6, 7.5 (single) tons standard efficiency, 4 to 5 tons high efficiency(a) �\ (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 16. Cooling and gas/electric — 6 to 10 tons standard efficiency, 4 to 8.5 tons high efficiency— downf low airflow supply/return, through -the -base utilities(a) (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Dimensions and Weights Figure 17. Cooling and gas/electric — 6 to 10 ton standard efficiency units, 4 to 6 ton high efficiency units, 6(074)-8.5 (microchannel) high efficiency unit —horizontal airflow supply/ return(a) (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 18. Cooling and gas/electric —6 to 10 tons standard efficiency, 4 to 8.5 tons high efficiency— unit clearance and roof opening(a) CLEARANCE CLEARANCE 36" (914 MM) HORIZOM FLOW - 18" (45J MM) / DOWNFLOW-36"(914 MM) / \\ TYPICAL ROOF OPENING CLEARANCE FROM TOP OF UNIT 72" \ 46"\ 4V 2251 MM \ 885/8" 1168 MM��168 MM \\ 53 1/4" \�1352 MM CLEARANCE O8' (1219 MM) CLEARANCE 36" (914 MM) (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 19. Cooling and gas/electric —6 to 10 tons standard efficiency, 4 to 8.5 tons high efficiency— roof curb(a) q1A OXA) NGE 36 178 MM 6 J33/` i73/MM 6 • R�NRN 1a3mi4 Supp�V W y l 841/2" M'yJ \\may czF R9 c 81/4- R9N l746 (9 y6swM r4S�M M��c e is 1/r mm 1. miss/2M O O �q 1" 470 MM 1 ]o/8- I 5MM yM 25 M M \ 9 3/873 M (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Sao/8- AMMI G �P MM NGe36 �gl RT-SVX22V-EN 23 Dimensions and Weights Figure 20. Cooling and gas/electric —6 to 10 tons standard efficiency, 4 to 10 tons high efficiency— downflow duct connections, field fabricated(a)'(b),(c) 17 3/4" S1MM �' 17 3/4" 33 3/4" 51MM 7' 8�MM 33 /4" 1 857 MM I I 1 ALL FLANGES 1 1/4" (31 MM) 1 I 1 (a)All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. (b) Reference duct clearance to combustible materials in this chapter. (c) 1/2 or 3/4 NPT gas connection = (Y_C models only); 2" electrical con- nection: single point power when heat installed (T_C models only) Figure 21. Cooling and gas/electric —6 to 10 tons standard efficiency, 4 to 10 tons high efficiency— economizer, manual or motorized fresh air damper(a) (a)All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 22. Cooling and gas/electric —6 to 10 tons standard efficiency, 4 to 8.5 tons high efficiency— swing diameter for hinged door(s) option(a) 17' 432 MM 21 3/8" 143 Mn Applicable to Y_C models only 3a s%s^ --- .79 MM (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 23. Cooling and gas/electric —7.5 tons (dual compressor standard efficiency) to 10 tons standard efficiency, 6 to 8.5 tons high efficiency(a) (a)All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 24. Cooling and gas/electric —7.5 tons (dual compressor standard efficiency) to 10 tons standard efficiency, 6 to 8.5 tons high efficiency— power exhaust(a) 24 RT-SVX22V-EN (a)All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 25. Cooling and gas/electric —10 tons high efficiency(a) (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 26. Cooling and gas/electric —10 tons high efficiency— downflow airflow supply/return, through -the -base utilities(a) (a)All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Dimensions and Weights Figure 27. Cooling and gas/electric —10 tons high efficiency— horizontal airflow, supply and return(a) (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 28. Cooling and gas/electric —10 tons high efficiency— unit clearance and roof opening(a) CLEARANCE CLEARANCE 36" (914 MM) HORIZONTAL FLOW - 18" (457 MM) / ^ �DOWNFLOW 36"(914 MM) \TYPICAL ROOF OPENING CLEARANCE FROM TOP OF UN R 72" 99 11/16" , M 46°\ 2532 MM 1168 MM 1168 MM / i' 63 3/16"> 1605 MM CLEARANCE 4� 9 MM) CLEA�E 36" 1914 MM) (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 29. Cooling and gas/electric —10 tons high efficiency— roof curb(a) (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. RT-SVX22V-EN 25 Dimensions and Weights Figure 30. Cooling and gas/electric —10 tons high efficiency— power exhaust(a) ONOMIZER HOOD (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 31. Cooling and gas/electric —10 tons high efficiency— swing diameter for hinged door(s) option(a) (a)All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. 26 RT-SVX22V-EN Installation Foundation Heavy Objects! Failure to follow instructions below or properly lift unit could result in unit dropping and possibly crushing operator/technician which could result in death or serious injury, and equipment or property -only damage. Ensure that all the lifting equipment used is properly rated for the weight of the unit being lifted. Each of the cables (chains or slings), hooks, and shackles used to lift the unit must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the unit. Lifting cables (chains or slings) may not be of the same length. Adjust as necessary for even unit lift. Horizontal Units If the unit is installed at ground level, elevate it above the snow line. Provide concrete footings at each support location with a "full perimeter" support structure or a slab foundation forsupport. Refer to the weights information in the Dimensions and Weights chapter for the unit's operating and point loading weights when constructing a footing foundation. If anchoring is required, anchor the unit to the slab using hold down bolts or isolators. Isolators should be installed to minimize the transmission of vibrations into the building. Risk of Roof Collapsing! Failure to ensure proper structural roof support could cause the roof to collapse, which could result in death or serious injury and property damage. Confirm with a structural engineer that the roof structure is strong enough to support the combined weight of the roofcurb and the unit. Refer to the weights section for typical unit and curb weights. For rooftop applications, ensure the roof is strong enough to support the combined unit and support structural weight.Referto maximum unit and cornerweights (center of gravity) dimensions in the Dimensions and Weights section for the unit operating weights. If anchoring is required, anchorthe unitto the roof with hold-down bolts or isolators. Check with a roofing contractor for proper waterproofing procedures. Ductwork Supply and return air openings as viewed from the rear of the unit are shown in the following drawings. Figure 32. Cooling and gas/electric — 3 to 5 tons standard efficiency, 3 tons high efficiency — horizontal airflow supply/return(a) 3 3/18" B1 MM 14 3/4" 23 1/4" 3]5 MM 591 MM RETURN 4 3/4" SUPPLY 12 MM 13 1/4 337 MM 17 1/4" 8 7/8 438 MM 225 MM 3/4-14 NPT DRAIN CONNECTION CONDENSER COIL (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 33. Cooling and gas/electric — 6-10 ton standard efficiency units, 4 to 6 ton high efficiency units, 6(074)-8'/2 (Microchannel) high efficiency unit —horizontal airflow supply/returri (a) All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. Figure 34. Cooling and gas/electric —10 tons high efficiency— horizontal airflow, supply and returri (a)All dimensions are in inches/millimeters. RT-SVX22V-EN 27 Installation Supply and return air openings as viewed from a downflow configuration are shown in the following drawings. Elbows with turning vanes or splitters are recommended to minimize air noise due to turbulence and to reduce static pressure. When attaching the ductwork to the unit, provide a water tight flexible connector at the unit to prevent operating sounds from transmitting through the ductwork. All outdoor ductwork between the unit and the structure should be weather proofed after installation is completed. Figure 35. 3 to 5 ton standard efficiency units & 3 ton high efficiency units - downflow supply & return air openings w/ through -the -base utilities Figure 36. 4 to 6 ton high efficiency units, 6(074)-8.5 (Microchannel) high efficiency units and 6 to 10 ton standard efficiency units - down flow supply & return air openings w/ through -the - base utilities Figure 37. 10 ton high efficiency unit - downflow supply & return air openings w/ through -the -base utilities Table 5. Clearance required from duct to combustible surfaces Model Number Clearance required from duct to combustible surfaces (inches) TSCO(36-60)G 0 THC036E,F 0 THC037-67E 0 TSC072H 0 THC072E/F 1 TSC090H 1 TSC092H 0 THC074F 1 THC092F 1 TSC102H 0 THC102F 1 TSC120H 1 THC120F 1 Roof Curb The roof curbsforthese units consists of a "full perimeter" enclosure to support the unit just inside of the unit base rail. The 10 ton high efficiency units contains a support base alignment rail and will extend pastthe end of the roof curb as shown in figures below and to the right. Before installing any roof curb, verify; • It is the correct curb for the unit, • The includes the necessary gaskets and hardware, • The purposed installation location provides the required clearance for proper operation, • Insurethatthe curb is level and square. Thetop surface of the curb must be true to assure an adequate curb -to - unit seal. 28 RT-SVX22V-EN Combustible Materials! Failure to maintain proper clearance between the unit heat exchanger, vent surfaces and combustible materials could cause a fire which could result in death or serious injury or property damage. Refer to unit nameplate and installation instructions for proper clearances. Verify that appropriate materials were used in the construction of roof and ductwork. Combustible materials should not be used in the construction of ductwork or roof curb that is in close proximity to heater elements or any hot surface. Any combustible material on the inside of the unit base should be removed and replaced with appropriate material. Step-by-step curb assembly and installation instructions ship with each accessory roof curb kit. Follow the instructions carefully to assure proper fit -up when the unit is set into place. Note: To assure proper condensate flow during operation, the unit (and curb) must be level. If the unit is elevated, a field constructed catwalk around the unit is strongly recommended to provide easy access for unit maintenance and service. Recommendations for installing the Supply Air and Return Air ductworkjoining the roof curb are included in the curb instruction booklet. Curb ductwork must be fabricated and installed by the installing contractor before the unit is set into place. Note: For sound consideration, cut only the holes in the roof deck for the ductwork penetrations. Do not cut out the entire roof deck within the curb perimeter. Figure 38. View for base to roof curb alignment THC120F on 50" x 84" roof curb Base Aligr Installation Figure 39. View for base to roof curb alignment THC120F on 60" x 84" roof curb If a Curb Accessory Kit is not used: • The ductwork can be attached directly to the factory - provided flanges around the unit's supply and return air openings. Be sure to use flexible duct connections at the unit. • For "built-up" curbs supplied by others, gaskets must be installed around the curb perimeter flange and the supply and return air opening flanges. Rigging Heavy Objects! Failure to follow instructions below or properly lift unit could result in unit dropping and possibly crushing operator/technician which could result in death or serious injury, and equipment or property -only damage. Ensure that all the lifting equipment used is properly rated for the weight of the unit being lifted. Each of the cables (chains or slings), hooks, and shackles used to lift the unit must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the unit. Lifting cables (chains or slings) may not be of the same length. Adjust as necessary for even unit lift. A rigging illustration and center -of -gravity dimensional data table is shown in the weights section. Refer to the typical unit operating weights table before proceeding. 1. Remove all drill screws fastening wood protection to metal base rail. Remove all screws securing wooden protection to wooden top crate. On 6-10 ton high efficiency units, remove wire ties from outdoor grill. 2. Remove Wooden Top Crate. RT-SVX22V-EN 29 Installation Improper Unit Lift! Failure to properly lift unit could result in unit dropping and possibly crushing operator/technician which could result in death or serious injury, and equipment or property -only damage. Test lift unit approximately 24 inches to verify proper center of gravity lift point. To avoid dropping of unit, reposition lifting point if unit is not level. 3. Rig the unit as shown in the weights section. Attach adequate strength lifting slings to all four lifting brackets in the unit base rail. Do not use cables, chains, or slings except as shown. 4. Install a lifting bar, as shown in the weights section, to protect the unit and to facilitate a uniform lift. The minimum distance between the lifting hook and the top of the unit should be 7 feet. 5. Test -lift the unit to ensure it is properly rigged and balanced, make any necessary rigging adjustments. Figure 40. Fork pockets (all units except 10 ton high efficiency units) REM❑\ F❑RK BRACk KLMUVL K MLIAL KUNNLKJ AND 3 WOODEN BOARDS Figure 41. Fork pockets - 10 ton high efficiency units NOTICE REMOVE THIS ROOFCURB ALIGNMENT BRACKET PRIOR TO SETTING UNIT ONTO 60X&4 INCH ROOFCURB ONLY REMOVE I METAL RUNNER REMOVE 2 WOODEN BOARDS REMOVE 10 FORK LIFT BRACKETS 6. Lift the unit enough to allow the removal of base fork pocket protection components as shown in the following figures. 7. When 10 ton high efficiency units are installed on smaller existing roof curb (50"x 84") for replacement applications, do not remove alignment bracket. This bracket helps assure proper alignment of duct openings. 8. Downflow units; align the base rail of the unitwith the curb rail while lowering the unit onto the curb. Make sure that the gasket on the curb is not damaged while positioning the unit. General Unit Requirements The checklist listed below is a summary of the steps required to successfully install a commercial unit. This checklist is intended to acquaint the installing personnel with what is required in the installation process. It does not replace the detailed instructions called out in the applicable sections of this manual. • Check the unit for shipping damage and material shortage; file a freight claim and notify appropriate sales representative. • Verify correct model, options and voltage from unit nameplate. • Verify that the installation location of the unit will provide the required clearance for proper operation. • Assemble and install the roof curb (if applicable). Refer to the latest edition of the curb installers guide that ships with each curb kit. • Fabricate and install ductwork; secure ductwork to curb. • Install pitch pocket for power supply through building roof. (If applicable) • Rigging the unit. • Set the unit onto the curb; check for levelness. • Ensure unit -to -curb seal is tight and without buckles or cracks. • Install and connect a condensate drain line to the evaporator drain connection. Factory Installed Economizer • Ensure the economizer has been pulled out into the operating position. Refer to the economizer installers guide for proper position and setup. • Install all access panels. Temperature Limit Switch Usage for Electric Heat Units Units are factory shipped in the downflow discharge configuration but can be field converted to a horizontal discharge configuration. Some, but not all units require a different TCO-A limit switch, which is wire tied near the 30 RT-SVX22V-EN terminal block in the heater compartment if horizontal discharge configuration is used. Horizontal Discharge Conversion (3 to 5 Ton Units) Note: 3 to 5 ton units supply cover to supply opening and return cover to return opening. Supplies Needed by Installer for Conversion: 3 oz. tube of High Temperature RTV sealant. (500°F / 260°C: Similar to Dow Corning 736) Note: Failure to use recommended sealant could result in unit performance loss. If a unit is to be converted to a Horizontal discharge, the following conversion must be performed: 1. Remove RETURN and SUPPLY duct covers. 2. Locate supply cover. Apply'/4 in. (6mm.) continuous bead of 500°F RTV sealant to the flange as shown. Figure 42. Supply duct cover 3. Position duct cover as shown, rotate 90 degrees to allow entrance into supply opening. 4. Slide duct covers into duct openings until inward edge of duct cover engages with the 2 retaining clips on the duct flanges. Secure the outward edge of each duct cover with 2 screws. 5. Slide RETURN DUCT COVER (insulation side up) into supply opening until inward edge of duct cover engages with the 2 retaining clips on the duct flange. Secure outward edge of the duct cover with two screws. Note: Certain unit/electric heater combinations require a limit switch change out for horizontal airflow applications. Refer to the following instructions to determine if this process is required for the unit undergoing installation. Horizontal Discharge Conversion (6 to 10 Ton Units) Note: 6 to 10 ton units the supply cover to return opening & return cover to supply opening. Supplies Needed by Installer for Conversion: 3 oz. tube of high Temperature RTV sealant. (500°F / 260°C: Similar to Dow Corning 736) Note: Failure to use recommended sealant could result in unit performance loss. Installation If a unit is to be converted to a Horizontal discharge, the following conversion must be performed: 1. Remove RETURN and SUPPLY duct covers. 2. Place SUPPLY DUCT COVER over down -flow return opening. (insulation side down) 3. Using self -drilling screws, (or screws removed from duct cover), screw through dimples to attach DUCT COVER to base. Figure 43. Supply duct cover Supply Duct Cover y it Screw into 4 dimples on top edge 4. On original RETURN DUCT COVER, apply 1/4"(6mm.) continuous bead of 500°F RTV sealant around flange (opposite insulation side), as shown. Figure 44. Return duct cover 5. Slide RETURN DUCT COVER (insulation side up) into supply opening until inward edge of duct cover engages with the 2 retaining clips on the duct flange. Secure outward edge of the duct cover with two screws. Note: If unit is equipped with Return Air Smoke Detector, refer to field conversion instructions for horizontal discharge before installing return air duct. Note: If unit is equipped with Discharge Air Sensing option refer to the following figure for proper tube positioning based on unit tonnage. RT-SVX22V-EN 31 Installation Figure 45. Discharge air sensor Cap assembly with insulation Downflow application Secure with screw Cap assembly with insulation Horizontal application Remove and discard this tube for horizontal conversion Note: Certain unit/electric heater combinations require a limit switch change out for horizontal airflow applications. Refer to the following instructions to determine if this process is required for the unit undergoing installation. Figure 46. Supply & return openings 11111111 MIN - � 1, WOME duct cover Insulation side — Return duct Insulation side up cover 6. After completing installation of the duct covers for horizontal discharge, proceed to TCO-A instructions. TCO-A Instructions If the unit being installed is listed inthefollowing table and is equipped with the corresponding model number of factory installed electric heater package in the table, the limit control TCO-A must be replaced with the extra limit control shipped in the heater compartment. Replace TCO- A following the instructions in steps 1 through 3 below. If the unit being installed does not have a factory installed electric heater package or is equipped with a factory installed electric heater model that does not correspond to any in this table, skip steps 1 through 3 and go on to next step in the installation process. Table 6. TCO-A replaced for horizontal duct configuration Unit Model Electric Heater Number Model Number TCO-A location TSC120114, THC074 BAYHTRA454 Right TSC1201-14, THC092- BAYHTRA418, 427, Right 102F 436,454 TSC120HW BAYHTR 36A, Right 54A8A, THC0721`4 BAYHTRU427, 436 Center TSC0901-14 BAYHTRW427, 436 Center TSC090HW BAYHTRWW27, W36 Center 1. Remove the heater section access panel and open the electric heater dead front panel. 2. TCO-A is the limit control located in the central part of the heater mounting plate and that is located on the bottom of the two heater element assemblies. See Figure 47, p. 32.To replace this device, first removethe two wires connected to the terminals. Next, remove the two screws which secure it to the heater element mounting plate. Once TCO-A has been removed form the heater element mounting plate, discard this device. 3. Obtain the replacement TCO-A which is secured by a wire tie near the electric heater terminal block in the heater compartment. Attach it to the heater element mounting plate with the two screws that were removed in step 2 above. Connect the two wires that were un-hooked in step 2 to the terminals on the new TCO-A. Refer to the heater package wiring diagram to assure that the wiring is connected properly. 4. Close the electric heater dead front panel and replace heat section access panel. Figure 47. TCO-A location o o 00 0'U�Z ol moon o o o m o O 000 O O o o 0 0 00 O O O o 0 0 00 o O CMG o o 32 RT-SVX22V-EN Return Air Smoke Detector The factory installed Return Air Smoke Detector is installed in the downflow discharge position. No additional field setup is required. If a unit is to be converted to horizontal discharge, the following conversion must be performed: 1. If the unit has an economizer, it must be pulled out in the operating position. 2. Remove the 3 screws from the mounting brackets. Note: Refer to downflow view for screw locations. Figure 48. Downflow view Downflow View 3. Lift the tube and bracket from the downflow duct opening. Rotate the tube and bracket assembly 180 degrees ensuring that the holes on the copper sensing tube face away from the unit and face the return air ductwork. Note: Refer to horizontal views below. Figure 49. Horizontal view 1 Slot Horizontal View Installation Figure 50. Horizontal view 2 Horizontal Vlew2 Note: Check to insure that the flexible tubing lies flat on the base pan surface. 4. Slide the top bracket down the copper sensing tube. For TSC036G-060G, and THC036-037E units insert the tab on the left side into the slot on the indoor coil block off and secure the right side of the bracket with one of the 3 screws removed in step 2. Refer to Figure 49, p. 33. For THC047E-072E, THC048F-120F, and TSC0721-1-120H units secure the tab on left side to the indoor coil block off with one of the screws removed in step 2 and secure the right side of the bracket with one of the screws removed from the access panel. Refer to Figure 50, p. 33. 5. Using the remaining 2 screws removed in step 2, secure the bottom bracket. Refer to Figure 49, p. 33. Note: Larger diameter holes on bottom bracket line up with the dimples on the rear panel. The smaller diameter holes line up with the screw holes in the rear panel. Air-FiT"' Wireless Communication Interface The factory installed wireless communications interface is installed in the downflow discharge position. If a unit is to be converted to horizontal discharge, the following conversion must be performed: 1. If the unit has an economizer, it must be pulled out in the operating position. 2. Remove the screw from the mounting bracket. Refer to downflow view for screw and bracket location. RT-SVX22V-EN 33 Installation Figure 51. Wireless communication interface - downflow 3. Mount the bracket in the horizontal discharge location. Refer to horizontal view for screw and bracket location. Figure 52. Wireless communication interface - horizontal Note: Cable ties must be removed to allow the cable to extend to the horizontal mounting location. Main Electrical Power Requirements Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors! Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors have discharged. For additional information regarding the safe discharge of capacitors, see PROD-SVB06A-EN Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUSTfollow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state electrical codes. • Verify that the power supply complies with the unit nameplate specifications. • Inspect all control panel components; tighten any loose connections. • Connect properly sized and protected power supply wiring to a field-supplied/installed disconnect switch and to the main powerterminal block (HTB1) in the unit control panel. • Install proper grounding wires to an earth ground. Electric Heat Requirements • Verifythatthe power supply complieswith the electric heater specifications on the unit and heater nameplate. • Inspect the heater junction box and control panel; tighten any loose connections. • Check electric heat circuits for continuity. Low Voltage Wiring (AC & DC) Requirements • Install the zone thermostat, with or without switching subbase. • Connect properly sized control wiring to the proper termination points between the zone thermostat and the unit control panel. Condensate Drain Configuration Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. An evaporator condensate drain connection is provided on each unit. Refer to the ductwork section in the Installation chapter for the appropriate drain location. The condensate drain pan is factory installed to drain condensate to the back side of the unit. Refer to the ductwork section in the Installation chapter for the 34 RT-SVX22V-EN drawings. It can be converted to drain condensate out the front side of the unit or through the base. To convert drain condensate out the front of unit: 1. Remove evaporator access panel and supplyairaccess panels. 2. Remove the support panel that the condensate drain pan exits through. 3. Slide the condensate drain pan out of the unit and rotate 1800. 4. Slide the condensate drain pan back into the unit, align the drain with the grommeted opening in the rear support panel and push until the coupling is seated in the grommet. 5. Replace the front support panel by aligning the panel with tabs in the raceway. Align the condensate drain pan support in the grommeted hole as the panel is put in place. 6. Replace evaporator access panel and supply air access panels. To convert drain condensate through the base of unit: 1. Remove evaporator access panel and supply air access panels. 2. Remove the support panel that the condensate drain pan exits through. 3. Slide the condensate drain pan out of the unit. 4. Place on a level surface in the position it was removed from the unit. 5. Remove the plug knockout in the bottom of the drainpan to convert it to through the base drainage. 6. Plug the original condensate drain opening with a field supplied 3/4" NPT plug. 7. Slide the condensate drain pan back into the unit, align the drain support with the grommeted opening in the rear support panel and push until the support is seated in the grommet. 8. Replace the front support panel by aligning the panel with tabs in the raceway. Align the plugged condensate drain pan coupling in the grommeted hole as the panel is put in place. 9. Replace evaporator access panel and supplyairaccess panels. A condensate trap must be installed at the unit due to the drain connection being on the "negative pressure" side of the fan. Install the P-Trap using the guidelines in Figure 53, p. 35. A condensate drain line must be connected to the P-Trap. Pitch the drain lines at least 1/2 inch for every 10 feet of horizontal run to assure proper condensate flow. Do not allow the horizontal run to sag causing a possible double - Installation trap condition which could result in condensate backup due to "air lock". Figure 53. Condensate trap installation PnNE� ENC�-SURE �� 75 IN2I NMT i FEMPL- CONNECTOR i 38.1I MM CI I aNl I I I Filter Installation The quantity of filters is determined by unit size. Access to the filters is obtained by removing the filter access panel. Refer to the unit Service Facts (shipped with each unit) for filter requirements. Note: Do not operate the unit without filters. Field Installed Power Wiring Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state electrical codes. An overall dimensional layoutforthe field installed wiring entrance into the unit is illustrated in the Dimensions and Weights chapter. To insure that the unit's supply power wiring is properly sized and installed, followthe following guidelines. Verify that the power supply available is compatible with the unit's nameplate ratings. The available supply power must be within 10% of the rated voltage stamped on the nameplate. Use only copper conductors to connect the power supply to the unit. ■ • Use Copper Conductors Only! Failure to use copper conductors could result in equipment damage as unit terminals are not designed to accept other types of conductors. RT-SVX22V-EN 35 Installation Important: If the unit is not equipped with an optional factory installed non -fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker, a field supplied disconnect switch must be installed at or near the unit in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC latest edition). Main Unit Power Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state electrical codes. Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Standard Wiring 1. Location of the applicable electrical service entrance is illustrated in the Dimensions and Weights chapter. Complete the unit's power wiring connections at Compressor Contactor# 1 (CC1) inside the unit control panel. Refer to the customer connection diagram that is shipped with the unit for specific termination points 2. Provide proper grounding for the unit in accordance with local and national codes. Optional TBUE Wiring (Through -the -Base Electrical Option) Location of the applicable electrical service is illustrated below. Refer to the customer connection diagram that is shipped with the unit for specific termination points. The termination points, depending on the customer option selected would be a factory mounted non -fused disconnect switch (UDC) or circuit breaker (UCB). If neither a factory mounted non -fused disconnect switch (UDC) or circuit breaker (UCB) was factory mounted, field wiring connections should be terminated in the control box at Compressor Contactor # 1 (CC1). Provide proper grounding for the unit in accordance with local and national codes. Note: Black Gasket is shipped from the factory and is located in the literature Ship With bag in the control box. Apply Black Gasket around conduit plate on all 4 sides after installation to prevent air leakage from the building entering the electrical enclosures. Note: Seal between wiring and conduitwith Black Gasket or weather proof sealer to prevent air leakage from the building entering the electrical enclosures. Also seal around conduit and wiring at all roof and curb penetrations. Figure 54. All units except 10 ton high efficiency with hot gas reheat dehumidification. SEAL BETWEEN WIRING AND CONDUIT WITH WLATHLR PROOF SEALER TO PREVENT AIR LEAKAGE FIELD POWERED CONTROL WIRING CONVENIENCE OUTLET CONDUIT CONDUIT I POWER WIRING CONDUIT BLACK GASKET Figure 55. 10 ton high efficiency SEAL BETWEEN WIRING AND CONDUITWITH WEATHER PROOF SEALER TO PREVENT AIR LEAKAGE FIELD POWERED CONTROLWIRING . _. CONVENIENCE OUTLET CONDUIT - - CONDUIT CONTROLWIRING BLACKGASKET-,,O* CONDUIT 36 RT-SVX22V-EN Field Installed Control Wiring Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state electrical codes. An overall layout of the various control options available with the required number of conductors for each control device is illustrated in Figure 68, p. 44. Note: All field wiring must conform to NEC guidelines as well as state and local codes. Control Power Transformer The 24volt control power transformers are to be used only with the accessories called out in this manual. Transformers rated greater than 50 VA are equipped with internal circuit breakers. If circuit breaker trips, turn "Off" all power to the unit before attempting to reset it. Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. The transformer is located in the control panel. The circuit breaker is located on the left side of the transformer and can be reset by pressing in on the black reset button. Controls using 24 VAC Before installing any connecting wiring, refer to the Dimensions and Weights chapter for the electrical access locations provided on the unit and Table 7, p. 37 or Table 8, p. 37 for AC conductor sizing guidelines, and; 1. Use copper conductors unless otherwise specified. Installation 2. E nsu re that the AC control wiring between the controls and the unit's termination point does not exceed three (3) ohms/conductor for the length of the run. • Controls Using 24 VAC! Resistance in excess of 3 ohms per conductor could cause component failure due to insufficient AC voltage supply. Note: Be sure to check all loads and conductors for grounds, shorts, and mis-wiring. 3. Do not run the AC low voltage wiring in the same conduit with the high voltage power wiring. 4. Route low voltage wiring per illustrations on page Figure 61, p. 40. Table 7. Electromechanical thermostat 24V AC conductors with ReliaTelT"° units Distance from Unit to Control Recommended Wire Size 000 - 460 feet 18 gauge 000 - 140 m .75 mm2 461 - 732 feet 16 gauge 141-223m 1.3mm2 733 - 1000 feet 14 gauge 2.0 mm2 224 - 305 m Table 8. Electromechanical thermostat 24V AC conductors with Electromechanical unit Distance from Unit to Control 0 - 30 feet Recommended Wire Size 22 gauge 0-9.1m .33m2 31 - 50 feet 20 gauge 9.5-15.2m .50m2 51 - 75 feet 18 gauge 15.5-22.9m .75m2 76 - 125 feet 16 gauge 23.1-38.1m 1.3m2 126 - 200 feet 14 gauge 38.4-60.9m 2.0m2 Controls using DC Analog Input/Outputs (Standard Low Voltage Multi conductor Wire) Before installing any connecting wiring between the unit and components utilizing a DC analog input\output signal, refer to the Dimensions and Weights chapter for the electrical access locations provided on the unit. • Table 9, p. 38 lists the conductor sizing guidelines that must be followed when interconnecting the DC binary output devices and the system components utilizing a DC analog input/output signal to the unit. RT-SVX22V-EN 37 Installation Note: Resistance in excess of 2.5 ohms per conductor can cause deviations in the accuracy of the controls. Note: Ensure that the wiring between controls and the unit's termination point does not exceed two and a half (2.5) ohms/conductor for the length of the run. • Do not run the electrical wires transporting DC signals in or around conduit housing high voltage wires. • Route low voltage wiring per illustrations on page 40. Note: If digit 9 in the unit model number equals "E" (electromechanical control), accessory relay BAY24XO42 is required if the thermostat does not energize the fan circuit in the heating mode. DC Conductors Table 9. Zone sensor module wiring Distance from Unit to Control Recommended Wire Size 0 - 150 feet 22 gauge .33 mm2 0 - 45.7 m 151 - 240 feet 20 gauge 46 - 73.1 m .50 mm2 241 -385 feet 18 gauge 73.5-117.3m .75mm2 386 - 610 feet 16 gauge 117.7 - 185.9 m 1.3 mm2 611 - 970 feet 14 gauge 186.2 - 295.7 m 2.0 mm2 Figure 56. ReliaTelT"^ conventional thermostat field wiring diagrams RTRM THERMOSTAT _IRC 1-7- HEAT HEAT 1 W1 J7-3 _OFF HEAT 2 IW2 J7-5 COOL -_ N i COOL - J7-4 AUTO FAN iG 'OFF o HEAT RH b " J7-9 JOL COOL - -- J7-2 °OF 000L2 Y1 J7-6 HEAT 12 Figure 57. Typical field wiring diagrams for electromechanical thermostat ELECTRO MECHANICAL ELECTRIC / ELECTRIC UNITS r----------------------� ,HE�,wa.A. i r--------------------� i W1 °°°"" = J---J L_ Fo W2 s<ose z------ 9� r-- L---- F., L---- 2c000s Y1 I ~Y2r_, L---COM------------------------�-- Figure 58. ReliaTel options module ja J4 J9 J10 J11 µ [100 J3 00 O 0 �o 0 6 000000 0 Figure 59. ReliaTelTm relative humidity sensor (dehumidification option) LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL BLOCK NLTB NLTB RELATIVE HUMIDITY 1209 N 13 SENSOR NLTB (FIELD SUPPLIED) LOCATED ON FRONT 14 N N 15 _ OF ROOFTOP UNIT CONTROL BOX 1609 N 17 1809 N 19 O R.H.*I I R.H.- - � —FIELD SUPPLIED CABLE 38 RT-SVX22V-EN Figure 60. ReliaTel humidistat (dehumidification option) LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL BLOCK LTB LTB LOCATED ON FRONT 9 ® ®10 OF ROOFTOP UNIT CONTROL BOX 11 ® [P 12 13 ® ® 14 HUMIDISTAT (FIELD SUPPLIED) 7- - - 1 r orb HI I r-C OM I FIELD SUPPLIED ' WIRE Installation RT-SVX22V-EN 39 Installation Figure6l. Electromechanical control customer low voltage routing (all units except 10 ton high efficiency) uwPOwERc c OUTLET SECURE FIELD INSTALLED WRING FOR CONVENTINCE OUTLET WITH POP -IN WIRE TIE Flguno62. ReliaTel control customer low voltage routing (all units except 1Oton high efficiency) REFRIGERATION COMMUNICATION MODULE INTERFACE � RELIATEL TBU WIRING ROUTE FIELD WIRING AS SHOWN :ii TBU AND SECURE WITH 3 WIRE TIES OPTION Figure 63. Re|iuTo|T° (mithoutTBUE) control customer wire routing (10ton high efficiency) uwpoWcREu TCONVENIENCE OUTLET SECURE FIELD INSTALLED WIRING r-FOR CONVENIENCE OUTLET WITH POP -IN WIRE TIE 40 mFsvx22V-sm Installation Figure 64. ReliaTel (with TBUE) control customer wire routing (10 ton high efficiency) COMMUNICATION ENTER CONTROL BOX THROUGH HOLE IN INTERFACE (COMM) OUTDOOR DIVIDER PANEL. SECURE FIELD WIRING WITH POP -IN WIRE TIE NEAR FV,11 1 OPTIONS REFRIGERATION HOLE IN OUTDOOR DIVIDER PANEL. MODULE(RTOM) MODULE(RTRM) ROUTE FIELD WIRING ALONG SIDE OF TBUE WRAPPER. SECURE WITH LOW -VOLTAGE SCREW -IN WIRE TIES. TERMINAL BOARD 1 (LTB) a \-EXIT TBUE ENCLOSURE THROUGH HOLE IN WRAPPER. ENTER UNIT THROUGH THE BASE. Figure 65. Electromechanical (without TBUE) control customer wire routing (10 ton high efficiency) RT-SVX22V-EN 41 Installation Mn ENTER CONTROL BOX THROUGH HOLE IN OUTDOOR DIVIDER PANEL. SECURE FIELD WIRING WITH POP -IN WIRE TIE NEAR HOLE IN OUTDOOR DIVIDER PANEL. ENTER UNIT THROUGH HOLE IN POST. Figure 66. Electromechanical (with TBUE) control customer wire routing (10 ton high efficiency) ENTER CONTROL BOX THROUGH HOLE IN OUTDOOR DIVIDER PANEL. SECURE FIELD WIRING WITH POP -IN WIRE TIE NEAR HOLE IN OUTDOOR DIVIDER PANEL. IfROUTE FIELD WIRING ALONG SIDE OF TBUE WRAPPER. SECURE WITH SCREW -IN WIRE TIES. Ell II�� UNPOWERED- I `EXIT TBUE ENCLOSURE THROUGH Uzi CONVENIENCE HOLE IN WRAPPER. OUTLET ENTER UNIT THROUGH THE BASE. 42 RT-SVX22V-EN Space Temperature Averaging (ReliaTelT"' only) Space temperature averaging is accomplished by wiring a number of remote sensors in a series/parallel circuit. Using the BAYSENS016* or BAYSENS077*, at least four sensors are required to accomplish space temperature averaging. Figure 67. Examples EXAMPLE #1 zSM REMOTE SENSORS #1 #2 #3 #4 O — — — — — — — — r i r t -- 1 2 O 2 1 O O O O 2 — EXAMPLE #2 zSM REMOTE SENSORS #1 #2 #3 O 1 L O O 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 02 ------------J #4 #5 #6 1 2 1 2 O 2 — — — — — — — — — — — #7 #B #9 L� �— 2 — �— 2 11 2 EXAMPLE #3 zSM REMOTE SENSORS #1 #2 0 1 2 O1 2 2 Installation • Example #1 illustrates two series circuits with two sensors in each circuit wired in parallel. The square of any number of remote sensors is required. • Example #2 illustrates three sensors squared in a series/parallel circuit. Using BAYSENS077*, two sensors are required to accomplish space temperature averaging. Example #3 illustrates the circuit required for this sensor. Table 10, p. 45 lists the temperature versus resistance coefficient for all sensors. Remote Sensor #1 Remote Sensor #2 VVVV VVVV Remote Sensor #3 Remote Sensor #4 \/VVV VVVV zSM zSM TERMINAL # 1 TERMINAL # 2 Remote Sensor #1 Remote Sensor #2 Remote Sensor #3 VVVV��VVV0� VVVV Remote Sensor #4 Remote Sensor #5 Remote Sensor #6 VVVV��VVVV��VVVV Remote Sensor #7�/Remote Sensor #8 Remote Sensor #9 VVVVC �VVVV\-��\/V\/V ZSM TERMINAL # 1 Remote Sensor #1 Remote Sensor #2 —C VVVVVVVV VVVV VVVV zSM TERMINAL # 1 Note: Wiring pin numbers are for reference only.There are multiple smoke detector systems that could have differently numbered pins. For correctwiring ZSM TERMINAL # 2 zSM TERMINAL # 2 details, please refer to the specific smoke detector literature that accompanied this unit. RT-SVX22V-EN 43 Installation Figure 68. Typical field wiring diagrams for optional controls (ReliaTelT11 only) RTRM RTRM RTRM 1 2 3 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1A 2 3 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 M 1 2 3 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 11 A O Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I A6 O 4 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .b 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I I I I I I 1 I I I I I _ i_ I I L 1 1 1 1 -AYSENS075* I l_ 1 1 I 1 1 1 l 1 1 I I I L--------,, j l Q ®QQ TB1 ASYSTAT669A L OPTION REMOTE 2 SENSOR ____ _ TB1 BAYSENS075* ASYSTAT669A OPTION I I I REMOTE SENSOR TB1 BAYSEN5106* ZONE SENSOR �IA--I^ BAYSEN5106* ZONE SENSOR ® 2A—' BAYSENS110* ZONE SENSOR �2 CUT WIRE JUMPER R11 ADJACENT TO ®2 TEMPERATURE SLIDES ON ZONE SENSOR CUT WIRE JUMPER R11 ADJACENT TO WHEN OPTIONAL REMOTE SENSOR TEMPERATURE SLIDES ON ZONE SENSOR IS USED. WHEN OPTIONAL REMOTE SENSOR IS USED. RTRM RTRM RTRM 1 2 3 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1211 1 2 3 A 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 1211 1 2 3 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 61 JS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 �y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I I I I I I I I I l_______, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L______� i —_ ' 111-- l l l BAYSENSI 19* 1 ASYSTAT666A —1lI IIII IiIIiIIiI IiI IiI ZONE SENSOR .AY OR ZONE SENSOR BAYSEN5075* I I I I I I I ASYSTAT669A 11 I 1 1 1 1 ICS WITH OVERRIDE AND ICS WITH SETPOINT,OVERRIDE OPTIONAL REMOTE SENSOR CANCELLATION BUTTON AND CANCELLATION BUTTON ml 6vAu61W Iq�6. E1kRaHa sra I , BAYFRS1003A � ' ECA 9 I ILI —J I Li�__p_As_�J SIOP ___________________ ffiH� _ _ _ — _ P _______, I I Rr-AE1EICT OFYMX SIMPLED AOER i POS P1 5u0NDuel W-0 YCZ1 Cmlrtl RGI\ Ouc1 X1310004001 NIyD 011 Contra I (�lnlmum P9901Dn PDI4+rIfOmlIN I G Re J I XIM0004002 Rea NOTE BAYSTA%23A 44 RT-SVX22V-EN Installation Table 10. Temperature vs. resistance Temperature Degrees F° Degrees CO Nominal Resistance -200 -28.90 170.1 K - Ohms -150 -26.10 143.5 K - Ohms -100 -23.30 121.4 K - Ohms -50 -20.60 103.0 K - Ohms 00 -17.80 87.56 K - Ohms 50 -15.00 74.65 K - Ohms 100 -12.20 63.80 K - Ohms 150 -9.40 54.66 K - Ohms 200 -6.70 46.94 K - Ohms 250 -3.80 40.40 K - Ohms 300 -1.10 34.85 K - Ohms 350 1.70 30.18 K - Ohms 400 4.40 26.22 K - Ohms 450 7.20 22.85 K - Ohms 500 10.00 19.96 K - Ohms 550 12.80 17.47 K - Ohms 600 15.60 15.33 K - Ohms 650 18.30 13.49 K - Ohms 700 21.10 11.89 K - Ohms 750 23.90 10.50 K - Ohms 80° 26.70 9.297 K - Ohms 850 29.40 8.247 K - Ohms 900 32.20 7.330 K - Ohms 950 35.00 6.528 K - Ohms RT-SVX22V-EN 45 Pre -Start Use the checklist provided below in conjunction with the "General Unit Requirements" checklist to ensure that the unit is properly installed and ready for operation. Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors! Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors have discharged. For additional information regarding the safe discharge of capacitors, see PROD-SVB06A-EN • Check all electrical connections for tightness and "point of termination" accuracy. • Verifythatthe condenser airflow will be unobstructed. Rotating Components! Failure to follow all safety precautions below could result in rotating components cutting and slashing technician which could result in death or serious injury. During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product it may be necessary to work with live and exposed rotating components. Have a qualified or licensed service individual who has been properly trained in handling exposed rotating components, perform these tasks. • Verify that the condenser fan and indoor blower turn freely without rubbing and are properly tightened on the shafts. • Check the supply fan belts for proper tension and the fan bearings for sufficient lubrication. If the belts require adjustment, or if the bearings need lubricating, refer to the maintenance section of this manual for instructions. • Verifythata condensatetrap is installed and the piping is properly sized and pitched. • Verify that the correct size and number of filters are in place. • Inspect the interior of the unit for tools and debris and install all panels in preparation for starting the unit. Voltage Imbalance Three phase electrical power to the unit must meet stringent requirements for the unit to operate properly. Measure each leg (phase -to -phase) of the power supply. Each reading must fall within the utilization range stamped on the unit nameplate. If any of the readings do not fall within the proper tolerances, notify the power company to correct this situation before operating the unit. Excessivethree phasevoltage imbalance between phases will cause motors to overheat and eventually fail. The maximum allowable voltage imbalance is 2%. Measure and record the voltage between phases 1, 2, and 3 and calculate the amount of imbalance as follows: Voltage Imbalance= _ 100 xAA\V - VD Where; AV (Average Voltage)= Volt 1 + Volt 2 + Volt 3 V1, V2, V3 = Line Voltage Readings VD = Line Voltage reading that deviates the farthest from the average voltage. Example: If the voltage readings of the supply power measured 221, 230, and 227, the average volts would be: 221 + 230 + 227 = 226 Avg. VD (reading farthest from average) = 221 The percentage of Imbalance equals: 100 x 226 - 221 226 = 2.2% The 2.2% imbalance in this example exceeds the maximum allowable imbalance of 2.0%. This much imbalance between phases can equal as much as a 20% current imbalance with a resulting increase in motor winding temperatures that will decrease motor life. If the voltage imbalance is over 2%, notify the proper agencies to correct the voltage problem before operating this equipment. Electrical Phasing (Three Phase Motors) The compressor motor(s) and the supply fan motor are internally connected for the proper rotation when the incoming power supply is phased as A, B, C. Proper electrical supply phasing can be quickly determined and corrected before starting the unit by using an instrument such as an Associated Research Model 45 Phase Sequence Indicator and following the steps below: 46 RT-SVX22V-EN Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors! Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors have discharged. For additional information regarding the safe discharge of capacitors, see PROD-SVB06A-EN • Turn the field supplied disconnect switch that provides power to the main power terminal block or to the "Line" side of the optional factory mounted disconnect switch to the "Off' position. • Connect the phase sequence indicator leads to the terminal block or to the "Line" side of the optional factory mounted disconnect switch as follows; • Black (phase A) to L1 • Red (phase B) to L2 • Yellow (phase C) to L3 • Closethe field supplied main power disconnect switch or circuit protector switch that provides the supply power to the unit. Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. To prevent injury or death from electrocution, it is the responsibility of the technician to recognize this hazard and use extreme care when performing service procedures with the electrical power energized. • ObservetheABC and CBAphase indicator lights onthe face of the sequencer. TheABC indicator lightwill glow if the phase is ABC. If the CBA indicator light glows, open the disconnect switch or circuit protection switch and reverse any two power wires. • Restore the main electrical power and recheck the phasing. If the phasing is correct, open the disconnect switch or circuit protection switch and remove the phase sequence indicator. Compressor Crankcase Heaters (Optional) Each compressor can be equipped with a crankcase heater (On some units the crankcase heater comes standard). The Pre -Start proper operation of the crankcase heater is important to maintain an elevated compressor oil temperature during the "Off' cycle to reduce oil foaming during compressor starts. Oil foaming occurs when refrigerant condenses in the compressor and mixes with the oil. In lower ambient conditions, refrigerant migration to the compressor could increase. When the compressor starts, the sudden reduction in crankcase pressure causes the liquid refrigerant to boil rapidly causing the oil to foam. This condition could damage compressor bearings due to reduced lubrication and could cause compressor mechanical failures. Before starting the unit in the "Cooling" mode, set the system switch to the "Off' position and turn the main power disconnect to the "On" position and allow the crankcase heater to operate a minimum of 8 hours. Before closing the main power disconnect switch, insure that the "System" selection switch is in the "Off' position and the "Fan" selection switch is in the "Auto" position. Close the main power disconnect switch and the unit mounted disconnect switch, if applicable. Note: Upon closing main power disconnect and the unit mounted disconnect switch or circuit breaker, the phase monitorwill verify proper phasing. If LED on face of the monitor is red, correct supply power fault. Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. To prevent injury or death from electrocution, it is the responsibility of the technician to recognize this hazard and use extreme care when performing service procedures with the electrical power energized. ReliaTelT"' Controls Upon power initialization, the RTRM performs self - diagnostic checks to insure that all internal controls are functional. It also checks the configuration parameters against the components connected to the system. The Liteport LED located on the RTRM module is turned "On" within one second of power -up if internal operation is okay. Use one ofthefollowing "Test" procedureto bypass some time delays and to start the unit at the control panel. Each step of unit operation can be activated individually by temporarily shorting across the "Test' terminals for two to three seconds. The Liteport LED located on the RTRM RT-SVX22V-EN 47 Pre -Start module will blink when the test mode has been initiated. The unit can be left in any "Test" step for up to one hour before it will automatically terminate, or it can be terminated by opening the main power disconnect switch. Table 17. Service test guide for component operation Once the test mode has been terminated, the Liteport LED will glow continuously and the unit will revert to the "System" control. PWM Multi -Speed Fan Test Step Mode Fan Econ (a) Comp 1 Comp 2 Heat 1 Heat 2 Resistance Output(b) Output Minimum Fan On Position Off Off Off Off 1 Setpoint 0% 2.21<0 50% low Minimum On Selectable Off Off Off Off Ventilation 2 Economizer On Open Off Off Off Off 3.3KQ 50%(c) low Test Open 3 Cool On Minimum On (d) Off Off Off 4.71<0 82% low Stage 1 Position 4 (e) Cool On Minimum On (d) On (d) Off Off 6.81<0 100% High (2-step cooling) Stage 2 Position Low (3-step cooling) 5 (e) Cool On Minimum On (d) On (d) Off Off 8.2KQ 100% High Stage 3 Position 6 (e) Reheat On Minimum On On Off Off 33KQ 100%(0 High 7 (e) Heat On Minimum Off Off On Off 10KQ 100% High Stage 1 8 (e) Heat On Minimum Off Off On On 15KQ 100% High Stage 2 (a) The exhaust fan will turn on anytime the economizer damper position is equal to or greater than the exhaust fan setpoint. (b)The PWM Output is in reference to the user selected maximum unit fan speed. (c) Regardless of the Economizer Mode configuration, the unit will run the Supply Fan at the minimum speed during the Economizer step of the Service Test. (d)The condenser fans will operate any time a compressor is 'On' providing the outdoor air temperatures are within the operating values. (e) Steps for optional accessories and non -applicable modes in unit will be skipped. (f) Units with Enhanced Dehumidification only will not perform this step during Service Test. Test Modes There are three methods in which the "Test" mode can be cycled at LTB-Test 1 and LTB-Test 2. • Step Test Mode - This method initiates the different components of the unit, one at a time, by temporarily shorting across the two test terminals for two to three seconds. For the initial start-up of the unit, this method allows the technician to cycle a component "On" and have up to one hour to complete the check. Resistance Test Mode - This method can be used for start-up providing a decade boxforvariable resistance outputs is available. This method initiates the different components of the unit, one at a time, when a specific resistance value is placed across the two test terminals. The unitwill remain in the specifictest mode for approximately one hour even though the resistance is left on the test terminals. Auto Test Mode - This method is not recommended for start-up due to the short timing between individual component steps. This method initiates the different components of the unit, one at a time, when a jumper is installed across the test terminals. The unit will start the first test step and change to the next step every 30 seconds. At the end of the test mode, control of the unit will automatically revert to the applied "System" control method. For unit test steps, test modes, and step resistance values to cycle the various components, refer to Table 11, p. 48. Electromechanical Controls Test Procedure See unit schematic for correct wire numbers. Fan Test and Minimum Ventilation Connect red thermostat wire (R) to black thermostat wire (G). Economizer Cooling Connect a jumper wire across OTS on Economizer Control (ECA). Connect red thermostat (R) wire to yellow thermostat wire (Y1). Cool 1 Connect red thermostat wire (R) to yellow thermostat wire (Y1). Cool 2 Connect red thermostat wire (R) to yellow thermostat wire (Y2). 48 RT-SVX22V-EN Pre -Start Heat 1 Connect red thermostat wire (R) to brown thermostat wire (W1). Heat 2 Connect red thermostat wire (R) to brown thermostat wire (W2). RT-SVX22V-EN 49 Unit Start -Up Sequence of Operation Units are offered with two control options, electromechanical or ReliaTeIT11 Note: Refer to the unit nameplate: If the 9th digit of the model number = R, proceed with the ReliaTeIT"" Controls section within this chapter. If the 9th digit of the model number = E, proceed with the Electromechanical Controls section within this chapter. Note: The optional condensate overflow switch (COF) will shut the unit down if the float is raised and the switch is closed. ReliaTelT"' Controls ReliaTelTI Controls - Constant Volume (CV) ReliaTeIT°" control is a microelectronic control feature, which provides operating functions that are significantly different than conventional electromechanical units. The master module is the ReliaTelT"' refrigeration module (RTRM). The RTRM provides compressor anti -short cycle timing functions through minimum "Off" and "On" timing to increase reliability, performance and to maximize unit efficiency. Upon power initialization, the RTRM performs self - diagnostic checks to insure that all internal controls are functioning. It checks the configuration parameters against the components connected to the system. The LED located on the RTRM module is turned "On" within one second after power -up if all internal operations are okay. ReliaTelT"' Control Cooling without an Economizer When the system switch is set to the "Cool" position and the zone temperature rises above the cooling setpoint control band, the RTRM energizes the (K9) relay coil located on the RTRM. When the K9 relay contacts close, the compressor contactor (CC1) coil is energized provided the low pressure control (LPC1), high pressure control (HPC1) and discharge line thermostat (TDL 1) are closed. When the CC1 contacts close, compressor (CPR1) and the outdoor fan motor (ODM) start to maintain the zone temperature to within ± 2°F of the sensor setpoint at the sensed location. If the first stage of cooling can not satisfy the cooling requirement, the RTRM energizes the (K10) relay coil located on the RTRM. When the (K10) relay contacts close, the compressor contactor (CC2) coil is energized provided the low pressure control (LPC2), high pressure control (HPC2) and discharge line thermostat (TDL 2) are closed. When the CC2 contacts close, compressor (CPR2) starts to maintain the zone temperature to within ± 2°F of the sensor setpoint at the sensed location. Three -Stages of Cooling Note: High efficiency units only. When the unit is configured for three -stage cooling, and the system switch is set to the cool position and the zone temperature rises above the cooling setpoint control band, the RTRM energizes the (K10) relay coil located on the RTRM. When the (K10) relay contacts close, compressor contactor (CC2) is energized. This is the smaller of the two compressors (CPR2). This staging order is opposite standard staging order. If the first stage of cooling can not satisfy the cooling requirement, the RTRM energizes the (K9) relay coil and de -energizes the (K10) relay coil on the RTRM. Compressor contactor (CC1) is energized, bringing on the larger of the two compressors (CPR1). Compressor contactor (CC2) is de -energized, turning off the smaller compressor. If the second stage of cooling can not satisfy the cooling requirement, the RTRM keeps the (K9) relay coil energized and energizes the (K10) relay coil. Compressor contactors (CC1) and (CC2) are energized, and both compressors (CPR1 and CPR2). Lead/Lag is disabled with three -stage cooling. A unit configured for three -stage cooling and controlled with a thermostat will operate as a two -stage unit. ReliaTelTM Control Evaporator Fan Operation (for Gas Units) When the fan selection switch is setto the "Auto" position, the RTRM energizes the (K6) relay coil approximately 1 second after energizing the compressor contactor coil (CC1) in the cooling mode. In the heating mode, the RTRM energizesthe (K6) relay coil approximately45 second after gas ignition. Closing the (K6) contacts on the RTRM energizesthe indoorfan relay (F) coil to startthe indoorfan motor (IDM). The RTRM de -energizes the fan relay (F) approximately 60 seconds after the cooling requirement has be satisfied to enhance unit efficiency. When the heating cycle is terminated, the indoor fan relay (F) coil is de -energized approximately 90 seconds after the heating requirement. When the fan selection switch is set to the "On" position, the RTRM keeps the indoor fan relay coil (F) energized for continuous fan motor operation. 50 RT-SVX22V-EN When the unit is equipped with the optional clogged filter switch, wired between terminals J7-3 and J7-4 on the ReliaTeIT°^ options module (RTOM), the RTRM produces an analog output if the clogged filter switch (CFS) closes fortwo minutes after requestforfan operation. When the system is connected to a remote panel, the "SERVICE" LED will be turned on when this failure occurs. ReliaTelT"' Control Evaporator Fan Operation (for Cooling Only Units) When the fan selection switch is setto the "Auto" position, the RTRM energizes the (K6) relay coil approximately 1 second after energizing the compressor contactor coil (CC1) in the cooling mode. In the heating mode, the RTRM energizes the (K6) relay coil approximately 1 second before energizing the electric heat contactors. Closing the (K6) contacts on the RTRM energizes the indoor fan relay (F) coil to start the indoor fan motor (IDM). The RTRM de - energizes the fan relay (F) approximately 60 seconds after the cooling requirement has be satisfied to enhance unit efficiency. When the heating cycle is terminated, the indoor fan relay (F) coil is de -energized at the same time as the heater contactors. When the fan selection switch is set to the "On" position, the RTRM keeps the indoor fan relay coil (F) energized for continuous fan motor operation. When the unit is equipped with the optional clogged filter switch, wired between terminals J7-3and J7-4 on the ReliaTeIT°^ options module (RTOM), the RTRM produces an analog output if the clogged filter switch (CFS) closes for two minutes after a request for fan operation. When the system is connected to a remote panel, the "SERVICE" LED will be turned on when this failure occurs. Low Ambient Operation Note: For ReliaTeITM units only During low ambient operation, outside air temperature below 55°F, the RTRM will cycle the compressor and outdoor fan motor "Off" for approximately 3 minutes after every 10 minutes of accumulated compressor run time. The indoorfan motor (IDM) will continue to operate during this evaporator defrost cycle (EDC) and the compressor and outdoor fan will return to normal operation once the defrost cycle has terminated and the compressor "Off" time delay has been satisfied. Note: Units with the dehumidification option - When in dehumidification mode, the unit will not cycle as described above. The unit will run continuously in dehumidification mode at all ambient conditions above 40°F. Dehumidification is disabled at ambient conditions below 40°F. Sequence of Operation Multi -Speed Indoor Motor Note: Multi -speed indoorfan available only on6,7.5(dual compressor) & 8.5 tons high efficiency, and 10 ton products with ReliaTelTI controls. Note: Multi -speed indoor fan standard for 17 Plus. Models configured for the multi -speed indoor motor will be controlled via the 0-10 Vdc or PWC indoor fan speed output located on the RTOM. R136 (DA COOL —FAN SPD) potentiometer on the RTOM sets the maximum motor speed. Note that the potentiometer voltage readings can be verified via 2-position harness connector located adjacenttothe RTOM. The unit schematicwill illustratethe exact location. Use a DC voltmeter to read the voltage between the two terminals. Provisions have been made in Service TEST Mode to allow for maximum motor speed adjustment. Motor may be adjusted using modes listed below. Reference the RPM table in the Performance Data section for fan speed. 1. TEST Mode Cool 2; 2-Step Cool applications only 2. TEST Mode Cool 3; 3-Step Cool applications only Adjust R136 potentiometer clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease motor speed. Refer to the Fan Output% list below for supply fan output associated with each unit function: Fan Output% • Ventilation Only 50% • Economizer Cooling 65% • Cool 1 (Cl Energized) 65% • Cool 2 (Cl + C2) 100% (2-Steps of Cooling) • Cool 2 (Cl or C2) 65% (3-Steps of Cooling) • Cool 3 (Cl + C2 Energized) 100% • Dehumidification Fan Speeds and Enhanced 53% • Heat 100% Multi -Zone VAV Sequence of Operation Supply Air Pressure Control ReliaTelTM Option Module Control (RTOM) Supply fan is driven by a pulse -width modulation (PWM) signal from the RTOM. Note: PWM = 3 to 5 tons A pressure transducer measures duct static pressure, and the supply fan is modulated to maintain the supply air static pressure within an adjustable user -defined range. The range is determined by the supply air pressure setpoint and supply air pressure deadband, which are set through a unit mounted potentiometer or remote panel. The RTOM provides supply fan motor speed modulation. RT-SVX22V-EN 51 Sequence of Operation The supply fan will accelerate or decelerate as required to maintain the supply static pressure setpoint. Supply Air Static Pressure Limit The control of the supply fan and VAV boxes are coordinated, with respect to time, during unit start up and transition to/from Occupied/Unoccupied modes to prevent overpressurization of the supply air ductwork. However, if for any reason the supply air pressure exceeds the fixed supply air static pressure limit of 3.5" W.C., the supply fan is shut down and the VAV boxes are closed. The unit is then allowed to restart three times. If the overpressurization condition occurs on the fourth time, the unit is shut down and a manual reset diagnostic is set and displayed at any of the remote panels with LED status lights or communicated to the Integrated Comfort system. Supply Air Temperature Controls Cooling/Economizer During occupied cooling mode of operation, the economizer (if available) and primary cooling are used to control the supply air temperature. The supply air temperature setpoint is user -defined at the unit mounted VAV Setpoint Potentiometer or at the remote panel. If the enthalpy of the outside air is appropriate to use "free cooling", the economizer will be used first to attempt to satisfy the supply setpoint. On units with economizer, a call for cooling will modulate the fresh air dampers open. The rate of economizer modulation is based on deviation of the discharge temperature from setpoint, i.e., the further away from setpoint, the faster the fresh air damper will open. Note that the economizer is only allowed to function freely if ambient conditions are below the enthalpy control setting or belowthe return air enthalpy if unit has comparative enthalpy installed. If outside air is not suitable for "economizing", the fresh air dampers drive to the minimum open position. A field adjustable potentiometer on the Economizer Actuator, or a remote potentiometer can provide the input to establish the minimum damper position. At outdoor air conditions above the enthalpy control setting, primary cooling only is used and the fresh air dampers remain at minimum position. If the unit does not include an economizer, primary cooling only is used to satisfy cooling requirements. Supply Air Setpoint Reset Supply air reset can be used to adjust the supply air temperature setpoint on the basis of a zone temperature, return air temperature, or on outdoor air temperature. Supply air reset adjustment is available on the unit mounted VAV setpoint potentiometer for supply air cooling control. Reset Based on Outdoor Air Temperature Outdoor air cooling reset is sometimes used in applications where the outdoor temperature has a large effect on building load. When the outside airtemperature is low and the building cooling load is low, the supply air setpoint can be raised, thereby preventing subcooling of critical zones. This reset can lower usage of primary cooling and result in a reduction in primary cooling energy usage There are two user -defined parameters that are adjustable through the VAV Setpoint Potentiometer: reset temperature setpoint and reset amount. The amount of reset applied is dependent upon how far the outdoor air temperature is below the supply air reset setpoint. The amount iszero wherethey are equal and increases linearly toward the value set at the reset amount input. The maximum value is 20°F. If the outdoor air temperature is more than 20°F below the reset temperature setpoint the amount of reset is equal to the reset amount setpoint. Reset Based on Zone or Return Temperature Zone or return reset is applied to the zone(s) in a building that tends to overcool or overheat. The supply air temperature setpoint is adjusted based on the temperature of the critical zone(s) or the return air temperature. This can have the effect of improving comfort and/or lowering energy usage. The user -defined parameters are the same as for outdoor air reset. Logic for zone or return reset control is the same except that the origins of the temperature inputs are the zone sensor or return sensor respectively. The amount of reset applied is dependent upon how far the zone or return air temperature is below the supply air reset setpoint. The amount iszero wherethey are equal and increases linearly toward the value set at the reset amount potentiometer on the VAV setpoint potentiometer. The maximum value is 3°F. If the return or zone temperature is more than 30F below the reset temperature setpoint the amount of reset is equal to the reset amount setpoint. Zone Temperature Control Unoccupied Zone Cooling During unoccupied mode, the unit is operated as a CV unit. VAV boxes are driven full open and the supply fan is commanded to full speed. The unit controls zone temperature to the Unoccupied zone cooling setpoints. Daytime Warm-up During occupied mode, if the zone temperature falls to a temperature three degrees below the Morning Warm-up setpoint, Daytime Warm-up is initiated. The system changesto CV heating (full unit airflow), the VAV boxes are fully opened and the CV heating algorithm is in control until the Morning Warm-up setpoint is reached. The unit is then returned to VAV cooling mode. The Morning Warm- up setpoint is set at the unit mounted VAV Setpoint potentiometer or at a remote panel. Morning Warm-up (MWU) Morning warm-up control (MWU) is activated whenever the unit switches from unoccupied to occupied and the zone temperature is at least 1.5°F below the MWU setpoint. When MWU is activated the VAV box output will 52 RT-SVX22V-EN be energized for at least 6 minutes to drive all boxes open, the supply fan is commanded to full speed, and full heat (gas or electric) is energized. When MWU is activated the economizer damper is driven fully closed. When the zone temperature meets or exceeds the MWU setpoint minus 1.5°F, the heat will be turned or staged down. When the zone temperature meets or exceeds the MWU setpoint then MWU will be terminated and the unit will switch over to VAV cooling. Variable Air Volume Applications (Single Zone VAV) Supply Fan Output Control Units configured for Single Zone VAV will be controlled via the 0-10Vdc Indoor Fan Speed output located on the RTOM. R136 (DA COOL _FAN SPD) potentiometer on the RTOM sets the maximum motor speed. Note that the potentiometer voltage readings can be verified via 2- position harness connector located adjacentto the RTOM. The unit schematic will illustrate the exact location. Use a DC voltmeter to read the voltage between the two terminals. Reference the RPM table in the Performance Data section for fan speed. • Use Service TEST Mode to adjust maximum motor speed using modes listed below. 1. TEST Mode Cool 2; 2-Step Cool applications only 2. TEST Mode Cool 3; 3-Step Cool applications only • Adjust DA COOL -FAN SPD potentiometer clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease motor speed. • The control will scale the 0-10Vdc output from the RTOM linearly to control between the 50%-100% controllable range based on the space cooling demand. Minimum Supply Fan Output • Refertothetablebelowfordetailsonminimum supply fan output signals associated with each unit function. • Minimum Fan Output% • Ventilation Only 50% • Economizer Cooling 65% • Cool 1 (Cl Energized) 65% • Cool 2 (Cl + C2) 82% (2-Steps of Cooling) • Cool 2 (Cl or C2) 65% (3-Steps of Cooling) • Cool 3 (Cl + C2 Energized) 82% • Heat 100% Discharge Air Cool Setpoint Adjustment • Single Zone VAV units will require traditional zone heating (if heatinstalled) and cooling setpoints that are used on single speed units in addition to a new setpoint: Discharge Air Cool Setpoint limit. Discharge Sequence of Operation Air Cool Setpoints will be customer selectable via a potentiometer (DACR) adjacent to the RTOM with a range of 40- 70°F. • The table below lists the discharge air cool setpoints on the DACR. Note: The recommended setting is 50°F. Table 12. Discharge air cool setpoints (DACR) Setpoint (OF) 40 - <0.1 Voltage (Vdc) 55 - 1.65 41-0.2 56-1.7 42-0.3 57-1.75 43 - 0.45 58 - 1.83 44-0.55 59-1.9 45-0.7 60-1.95 46-0.8 61-2 47 - 0.95 62 - 2.05 48-1.05 63-2.1 49-1.15 64-2.13 50 - 1.25 65 - 2.17 51-1.3 66-2.21 52 - 1.35 67 - 2.27 53 - 1.45 68 - 2.3 54 - 1.55 69 - 2.35 70 - >2.4 ReliaTelT" Control Cooling with an Economizer The economizer is utilized to control the zone temperature providing the outside air conditions are suitable. Outside air is drawn into the unit through modulating dampers. When cooling is required and economizing is possible, the RTRM sends the cooling request to the unit economizer actuator (ECA) to open the economizer damper. The RTRM tries to cool the zone utilizing the economizer to slightly below the zone temperature setpoint. If the mixed air sensor (MAS) senses that the mixed air temperature is below 53°F, the damper modulates toward the closed position. If the zone temperature continues to rise above the zone temperature setpoint controlband and the economizer damper is full open, the RTRM energizes the compressor contactor (CC1). If the zone temperature continues to rise above the zone temperature setpoint controlband and the economizer damper is fully open, the RTRM energizes the compressor contactor (CC2). Multi -Speed Fan When economizing alone or with 1st stage cooling the indoor motor will operate at low speed. If economizing and 2nd stage cooling requested, the indoor motor will transition from low to high speed. Single Zone VAV The indoor motor will vary the indoor motor speed to optimize minimum fan speed forthe cooling demand in all RT-SVX22V-EN 53 Sequence of Operation modes (Economizer Only, Economizer+1st Stage Cooling, or Economizer+ 1st/2nd Stage Cooling). The ECA continues to modulate the economizer damper open/closed to keep the mixed air temperature that is calculated by the RTRM. If economizing is not possible, the ECA drives the damper to the minimum position setpoint when the indoor fan relay (F) is energized and allows mechanical cooling operation. When the unit is equipped with the optional fan failure switch, wired between terminals J7-5 and J7-6 on the RTOM, the RTRM will stop all cooling functions and produce an analog output if the fan failure switch (FFS) does not open within 40 seconds after a request for fan operation. When the system is connected to a remote panel, the "SERVICE" LED will flash when this failure occurs. ReliaTelT"' Control Dehumidification Single Compressor Units On a call for dehumidification, the reheat valve is energized and the compressor is turned on. When the humidity control setpoint is satisfied, the valve is de - energized and the compressor isturned off. If there is a call for cooling or heating from the space temperature controller, i.e. zone sensor or thermostat, while in reheat, the reheat valve is de -energized and the compressor continues to run, or the heat is turned on. The 3 minute compressor on and off times are still active during compressor operation. Dual Compressor Units The dehumidification cycle is only permitted above 407 and below 100°F and is not permitted during a heating cycle or during a demand for 2nd stage cooling. Otherwise, when an installed zone humidity sensor indicates a relative humidity equal to or greater than the RH set point as adjusted on the ReliaTeITI options module (RTOM), a dehumidification cycle is initiated. The sequence of operation forthe dehumidification cycle is identical to that of the second stage ReliaTeIT°" cooling cycle, except that the hot gas reheat valve (RHV) is energized, allowing air from the evaporator to be reheated. Also, any installed fresh air damper is driven to minimum position.The dehumidification cycle is terminated by initiation of a heating cycle or a 2"d stage cooling cycle or when zone humidity is reduced to 5% below the R.H. set point. In the absence of a zone humidity sensor input, an on/off input from a zone humidistat is used to initiate/terminate the dehumidification cycle. Dehumidification takes priority over a call for one -stage cooling. Heating or two -stage cooling takes priority over dehumidification, and a relative humidity sensor takes priority over a humidistat. Dehumidification Coil Purge Cycle On multiple circuit units with dehumidification/reheat configured, a purge cycle will be active for compressor reliability. The purpose of this function is to properly distribute refrigerantand lubricant throughout the system bytemporarily switching to the unused section of the coil for 3 minutes (purge cycle). The function operates as follows: 1. A purge cycle will be initiated after 90 minutes of accumulated compressor run time in only one mode: cooling or dehumidification, without transitioning to the other mode. 2. A purge cycle will consist of transitioning to the mode that hasn't run in 90 minutes of total compressor operation. The cycle will last for a period of 3 minutes. 3. The 90-minute cycle count will be reset anytime there is a normal transition between cooling and dehumidification. Transitioning from one of these modes to any other mode (off or heat) will not reset the counter. 4. If the purge cycle is a cooling cycle, only the first circuit will be activated. If it is a dehumidification cycle then the normal 2-compressor dehumidification mode cycle will be used. 5. The purge cycle will ignore the low ambient dehumidification lockout feature. 6. A purge cycle takes priority over normal cooling or dehumidification requests, but will discontinue for all high priority lockouts and alarms. ReliaTelTM Control Cooling with an Economizer The economizer is utilized to control the zone temperature providing the outside air conditions are suitable. Outside air is drawn into the unit through modulating dampers. When cooling is required and economizing is possible, the RTRM sends the cooling request to the unit economizer actuator(ECA)to open the economizer damper. The RTRM tries to cool the zone utilizing the economizer to slightly below the zone temperature setpoint. If the mixed air sensor WAS) senses that the mixed air temperature is below 53°F, the damper modulates toward the closed position. If the zone temperature continues to rise above the zone temperature setpoint control band and the economizer damper is full open for 5 minutes, the RTRM energizes the compressor contactor (CC1). If the zone temperature continues to rise above the zone temperature setpoint control band and the economizer damper is fully open, the RTRM energizes the compressor contactor (CC2). The ECA continues to modulate the economizer damper open/closed to keep the mixed air temperature that is calculated by the RTRM. If economizing is not possible, the ECA drives the damper to the minimum position setpoint when the indoor fan 54 RT-SVX22V-EN relay (F) is energized and allows mechanical cooling operation. When the unit is equipped with the optional fan failure switch, wired between terminals J7-5 and J7-6 on the RTOM, the RTRM will stop all cooling functions and produce an analog output if the fan failure switch (FFS) does not open within 40 seconds after a request for fan operation. When the system is connected to a remote panel, the "SERVICE" LED will flash when this failure occurs. Note: For units equipped with the dehumidification option, if the unit is economizing, the damper resets to minimum position while in dehumidification mode. Economizer Set -Up Adjusting the minimum position potentiometer located on the unit economizer actuator (ECA) sets the required amount of ventilation air. Two of the three methods for determining the suitability of the outside air can be selected utilizing the enthalpy potentiometer on the ECA, as described below: 1. Ambient temperature - controlling the economizing cycle by sensing the outside air dry bulb temperature. The following table lists the selectable dry bulb values by potentiometer setting. 2. Reference enthalpy - controlling the economizer cycle by sensing the outdoor air humidity. The following table lists the selectable enthalpy values by potentiometer setting. If the outside air enthalpy value is less than the selected value, the economizer is allowed to operate. 3. Comparativeenthalpy- utilizingahumiditysensorand a temperature sensor in both the return air stream and the outdoor air stream, the unit control processor (RTRM) will be able to establish which conditions are best suited for maintaining the zone temperature, i.e. indoor conditions or outdoor conditions. The potentiometer located on the ECA is non-functional when both the temperature and humidity sensors are installed. Table 13. Potentiometer settings Potentiometer Setting Dry Bulb Reference Enthalpy A 73°F (22.80C) 27 Btu/Ib (63 kJ/kg) B 70°F (21.10C) 25 Btu/Ib (58 kJ/kg) C 670F(a) (19.40C) 23 Btu/Ib (53 k]/kg) D 63°F (17.20C) 22 Btu/Ib (51 kJ/kg) E 550F (12.80C) 19 Btu/Ib (44 kJ/kg) (a) Factory settings Sequence of Operation ReliaTelT"' Control Heating Operation (for Cooling Only Units) When the system switch is set to the "Heat" position and the zone temperature falls below the heating setpoint control band, the RTRM energizes (K1) relaycoil. When the (K1) relay contacts close, located on the RTRM, the first stage electric heat contactor (AH or AH & CH) is energized. If the first stage of electric heat can not satisfy the heating requirement, the RTRM energizes (K2) relay coil. When the (K2) relay contacts close, located on the RTRM, the second stage electric heat contactor (BH) is energized, if applicable. The RTRM cycles both the first and second stages of heat "On" and "Off" as required to maintain the zone temperature setpoint. ReliaTelT"' Control Heating Operation (for Gas Units) When the system switch is set to the "Heat" position and the zone temperature falls below the heating setpoint control band, a heat cycle is initiated when the RTRM communicates ignition information to the Ignition module (IGN). Ignition Module Two -stage (IGN) runs self -check (including verification that the gas valve is de -energized). (IGN) checks the high - limit switches (TC01 &TCO2) for normally closed contacts, the pressure switch (PS) for normally open contacts, and the flame rollout (FR) switch for continuity. (IGN) energizes inducer blower on high speed to check pressure switch closure. If the pressure switch is closed, the inducer blower starts a 20-second pre -purge (15 seconds on high speed followed by 5 seconds on low speed). If the pressure switch (PS) is still open, the inducer blower will continue to be energized on high speed until pressure switch closure. After pre -purge completes, the (IGN) energizes the first stage of the gas valve, initiates sparkfor 2 seconds minimum, 7 seconds maximum (ignition trial) and detects flame and de -energizes spark. From this point, a fixed 45 second indoor blower delay on timing starts. After the indoor blower delay on is completed, the (IGN) energizes the indoor blower. The (IGN) enters a normal operating loop where all inputs are continuously monitored. If the first stage of gas heat can not satisfy the heating requirement, the thermostat closes W2. The (IGN) energizes the second stage ofthe gas valve and the second stage of inducer blower. When the zone thermostat is satisfied, the (IGN) de -energizes the gas valve. The (IGN) senses loss of flame. The (IGN) initiates a 5 second inducer blower post purge. The (RTRM) initiates a second indoor blower delay off. If the burnerfailsto ignite,the ignition module will attempt two retries before locking out. The green LED will indicate a lock out by two fast flashes. An ignition lockout can be reset by; 1. Opening for 3 seconds and closing the main power disconnect switch. RT-SVX22V-EN 55 Sequence of Operation 2. Switching the "Mode" switch on the zone sensor to "OFF" and then to the desired position. 3. Allowing the ignition control module to reset automatically after one hour. Refer to the "Ignition Control Module Diagnostics" section for the LED diagnostic definitions. When the fan selection switch is setto the "Auto" position, the RTRM energizes the indoor fan relay (F) coil approximately 30 second after initiating the heating cycle to start the indoor fan motor (IDM). Table 14. Ignition module diagnostics Module is powered up, but no active call for Steady light heat. Blinking at continuous Active call for heat. steady rate One blink Loss of communication. System lockout (failure to ignite, no spark, low/ Two blinks no gas pressure, etc.) Pressure switch (no vent air flow, bad CBM, Three blinks closed at initial call for heat). Auto reset. High limit (excessive heat in combustion Four blinks chamber, low airflow). Auto reset. Flame sensed and gas valve not energized or Five blinks flame sensed and no call for heat. Flame rollout (CBM failure, incorrect gas pressure, incorrect primary air). Requires Six blinks manual reset of the switch. ReliaTelTM module will communicate a heat fail Seven blinks diagnostic back to the RTRM. Drain Pan Condensate Overflow Switch (Optional) This input incorporates the condensate overflow switch (COF) mounted on the drain pan and the ReliaTeIT"" options module (RTOM). When the condensate level reaches the trip point for 6 continuous seconds, the RTOM will shut down all unit function until the overflow condition has cleared. The unit will return to normal operation after 6 continuous seconds with the COF in a non -tripped condition. If the condensate level causes the unit to shutdown more than 2 times in a 3 day period, the unit will be locked -out of operation. A manual reset of the diagnostic system through the zone sensor or Building Automation System (BAS) will be required. Cycling unit power will also clear the fault. Electromechanical Controls These units are offered with two control options, electromechanical and ReliaTeIT"' controls. The ReliaTeIT"^ controls is a microelectronic control feature, which provides operating functions that are significantly different than conventional electromechanical units. Electromechanical Control Cooling without an Economizer When the thermostat switch is set to the "Cool" position and the zone temperature rises above the cooling setpoint, the thermostat Y contacts close. The compressor contactor (CC1) coil is energized provided the low pressure control (LPC1), high pressure control (HPC1) and discharge line thermostat (TDL 1) are closed. When the (CC1) contacts close, compressor (CPR1) and the outdoor fan motor (ODM) start. If the first stage of cooling can not satisfy the cooling requirement, the thermostat closes Y2. The compressor contactor (CC2) coil is energized provided the low pressure control (LPC2), high pressure control (HPC2) and discharge line thermostat (TDL 2) are closed. When the (CC2) contacts close, compressor (CPR2) starts. Electromechanical Control Evaporator Fan Operation (for Gas Units) When the thermostat fan selection switch is set to the "Auto" position, the Ignition Module (IGN) energizes the indoor fan relay (F) approximately 1 second after energizing the compressor contactor coil (CC1) in the cooling mode. In the heating mode, the Ignition Module (IGN) energizes the indoorfan relay (F) coil approximately 45 second after gas ignition. Closing indoor fan relay (F) coil starts the indoor fan motor (IDM). The (IGN) de - energizes the fan relay (F) approximately 80 seconds after the cooling requirement has been satisfied to enhance unit efficiency. When the heating cycle is terminated, the indoor fan relay (F) coil is de -energized approximately 90 seconds after the heating requirement. When the thermostat fan selection switch is set to the "On" position, the (IGN) keeps the indoor fan relay coil (F) energized for continuous fan motor operation. Electromechanical Evaporator Fan Operation (for Cooling Only Units) When the thermostat fan selection switch is set to the "Auto" position, the thermostat energizes the indoor fan relay coil (F) to start the indoor fan motor (IDM). The fan relay (F) de -energizes after the cooling requirement has been satisfied. When the heating cycle is terminated, the indoor fan relay (F) coil is de -energized with heater contactors. When the thermostat fan selection switch is set to the "On" position, the thermostat keeps the indoor fan relay coil (F) energized for continuous fan motor operation. Economizer Set -Up Adjusting the minimum position potentiometer located on the unit economizer actuator (ECA) sets the required amount of ventilation air. Ambient temperature is controlling the economizing cycle by sensing the outside air dry bulb temperature. The 56 RT-SVX22V-EN following table lists the selectable dry bulb values by potentiometer setting. Table 15. Potentiometer settings Potentiometer Setting Dry Bulb Reference Enthalpy A B 73°F (22.8°C) 70°F (21.10C) 27 Btu/lb (63 kJ/kg) 25 Btu/lb (58 kJ/kg) C 67°F(a) (19.40C) 23 Btu/lb (53 kJ/kg) D 63°F (17.20C) 22 Btu/lb (51 kJ/kg) E 55OF (12.80C) 19 Btu/lb (44 kJ/kg) (a) Factory settings Electromechanical Control Cooling with an Economizer The economizer is utilized to control the zone temperature providing the outside air conditions are suitable. Outside air is drawn into the unit through modulating dampers. When cooling is required and economizing is possible, the unit economizer actuator (ECA) opens the economizer damper. The ECA continues to modulate the economizer damper open/closed to keep the mixed air temperature in the 50°F to 55°F range. The thermostat will close the Y2 contacts to turn on contactor (CC1) if mechanical cooling is required. If economizing is not possible, the ECA drives the damper to the minimum position setpoint when the indoor fan relay (F) is energized and allows mechanical cooling operation. Electromechanical Control Heating Operation (for Cooling Only Units) When the system switch is set to the "Heat" position and the zone temperature falls below the heating setpoint, the thermostat closes W1 contacts the first stage electric heat contactor (AH or AH & CH) is energized. If the first stage of electric heat can not satisfy the heating requirement, the thermostat closes W2. When the W2 contacts close, the second stage electric heat contactor (BH) is energized, if applicable. The thermostat cycles both the first and second stages of heat "On" and "Off" as required to maintain the zone temperature setpoint. Electromechanical Control Heating Operation (for Gas Units) When the system switch is set to the "Heat" position and the zone temperature falls below the heating setpoint, the Ignition module (IGN) initiates a heat cycle. Ignition Module Low, Medium and High Heat Two -stage (IGN) runs self -check (including verification that the gas valve is de -energized). (IGN) checks the high - limit switches (TC01 &TCO2) for normally closed contacts, Sequence of Operation the pressure switch (PS) for normally open contacts, and the flame rollout (FIR) switch for continuity. (IGN) energizes inducer blower on high speed to check pressure switch closure. If the pressure switch is closed, the inducer blower starts a 20second pre -purge (15 seconds on high speed followed by 5 seconds on low speed). If the pressure switch (PS) is still open, the inducer blower will continue to be energized on high speed until pressure switch closure. After pre -purge completes, the (IGN) energizes the first stage of the gas valve, initiates spark for 2 seconds minimum, 7 seconds maximum (ignition trial) and detects flame and de -energizes spark. From this point, a fixed 45 second indoor blower delay on timing starts. After the indoor blower delay on is completed, the (IGN) energizes the indoor blower. The (IGN) enters a normal operating loop where all inputs are continuously monitored. If the first stage of gas heat can not satisfy the heating requirement, the thermostat closes W2. The (IGN) energizes the second stage of the gas valve and the second stage of inducer blower. When the zone thermostat is satisfied, the (IGN) de - energizes the gas valve. The (IGN) senses loss of flame. The (IGN) initiates a 5 second inducer blower post purge and 90 second indoor blower delay off at current speed. The (IGN) de -energizes the inducer blower at the end of the post purge. The (IGN) de -energizes the indoor blower at the end of the selected indoor blower delay off. Table 16. Ignition module diagnostics Module is powered up, but no active call for Steady light heat. Blinking at continuous steady Active call for heat. rate One blink Loss of communication. System lockout (failure to ignite, no spark, Two blinks low/no gas pressure, etc.) Pressure switch (no vent air flow, bad CBM, Three blinks closed at initial call for heat). Auto reset. High limit (excessive heat in combustion Four blinks chamber, low airflow). Auto reset. Flame sensed and gas valve not energized Five blinks or flame sensed and no call for heat. Flame rollout (CBM failure, incorrect gas pressure, incorrect primary air). Requires Six blinks manual reset of the switch. W1& W2 swapped (electromechanical 3-10 Seven blinks tons units). Drain Pan Condensate Overflow Switch (Optional) The condensate overflow switch (COF) is utilized to prevent water overflow from the drain pan. The float switch is installed on the corner lip of the drain pan. When the condensate level reaches the trip point, the COF relay RT-SVX22V-EN 57 Sequence of Operation energizes and opens the 24VAC control circuit which disables the unit. Once the 24VAC control circuit is opened, a delay timer will prevent unit start-up for three minutes. Verifying Proper Air Flow Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Units with 5-Tap Direct Drive Indoor Fan Much of the systems performance and reliability is closely associated with, and dependent upon having the proper airflow supplied both to the space that is being conditioned and across the evaporator coil. The indoor fan motor is factory wired to operate on speed tap 1 in the cooling and heating mode for electric/electric units. For Gas/Electric units, the motor is factory wired to operate on speed tap 1 during cooling. For 3 & 4 ton Gas/ Electric units operating in heat mode, the minimum setting is Tap 4. For these units, a separate tap terminal is provided to change speeds automatically between heating and cooling. The motor can be rewired for different speed settings should the application require it. Refer to the wiring diagram that shipped in the unit and the unit fan performance tables in the Service Facts. The indoorfan motors are specifically designed to operate within the BHP parameters listed in the fan performance tables of the unit Service Facts. When verifying direct drive fan performance, the tables must be used somewhat differently than those of belt driven fans. Fan performance diagnostics can be easily recognized when these tables are used correctly. Before starting the SERVICE TEST, set the minimum position setpoint for the economizer to 0% using the setpoint potentiometer located on the Economizer Control (ECA), if applicable. ReliaTelT"" Control: Using the Service Test Guide in Table 11, p. 48, momentarily jump across the Test 1 &Test 2 terminals on LTB1 one time to start the Minimum Ventilation Test. Electromechanical Control: Using the Service Test Guide perform the proper test mode connections. With the fan operating properly, determine the total system external static pressure (inches w.c.) by the following method (ReliaTel/Electromechanical): 1. Measure the supply and return duct static pressure and sum the resulting absolute values, 2. Use the accessory pressure drop table in the Service Facts, to calculate the total static pressure drop for all of the accessories installed on the unit; i.e., curb, economizer, etc. Note: Accessory static pressure drop is based on desired CFM and may not be actual static pressure drop. 3. Add the total accessory static pressure drop (step 2) to the duct external static pressure (step 1). The sum of these two values represents the total system external static pressure. Using the Fan Performance Tables in the Service Facts, look up the selected speed tap setting and match the measured ESP to determine the approximate CFM. If the required CFM is too low, (external static pressure is high) do one or both of the following and repeat procedure: a. Relieve supply and/or return duct static. b. Change indoor fan speed tap to a higher value If the required CFM is too high, (external static pressure is low), do one or both of the following and repeat procedure: c. Increase supply and/or return duct static. d. Change indoor fan speed tap to a lower value. Note: Minimum setting for units with gas or electric heat is 320 CFM per ton. For 3 & 4 ton gas Heat units operating in heating mode the heat speed set cannot be lower than speed Set 4. 4. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power disconnect switch to the "Off" position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Units with Belt Drive Indoor Fan Much of the systems performance and reliability is closely associated with, and dependent upon having the proper airflow supplied both to the space that is being conditioned and across the evaporator coil. The indoorfan speed is changed by opening or closing the adjustable motor sheave. Before starting the SERVICE TEST, set the minimum position setpoint for the economizer to 0% using the setpoint potentiometer located on the Economizer Control (ECA), if applicable. ReliaTel"' Control: Using the Service Test Guide in Table 11, p. 48, momentarilyjump across the Test 1 &Test 2 terminals on LTB1 one time to start the Minimum Ventilation Test. Electromechanical Control: Using the Service Test Guide perform the proper test mode connections. 58 RT-SVX22V-EN Once the supply fan has started, check for proper rotation. The direction of rotation is indicated by an arrow on the fan housing. With the fan operating properly, determine the total system airflow (CFM) by (ReliaTellm/Electromechanical): 1. Measuring the actual RPM. 2. Measurethe amperage atthe supplyfan contactorand compare itwith the full load amp (FLA) rating stamped on the motor nameplate. a. Calculate the theoretical BHP using (Actual Motor Amps/ Motor Nameplate Amps) X Motor HP. b. Using the fan performance tables in the unit Service Facts, plot the actual RPM (step 1) and the BHP (step 2a) to obtain the operating CFM. 3. If the required CFM is too low, (external static pressure is high causing motor HP output to be below table value), a. Relieve supply and/or return duct static. b. Change indoor fan speed and repeat Step 1 and Step 2. • To Increase Fan RPM; Loosen the pulley adjustment set screw and turn sheave clockwise. • To Decrease Fan RPM; Loosen the pulley adjustment set screw and turn sheave counterclockwise. • If the required CFM is too high, (external static pressure is low causing motor HP output to be above table value), change indoor fan speed and repeat Step 1 and Step 2. • To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power disconnect switch to the "Off" position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Units with Direct Drive Indoor Fan - Electromechanical Control Much of the systems performance and reliability is closely associated with, and dependent upon having the proper airflow supplied both to the space that is being conditioned and across the evaporator coil. The indoor fan speed is changed by adjusting the output voltage from the MMC/ECM board to the direct drive fan. Before starting the SERVICE TEST, set the minimum position setpoint for the economizer to 0 percent using the setpoint potentiometer located on the Economizer Control (ECA), if applicable. ReliaTelT"' Units with Direct Drive Indoor Fan (10 Ton Standard Efficiency, 6(074) to 10 Ton High Efficiency, and optional 7.5 (092) to 8.5 Ton Standard Efficiency) Much of the systems performance and reliability is closely associated with, and dependent upon having the proper airflow supplied both to the space that is being conditioned and across the evaporator coil. The indoor fan speed is changed by adjusting the voltage from the RTOM Sequence of Operation Indoor Fan Speed output to the direct drive plenum fan. If installed, before starting the SERVICE TEST disable the Economizer by disconnecting the 4 pin power connector located at the base of the Economizer Control (ECA). Using the Service Test Guide in Table 11, p. 48, momentarilyjump across the Test 1 &Test 2 terminals on LTB1. Repeat process until Service Test Mode is at Cool 2 (2-Steps of Cooling Applications Only) or Cool 3 (3-Steps of Cooling applications). The indoor motor shall be operating @ 100%, to verify turn DA COOL _FAN SPD potentiometer fu I I clockwise, voltage should read -7.5 Vdc across harness test terminals. The Unit schematic illustrates location for measuring the indoor motor speed voltage. Table 17. Direct drive plenum fan settings (rpm vs. voltage) Potentiometer Voltage Motor RPM 1 N/A 1.25 N/A 1.5 N/A 1.75 N/A 2 N/A 2.25 325 2.5 402 2.75 465 3 544 3.25 630 3.5 716 3.75 775 4 845 4.25 912 4.5 976 4.75 1044 5 1115 5.25 1203 5.5 1253 5.75 1312 6 1368 6.25 1425 6.5 1475 6.75 1533 7 1581 7.25 1615 7.5 1615 Once the supply fan has started, determine the total system airflow (CFM) 1. Measure the DC voltage across harness test terminals. Using the fan rpm table shown above, determine RPM correlated to measured voltage. RT-SVX22V-EN 59 Sequence of Operation 2. If the required CFM is too low, (external static pressure is high causing motor HP output to be below table value), a. Relieve supply and/or return duct static. b. Change indoor fan speed and repeat Step 1 and Step 2. • To Increase/Decrease Fan RPM turn DA COOL FAN SPD on the RTOM clockwise/counter-clockwise. 3. If the required CFM is too high, (external static pressure is low causing motor HP output to be above table value), change indoor fan speed and repeat repeat Step 1 and Step 2. • Stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power disconnect switch to the "Off' position and reconnect Economizer 4-pin power connector if disconnected for this procedure. Proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Electromechanical Control: Using the Service Test Guide perform the proper test mode connections. Once the supply fan has started, determine the total system airflow (CFM) by (ReliaTeIT°^/Electromechanical): 4. Measurethe amperage at the supply fan contactorand compare it with the full load amp (FLA) rating for the evaporator motor stamped on the unit nameplate. a. Calculate the theoretical BHP using (Actual Motor Amps/Motor Nameplate Amps) X Motor HP b. Using the fan performance tables in the unit Service Facts, plot the actual RPM (step 1) and the BHP (step 2a) to obtain the operating CFM. 5. If the required CFM is too low, (external static pressure is high causing motor HP output to be below table value), a. Relieve supply and/or return duct static. b. Change indoor fan speed and repeat steps 1 and 2. • For ECM board: To Increase/Decrease Fan RPM: a. Push and hold the SET button for 3 sec. Board will display Motor 1 parameter name: Hi 1. b. Slow push SET again to display the parameter's current value =7.50 volts. c. Pushon+or— buttontoadjustparametertodesired value = XXX volts. d. Push and hold SET button for 3 sec to "save" the value. After save is complete, Hi 1 will show again. e. After the voltage Hi 1 is successfully changed, the display sequence will be: MTR 1 --- > XXX -----> MTR2 -----> 0.00----- >FST1---- >ON/ OFF ----- >FST2------ >ON/OFF------- >EhEn-- --->ON/OFF The motor will ramp up or down to adjust to the input signal. Using the fan rpm table above, determine RPM correlated to displayed voltage. • If the required CFM is too high, (external static pressure is low causing motor HP output to be above tablevalue),change indoorfan speed and repeatsteps 1 and 2. • To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power disconnect switch to the "Off" position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Units with Constant CFM Direct Drive Indoor Fan Much of the systems performance and reliability is closely associated with, and dependent upon having the proper airflow supplied both to the space that is being conditioned and across the evaporator coil. The indoor fan provides a constant CFM base on voltage output for the potentiometer on the RTOM board. Before starting the SERVICE TEST, set the minimum position setpoint for the economizer to 0 percent using the setpoint potentiometer located on the Economizer Control (ECA), if applicable. ReliaTel Control. Using the Service Test Guide in Table 11, p. 48, momentarily jump across the Test 1 &Test 2 terminals on LTB1 one time to start the Minimum Ventilation Test. Once the supply fan has started, determine the total system airflow (CFM) by: 1. Measure the DC voltage across pins TP1 and ground (screwon cornerof RTOM board). Lookup desired CFM using the voltage CFM table shown on the access panel label or in the unit Service Facts; record corresponding voltage. Adjust potentiometer until output voltage across TP1 and ground achieves desired CFM setpoint. 2. To increase voltage/CFM, turn potentiometer clockwise. 3. To decrease voltage/CFM, turn potentiometer counter- clockwise. Note: With ID fan access panel removed, fan will operate at lower RPM due to the decrease in pressure. Once panel is installed, RPM will increase. 17 Plus units with the constant CFM direct drive indoor fan Proper airflow is critical to unit operation. All 17 Plus Precedent units (037, 047, and 067 units) use an indoor fan that provides a constant CFM. There are two different types of 17 Plus Precedent units: Single Zone VAV units and Multi Speed units. Both types of units use the same type of indoor motor and the same airflow adjustment procedure. To adjust airflow on a 17 Plus unit the Service Test mode must be used for accurate results. Additionally, airflow adjustments should be made in either "Cool Stage 2" or any stage of heat becausethefan is driven to its maximum setting during these stages. Onlythe maximum fan setting requires adjustment, all other fan speeds follow the maximum adjustment and do not require any adjustment. 60 RT-SVX22V-EN Using the Service Test Guide in Table 11, p. 48, enter the unit into either "Cool Stage 2" or any stage of heat by using either the "Step Test Mode" or "Resistance Test Mode". Once the unit is in either "Cool Stage 2" or any stage of heat, system airflow (CFM) is determined by: 1. In the indoor fan compartment, locate the R136 potentiometer on the RTOM circuit board (also designated "DA COOL - FAN SPD"). Also, locate the TP1 test pin loop next to the R136 potentiometer. 2. Measure the DC Voltage across the test pin TP1 and unit chassis ground. Compare DC voltage to the CFM chart shown in Table 18, p. 61. Table 18, p. 61 shows what DC voltage corresponds to CFM per ton of unit cooling. Note: If 1200 cfm is required from a 3 ton unit (037) the R136 potentiometer should be adjusted so that the DC voltage measured at TP1 to ground reads 1.65 volts DC. 3. To increase the TP1 voltage, turn the R136 potentiometer clockwise. 4. To decrease the TP1 voltage, turn the R136 potentiometer counter -clockwise. Note: With the indoor fan access panel removed, the fan will operate at a lower RPM because static pressure is reduced with the door open. Once the panel is returned the RPM of the indoor fan will increase. Table 18. Cfm vs. vdc PWM% value Potentiometer Voltage (vdc) CFM/Ton 70 <0.1 320 75 0.7 347 80 1.25 373 85 1.65 400 90 95 1.95 2.17 427 453 100 >2.4 480 Variable Air Volume Applications (Traditional VAV) Supply Air Temperature Control - Occupied Cooling and Heating The RTRM is designed to maintain a selectable supply air temperature of 40°F to 90°F with a +/- 3.5°F deadband. In cooling, if supply airtemperature is more than 3.5 degrees warmer than the selected temperature, a stage of cooling will be turned "On" (if available). Then if the supply air temperature is more than 3.5° cooler than the selected temperature, a stage of cooling will be turned "Off'. At very low airflows the unit may cycle stages "On" and "Off' to maintain an average discharge airtemperature outside the7°deadband. During low load or low airflow conditions the actual temperature swing of the discharge airwill likely be greater. The RTRM utilizes a proportional and integral Sequence of Operation control scheme with the integration occurring when the supply airtemperature is outside the deadband. As long as the supply air temperature is within the setpoint deadband, the system is considered to be satisfied and no staging up or down will occur. Note: The RTRM is designed to maintain a selectable supply air temperature of 40°F to 90°F with a +/- 3.5°F deadband. However, to reduce the risk of evaporatorcoil freeze-up in Precedentand Voyager Light Commercial applications, supply air temperature should not be set below 50' F. Supply Air Temperature Control with an Economizer The economizer is utilized to control the supply air cooling at+1.5°F around the supply airtemperature setpoint range of 40°F and 90°F providing the outside air conditions are suitable. To reduce the risk of evaporator coil freeze-up supply air temperature should not be set below 50' F. While economizing, the mechanical cooling is disabled until the economizer dampers have been fully open for three minutes. If the economizer is disabled due to unsuitable conditions, the mechanical cooling will cycle as though the unit had no economizer. Note: The RTRM is designed to maintain a selectable supply air temperature of 40°F to 90OF with a +/- 3.5°F deadband. However, to reduce the risk of evaporatorcoil freeze-up in Precedentand Voyager Light Commercial applications, supply air temperature should not be set below 50°F. VHR Relay Output During unoccupied mode, daytime warm-up (DWU), morning warm-up (MWU) and heating mode the Supply Fan will operate at 100% of user set maximum airflow. All VAV boxes must be opened through an ICS program or by the VHR wired to the VAV boxes. The RTRM will delay 100% fan operation approximately 6.5 minutes when switching from occupied cooling mode to a heating mode. Zone Temperature Control without a Night Setback Panel or ICS - Unoccupied Cooling When a field supplied occupied/unoccupied switching device is connected between RTRM J6-11 and RTRM J6- 12, both the economizer and the mechanical cooling will be disabled. Zone Temperature Control without a Night Setback Panel or ICS - Unoccupied Heating When a field supplied occupied/unoccupied switching device is connected between RTRM J6-11 and J6-12 and DWU is enabled, the zone temperature will be controlled at 10°F below the Morning Warm-up setpoint, but not less than 50°F, by cycling one or two stages of either gas or electric heat, whichever is applicable. RT-SVX22V-EN 61 Sequence of Operation Morning Warm-up (MWU) Control Morning Warm-up is activated if the zone temperature is at least 1.5°F below the MWU setpoint whenever the system switches from Unoccupied to Occupied status. The MWU setpoint may be set from the unit mounted potentiometer or a remotely mounted potentiometer. The setpoint ranges are from 50°F to 90°F. When the zone temperature meets or exceedsthe MWU setpoint,the unit will switch to the "Cooling" mode. The economizerwill be held closed during the morning warm-up cycle. Daytime Warm-up (DWU) Control Daytime Warm-up is applicable during occupied status and when the zone temperature is below the initiation temperature. It can be activated or deactivated through ICS or a night setback zone sensor. If ICS or a night setback zone sensor is not utilized, DWU can be activated by setting the DWU enable DIP switch (RTAM) to ON and supplying a valid morning warm-up setpoint. The unit is shipped with a Morning Warm-up setpoint configured andthe Daytime Warm-up function is activated (switch on). Opening the DWU enable switch will disable this function. If the system control is local, the DWU initiation setpoint is 37 below the Morning Warm-up setpoint. The termination setpoint is equal to the Morning Warm-up setpoint. If the system control is remote (Tracer TM ), the DWU setpoint is equal to the Tracer Occupied heating setpoint. The initiation and termination setpoints are selectable setpoints designated by Tracer. When the zone temperature meets or exceeds the termination setpoint while the unit is in an Occupied, "Auto" Mode or switched to the "Cooling" Mode, the unit will revert to the cooling operation. If an Occupied "Heating" Mode is selected, the unit will only function within the DWU perimeters until the system is switched from the "Heat" Mode or enters an Unoccupied status. Note: When a LCI is installed on a VAV unit, the MWU setpoint located on the RTAM board is ignored. The MWU and DWU setpoints come from the higher priority LCI-R DAC. Supply Duct Static Pressure Control The supply duct static pressure is measured by a transducer with a 0.25 to 2.125 Vdc proportional output which corresponds to an adjustable supply duct static pressure of 0.3" w.c. to 2.5" w.c. respectively with a deadband adjustment range from 0.2" w.c. to 1.0" w.c. The setpoint is adjustable on the RTAM Static Pressure Setpoint potentiometer or through ICS. Traditional VAV Standalone Operation If a traditional VAV unit is required to operate without ICS, BAS or other "front end" controller, a jumper must be placed between J6-2 and J6-4 of the RTRM to allow local standalone control. Example: Supply Duct Static setpoint = 2.0" w.c. (RTAM) Deadband = 0.2" w.c. (RTAM) Duct Static Control Range = 1.9" w.c. to 2.1" w.c. Figure 69. Transducer voltage output vs. pressure input Transducer Voltage ❑utput vs Pressure Input 4.5------------ - 3-5 3.0 2.5 > 2-0 1-5 1.0 0.5 00 •0.5 0.00.51.01.52.02.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5, 5 Pressure (inches w.c.) Supply Air Temperature Reset The supply air temperature can be reset by using one of four DIP switch configurations on the RTAM or through ICS when a valid supply air reset setpoint with a supply air reset amount is given. A selectable reset amount of 0° F to 20°F via RTAM potentiometer or ICS is permissible for each type of reset. The amount of change applied to the supply air temperature setpoint depends on how far the return air, zone, or outdoor air temperature falls below the reset temperature setpoint. If the return air, zone, or outdoor air temperature is equal to or greater than the reset temperature setpoint, the amount of change is zero. If the return air, or zone temperature falls 3°F below the reset temperature setpoint, the amount of reset applied to the supply air temperature will equal the maximum amount of reset selected. If the outdoor air temperature falls 20°F below the reset temperature setpoint, the amount of reset applied to the supply airtemperature will equal the maximum amount of reset selected. The four DIP switch configurations are as follows: 1. None - When RTAM DIP Switch #3 and #4 are in the "Off" position, no reset will be allowed. 2. Reset based on Return Air Temperature - When RTAM DIP Switch #3 is "Off' and Switch #4 is "On", a selectable supply air reset setpoint of 50°F to 90°F via a unit mounted potentiometer or TracerTI is permissible. 3. Reset based on Zone Temperature -When RTAM DIP Switch #3 is "On" and Switch #4 is "Off', a selectable 62 RT-SVX22V-EN supply air reset setpoint of 50°F to 90°F via RTAM potentiometer or Tracer is permissible. 4. Reset based on Outdoor Air Temperature -When DIP Switch #3 and #4 are "On", a selectable supply air reset setpoint of 0°F to 100°F via RTAM potentiometer or Tracer is permissible. Return Air Smoke Detector The return air smoke detector is designed to shut off the unit if smoke is sensed in the return air stream. Sampling the airflow entering the unit at the return air opening performs this function. In orderforthe smoke detectorto properly sense smoke in the return airstream,the air velocity entering the unit must be between 500 and 4000 feet per minute. Equipment covered in this manual will develop an airflow velocity that falls within these limits over the entire airflow range specified in the evaporator fan performance tables. There are certain models however, if operated at low airflow, will not develop an airflow velocity that falls within the required 500 to 4000 feet per minute range. For these models, the design airflow shall be greater than or equal to the minimum CFM specified in the table provided below. Failure to followthese instructions will prevent the smoke detector from performing its design function. Economizer Start -Up Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Minimum Position Setting for 17 Plus, 6 to 10 Ton with Multi -Speed, or Single Zone VAV Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. 1. Apply power to the unit 2. Using the Service Test Guide on unit access panel, momentarily jump across the Test &Test2terminals on LTB1 one time to start indoor fan. Sequence of Operation Turn the MIN POS - DCV potentiometer on the RTEM clockwise to open or counter -clockwise to close. The damper will open to this setting for low speed fan operation. When adjusting minimum position, the damper may move to the new setting in several small steps. Wait at least 15 seconds for the damper to settle atthe new position. Range of damper forthis setting is 0-100%. 4. Momentarily jump across the Test &Test2terminals on LTB1, to cycle through test modes to Cool 1. 5. Turn the DCV SETPOINT - ILL potentiometer on the RTEM clockwiseto open or counter -clockwise to close. This will set the minimum damper position at an intermediate point of fan operation range of damper for this setting is 0-75%. 6. Momentarilyjump acrosstheTest 1 &Test2terminals on LTB1, to cycle through test modes to Cool 2. 7. Turn the MIN POS - DESIGN potentiometer on the RTEM clockwiseto open or counter -clockwise to close. This will set the minimum damper position at maximum fan speed. Range of damper for this setting is 0-50%. 8. The economizer minimum damper position for all fan speeds is complete. The RTEM will control minimum damper position along an imaginary line between the 3 damper minimum positions based on fan speed. Note: The RTEM will limit intermediate minimum damper position to ensure proper ventilation based upon the lowfan speed minimum damper position set in Step 3. 9. Replace the filter access panel. The damper will close when the blower circuit is de -energized. Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. ReliaTelT"" Control: Using the Service Test Guide in Table 11,p.48,momentarilyjumpacrosstheTest1 &Test 2 terminals on LTB1 one time to start the Minimum Ventilation Test below. Electromechanical Control: Using the Service Test Guide perform the proper test mode connections. 1. Set the minimum position setpoint for the economizer to the required percentage of minimum ventilation using the setpoint potentiometer located on the Economizer Control (ECA). The economizer will drive to its minimum position setpoint, exhaust fans (if applicable) may start at RT-SVX22V-EN 63 Sequence of Operation random, and the supply fan will start when the SERVICE TEST is initiated. Rotating Components! Failure to follow all safety precautions below could result in rotating components cutting and slashing technician which could result in death or serious injury. During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product it may be necessary to work with live and exposed rotating components. Have a qualified or licensed service individual who has been properly trained in handling exposed rotating components, perform these tasks. The Exhaust Fan will start anytime the economizer damper position is equal to or greater than the exhaust fan setpoint. 2. Verify that the dampers stroked to the minimum position. ReliaTelT"" Control. Momentarily jump across the Test 1 & Test 2 terminals on LTB1 one additional time if continuing from previous component start-up or until the desired start-up component Test is started. Electromechanical Control. Using the Service Test Guide perform the proper test mode connections. 3. Verify that the dampers stroked to the full open position. 4. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power disconnect switch to the "Off" position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Remove electromechanical test mode connections (if applicable). Compressor Start -Up Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. 1. Attach a set of service gauges onto the suction and discharge gauge ports for each circuit. Refer to the refrigerant circuit illustration in the Service Facts. ReliaTelT"" Control. Momentarily jump across the Test 1 & Test 2 terminals on LT131 one additional time if continuing from previous component start-up or until the desired start-up component Test is started. Electromechanical Control. Using the Service Test Guide perform the proper test mode connections. Scroll Compressors. a.Once each compressor has started, verify that the rotation is correct. If a scroll compressor is rotating backwards, it will not pump and a loud rattling sound can be observed. b. If the electrical phasing is correct, before condemning a compressor, interchange any two leads (at the compressor Terminal block) to check the internal phasing. If the compressor runs backward for an extended period (15to 30 minutes), the motor winding can overheat and cause the motor winding thermostat to open. 2. After the compressor and condenser fan have started and operated for approximately 30 minutes, observe the operating pressures. Compare the operating pressures to the operating pressure curve in the Service Facts. 3. Check system superheat. Follow the instruction listed on the superheat charging curve in the Service Facts. Superheat should be within ±5°F of the superheat chart value. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each refrigerant circuit. 5. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power disconnect switch to the "Off" position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Remove electromechanical test mode connections (if applicable). Dehumidification Option Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Momentarily jump across the Test 1 and Test 2 terminals oftheLTB1 until the unit enters test mode 7. (See Table 11, p. 48). Once the unit is in the reheat test mode, verify that the 3 way valve has shifted to the reheat position and that the supply temperature rises 10 OF more than when in cooling mode stage 2. Monitor the suction pressure for 15 minutes. The suction pressure should remain within 5 psi of normal cooling operation. If the unit has a 2 speed outdoor fan and if the outdoor air temperature is below 70°F, verify that the OD fan is in low speed. 1. Clamp an amp meter around one of 1st stage heater power wires at the heater contactor. ReliaTel"' Control. Using the Service Test Guide in Table 11, p. 48, continue the SERVICE TEST start-up procedure for each compressor circuit. 64 RT-SVX22V-EN Sequence of Operation Momentarily jump across the Test & Test 2 terminals on LTB one additional time if continuing from previous component start-up or until the desired start-up component Test is started. Electromechanical Control. Using the Service Test Guide perform the proper test mode connections; 2. Verify that the heater stage is operating properly. 3. Clamp an amp meter around one of 2nd stage heater power wires at the heater contactor (if applicable). ReliaTelT"" Control. Using the Service Test Guide in Table 11, p. 48, continue the SERVICE TEST start-up procedure for each compressor circuit. Momentarily jump across the Test 1 & Test 2 terminals on LTB one additional time if continuing from previous component start-up or until the desired start-up component Test is started. Electromechanical Control. Using the Service Test Guide (Table 11, p. 48) perform the proper test mode connections; 4. Verify that the heater stage is operating properly 5. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power disconnect switch to the "Off" position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Remove electromechanical test mode connections (if applicable). Final System Setup After completing all of the pre -start and start-up procedures outlined in the previous sections (i.e., operating the unit in each of its Modes through all available stages of cooling & heating), perform these final checks before leaving the unit: • Program the Night Setback (NSB) panel (if applicable) for proper unoccupied operation. Refer to the programming instructions for the specific panel. • Verify that the Remote panel "System" selection switch, "Fan" selection switch, and "Zone Temperature" settings for automatic operation are correct. • Inspect the unit for misplaced tools, hardware, and debris. • Verify that all exterior panels including the control panel doors and condenser grilles are secured in place. • Close the main disconnect switch or circuit protector switch that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal block or the unit mounted disconnect switch. Make sure all personnel are standing clear of the unit before proceeding. The system components will start when the power is applied. RT-SVX22V-EN 65 Maintenance Hazardous Service Procedures! Failure to follow all precautions in this manual and on the tags, stickers, and labels could result in death or serious injury. Technicians, in order to protect themselves from potential electrical, mechanical, and chemical hazards, MUST follow precautions in this manual and on the tags, stickers, and labels, as well as the following instructions: Unless specified otherwise, disconnect all electrical power including remote disconnect and discharge all energy storing devices such as capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Fan Belt Adjustment - Belt Drive Units Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Rotating Components! Failure to follow all safety precautions below could result in rotating components cutting and slashing technician which could result in death or serious injury. During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product it may be necessary to work with live and exposed rotating components. Have a qualified or licensed service individual who has been properly trained in handling exposed rotating components, perform these tasks. The fan belts must be inspected periodically to assure proper unit operation. Replacement is necessary if the belts appear frayed or worn. Units with dual belts require a matched set of belts to ensure equal belt length. When removing or installing the new belts, do not stretch them over the sheaves. Loosen the belts using the belt tension adjustment bolts on the motor mounting base. Once the new belts are installed, using a Browning or Gates tension gauge (or equivalent) illustrated in Figure 70, p. 66; adjust the belt tension as follows; 1. To determine the appropriate belt deflection; a. Measure the center -to -center shaft distance (in inches) between the fan and motor sheaves. b. Divide the distance measured in Step la by 64; the resulting value represents the amount of belt deflection that corresponds to the proper belt tension. 2. Set the large O-ring on the belt tension gauge at the deflection value determined in Step 1b. 3. Set the small O-ring at zero on the force scale of the gauge plunger. 4. Placethe largeend of the gauge atthe center of the belt span; then depressthe gauge plunger until the large 0- ring is even with the top of the next belt or even with a straightedge placed across the fan and motor sheaves. Refer to Figure 70, p. 66. 5. Remove the belt tension gauge. The small O-ring now indicates a number other than zero on the plunger's force scale. This number represents the force (in pounds) required to give the needed deflection. 6. Compare the "force" scale reading (Step 5) with the appropriate "force" value listed in Table 19, p. 67. If the "force" reading is outside the range, readjust the belt tension. Note: Actual belt deflection "force" must not exceed the maximum "force" value shown in Figure 70, p. 66. 7. Recheck the belt tension at least twice during the first 2 to 3 days of operation. Belt tension may decrease until the new belts are "run in". Figure 70. Belt tension gauge Deflection = Belt Span (in) 64 Deflection = Belt Span (mm) 152 Force Small 0—Ring Large Span 0-0 —Ring Scale Scale 66 RT-SVX22V-EN Table 19. Belt tension measurement and deflection Deflection Force (Lbs.) Belts Cross Section Small P.D Range Super Gripbelts Gripnotch Steel Cable Gripbelts Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max 3.0 - 3.6 3 4 1/2 3 7/8 5 1/2 3 1/4 4 A 3.8 - 4.8 3 1/2 5 4 1/2 6 1/4 6 7/8 3 3/4 4 1/4 4 3/4 5 1/4 5.0 - 7.0 4 5 112 5 3.4 - 4.2 4 5 1/2 5 3/4 8 4 1/2 5 1/2 B 4.4 - 5.6 5 1/8 7 1/8 6 1/2 9 1/8 5 3/4 7 1/4 5.8 - 8.8 6 3/8 8 3/4 7 3/8 10 1/8 7 8 3/4 Monthly Maintenance Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Before completing the following checks, turn the unit OFF and lock the main power disconnect switch open. Filters Inspect the return air filters. Clean or replace them if necessary. Refer to the unit Service Facts for filter information. Return Air Smoke Detector Maintenance Airflow through the unit is affected by the amount of dirt and debris accumulated on the indoor coil and filters. To insure that airflow through the unit is adequate for proper sampling by the return air smoke detector, complete adherence to the maintenance procedures, including recommended intervals between filter changes, and coil cleaning is required. Periodic checks and maintenance procedures must be performed on the smoke detector to insure that it will function properly. For detailed instructions concerning these checks and procedures, refer to the appropriate section(s) of the smoke detector Installation and Maintenance Instructions provided with the literature package for this unit. Cooling Season • Check the unit's drain pans and condensate piping to ensure that there are no blockages. • Inspect the evaporator and condenser coils for dirt, bent fins, etc. If the coils appear dirty, clean them according to the instructions described in "Coil Cleaning" later in this section. Maintenance • Manually rotate the condenser fan(s) to ensure free movement and check motor bearings for wear. Verify that all of the fan mounting hardware is tight. • Inspect the F/A-R/A damper hinges and pins to ensure that all moving parts are securely mounted. Keep the blades clean as necessary. • Verify that all damper linkages move freely; lubricate with white grease, if necessary. • Check supply fan motor bearings; repair or replace the motor as necessary. • Check the fan shaft bearings for wear. Replace the bearings as necessary. • Check the supply fan belt. If the belt is frayed or worn, replace it. Refer to the "Fan Belt Adjustment" section for belt replacement and adjustments. • Verify that all wire terminal connections are tight. • Remove anycorrosion present on the exterior surfaces of the unit and repaint these areas. • Generally inspect the unit for unusual conditions (e.g., loose access panels, leaking piping connections, etc.) • Make sure that all retaining screws are reinstalled in the unit access panels once these checks are complete. • With the unit running, check and record the: ambient temperature; compressor suction and discharge pressures (each circuit); superheat (each circuit); • Record this data on an "operator's maintenance log" like the one shown in Table 20, p. 69. If the operating pressures indicate a refrigerant shortage, measure the system superheat. For guidelines, refer to the "Compressor Start -Up" section. Important: Do not release refrigerant to the atmosphere! If adding or removing refrigerant is required, the service technician must comply with all federal, state and local laws. Heating Season • Inspect the unit's air filters. If necessary, clean or replace them. • Check supply fan motor bearings; repair or replace the motor as necessary. • Inspect both the main unit control panel and heat section control box for loose electrical components and terminal connections, as well as damaged wire insulation. Make any necessary repairs. • Verify that the electric heat system operates properly. Coil Cleaning Regular coil maintenance, including annual cleaning, enhances the unit's operating efficiency by minimizing: compressor head pressure and amperage draw; evaporator water carryover; fan brake horsepower, dueto increase static pressure losses; airflow reduction. RT-SVX22V-EN 67 Maintenance At least once each year, or more often if the unit is located in a "dirty" environment, clean the evaporator and condenser coils using the instructions outlined below. Be sure to follow these instructions as closely as possible to avoid damaging the coils. Note: For units equipped with hail guards follow removal procedure listed below. Hail Guard Removal • Unlatch hail guard. • Pull thetop of the hail guard outward until the fastener studs are free of the retaining nuts. • Lift the hail guard from the lower retaining bracket and set aside. Hazardous Chemicals! Failure to follow all safety instructions below could result in death or serious injury. Coil cleaning agents can be either acidic or highly alkaline and can burn severely if contact with skin occurs. Handle chemical carefully and avoid contact with skin. ALWAYS wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) including goggles or face shield, chemical resistant gloves, boots, apron or suit as required. For personal safety refer to the cleaning agent manufacturer's Materials Safety Data Sheet and follow all recommended safe handling practices. To clean refrigerant coils, use a soft brush and a sprayer (either a garden pump -up type or a high-pressure sprayer). A high -quality detergent is also required; suggested brands include "SPREX A.C.", "OAKITE 161 "OAKITE 166" and "COILOV. If the detergent selected is strongly alkaline (ph value exceeds 8.5), add an inhibitor Microchannel (MCHE) Coils Coil Damage! Failure to follow instructions below could result in coil damage. DO NOT use any detergents with microchannel condenser coils. Use pressurized water or air ONLY, with pressure no greater than 600psi. For additional information regarding the proper microchannel coil cleaning procedure, refer to service bulletin RT-SVB83*-EN. Due to the soft material and thin walls of the MCHE coils, the traditional field maintenance method recommended for Round Tube Plate Fin (RTPF) coils does not apply to microchannel coils. Moreover, chemical cleaners area riskfactorto MCHE due to the material of the coil. The manufacturer does not recommend the use of chemical cleaners to clean microchannel coils. Using chemical cleaners could lead to warranty claims being further evaluated for validity and failure analysis. The recommended cleaning method for microchannel condenser coils is pressurized water or air with a non - pinpoint nozzle and an ECU of at least 180 with pressure no greater than 600 psi. To minimize the risk of coil damage, approach the cleaning of the coil with the pressure washer aimed perpendicular to the face of the coil. Note: For more details on Microchannel coil cleaning, please refer to bulletin RT-SVB83*-EN. Round Tube Plate Fin (RTPF) Coils Hazardous Chemicals! Failure to follow all safety instructions below could result in death or serious injury. Coil cleaning agents can be either acidic or highly alkaline and can burn severely if contact with skin occurs. Handle chemical carefully and avoid contact with skin. ALWAYS wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) including goggles or face shield, chemical resistant gloves, boots, apron or suit as required. For personal safety refer to the cleaning agent manufacturer's Materials Safety Data Sheet and follow all recommended safe handling practices. 1. Remove enough panels from the unit to gain access to the coil. 2. Protect all electrical devices such as motors and controllers from any over spray. 3. Straighten any bent coil fins with a fin comb. 4. Mix the detergent with water according to the manufacturer's instructions. If desired, heat the solution BUT DO NOT EXCEED 150°F maximum to improve its cleansing capability. Hazardous Pressures! Failure to follow safety precautions below could result in coil bursting, which could result in death or serious injury. Coils contain refrigerant under pressure. When cleaning coils, maintain coil cleaning solution temperature under 150°F to avoid excessive pressure in the coil. 5. Pour the cleaning solution into the sprayer. If a high- pressure sprayer is used: a. do not allow sprayer pressure to exceed 600 psi. b. the minimum nozzle spray angle is 15 degrees. c. maintain a minimum clearance of 6" between the sprayer nozzle and the coil. d. spray the solution perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to the coil face. 68 RT-SVX22V-EN 6. Spray the leaving -airflow side of the coil first; then spray the opposite side of the coil. Allow the cleaning solution to stand on the coil for five minutes. 7. Rinse both sides of the coil with cool, clean water. 8. Inspect both sides of the coil; if it still appears to be dirty, repeat Steps 6 and 7. 9. Reinstall all of the components and panels removed in Step 1 and any protective covers installed in step 2. Note: For units equipped with hail guards follow reinstallation procedure listed below. Hail Guard Reinstallation To reinstall the hail guard, locate the bottom of the hail guard in the lower bracket and secure it to the upper unit bracket with the attached fasteners. Note: Secure hail guard latches. Figure 71. Hail guard t LATCH PULL DOWN TO DETAIL A DISENGAGE GUARD 10. Restore the unit to its operational status and check system operation. Table 20. Sample maintenance log Maintenance Annual Maintenance Clean and repaint any corroded surface. Final Process For future reference, you may find it helpful to record the unit data requested in the blanks provided. Complete Model Number: Unit Serial Number: Wiring Diagram Numbers (from unit control panel): Connections: Schematics: Refrigerant Circuit #1 Refrigerant Circuit #2 Suct. Disch. Liquid Disch. Liquid Current Press. Press. Press. Super Sub- Compr. Suct. Press. Press. Super -Sub - Ambient Compr. Psig/ Psig/ Psig/ -heat cool. Oil Press. Psig/ Psig/ heat cool. Date Temp. F/C Oil Level kPa kPa kPa F/C F/C Level ok Psig/kPa kPa kPa F/C F/C ok low low ok ok low low ok ok low low ok ok low low ok ok low low Note: Check and record the data requested above each month during the cooling season with the unit running. RT-SVX22V-EN 69 Troubleshooting Hazardous Service Procedures! Failure to follow all precautions in this manual and on the tags, stickers, and labels could result in death or serious injury. Technicians, in order to protect themselves from potential electrical, mechanical, and chemical hazards, MUST follow precautions in this manual and on the tags, stickers, and labels, as well as the following instructions: Unless specified otherwise, disconnect all electrical power including remote disconnect and discharge all energy storing devices such as capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. ReliaTelTM Control The RTRM has the ability to provide the service personnel with some unit diagnostics and system status information. Before turning the main power disconnect switch "Off', follow the steps below to check the ReliaTel Refrigeration Module (RTRM). All diagnostics & system status information stored in the RTRM will be lost when the main power is turned "Off'. Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. To prevent injury or death from electrocution, it is the responsibility of the technician to recognize this hazard and use extreme care when performing service procedures with the electrical power energized. 1. Verify that the Liteport LED on the RTRM is burning continuously. If the LED is lit, go to Step 3. 2. If the LED is not lit, verify that 24 VAC is presence betweenJ1-1 and J1-2.If24VACispresent, proceed to Step 4. If 24 VAC is not present, check the unit main power supply, check transformer (TNS1). Proceed to Step 3 if necessary. 3. Utilizing "Method 1" or "Method 2" in the "System Status Diagnostic" section, check the following: • System status • Heating status • Cooling status If a System failure is indicated, proceed to Step 4. If no failures are indicated, proceed to Step 5. 4. If System failure is indicated, recheck Step 1 and Step 2. If the LED is not lit in Step 1, and 24 VAC is present in Step 2, the RTRM has failed. Replace the RTRM. 5. If no failures are indicated, use one of the TEST mode procedures described in the "Unit Start -Up" section to start the unit. This procedure will allow you to check all of the RTRM outputs, and all of the external controls (relays, contactors, etc.) that the RTRM outputs energize, for each respective mode. Proceed to Step 6. Step the system through all of the available modes, and verify operation of all outputs, controls, and modes. If problem in operation is noted in any mode, you may leave the system in that mode for up to one hour while troubleshooting. Refer to the sequence of operations for each mode, to assist in verifying proper operation. Make the necessary repairs and proceed to Step 7 and Step 8. 7. If no abnormal operating conditions appear in the test mode, exitthe test mode by turning the power "Off' at the main power disconnect switch. 8. Refer to the individual component test procedures if other microelectronic components are suspect. System Status Checkout Procedure "System Status" is checked by using one of the following two methods: Method 1 If the Zone Sensor Module (ZSM) is equipped with a remote panel with LED status indication, you can checkthe unitwithin the space. If the ZSM does not have LEDs, use Method 2. BAYSENS110*, BAYSENS109*, BAYSENS119*, BAYSENS023A all have the remote panel indication feature. The LED descriptions are listed below. Zone Sensor LED 1 (System) "On" during normal operation. "Off" if a system failure occurs or the LED fails. "Flashing" indicates test mode. Zone Sensor LED 2 (Heat) "On" when the heat cycle is operating. "Off" when the heat cycle terminates or the LED fails. "Flashing" indicates a heating failure. 70 RT-SVX22V-EN Zone Sensor LED 3 (Cool) "On" when the cooling cycle is operating. "Off" when the cooling cycle terminates or the LED fails. "Flashing" indicates a cooling failure. Zone Sensor LED 4 (Service) "On" indicates a clogged filter. "Off" during normal operation. "Flashing" indicates an evaporator fan or condensate overflow failure. Below is the complete listing of failure indication causes. System failure Check the voltage between terminals 6 and 9 on J6, it should read approximately 32 VDC. If no voltage is present, a System failure has occurred. Refer to Step 4 in the previous section for the recommended troubleshooting procedure. Cooling Failure • Cooling and heating set point (slide pot) on the zone sensor has failed. Refer to the "Zone Sensor Test Procedure" section. • Zone temperature thermistor ZTEMP on ZTS failed. Refer to the "Zone Sensor Test Procedure" section. • CC1 or CC2 24 VAC control circuit has opened, check CC1 & CC2 coils, and any of the controls below that apply to the unit (HPC1, HPC2). • LPC1 has opened during the 3 minute minimum "on time" during 4 consecutive compressor starts, check LPC1 or LPC2 by testing voltage between the J 1-1 & J3- 2 terminals on the RTRM and ground. If 24 VAC is present, the LPC's has not tripped. If no voltage is present, LPC's has tripped. Service Failure • If the supplyfan proving switch hasclosed,the unitwill not operate (when connected to RTOM), check the fan motor, belts, and proving switch. • Clogged filter switch has closed, check the filters. • If the condensate overflow switch is closed, the unit will not operate. Make sure the float switch is not in a tripped condition, and check for an "open" between wires connecting to RTOM J6-1, J6-2 (ReliaTeIT°^ controls). Simultaneous Heat and Cool Failure • Emergency Stop is activated Method 2 The second method for determining system status is done by checking voltage readings at the RTRM (J6). The system indication descriptions and the approximate voltages are listed below. Troubleshooting System Failure • Measure the voltage between terminals J6-9 & J6-6. • Normal Operation = approximately 32 VDC • System Failure = less than 1 VDC, approximately 0.75 VDC • Test Mode = voltage alternates between 32 VDC & 0.75 VDC Heat Failure • Measure the voltage between terminals J6-7 & J6-6. • Heat Operating = approximately 32 VDC • Heat Off = less than 1 VDC, approximately 0.75 VDC • Heating Failure =voltage alternates between 32 VDC & 0.75 VDC Cool Failure • Measure the voltage between terminals J6-8 & J6-6. • Cool Operating = approximately 32 VDC • Cool Off = less than 1 VDC, approximately 0.75 VDC • Cooling Failure=voltage alternates between 32 VDC & 0.75 VDC Service Failure • Measure the voltage between terminals J6-10 & J6-6. • Clogged Filter = Approximately 32 VDC. • Normal = Less than 1 VDC, approximately 0.75 VDC Fan Failure=voltage alternates between 32 VDC &0.75 VDC. To use LED's for quick status information at the unit, purchase a BAYSENS110* ZSM and connect wires with alligator clamps to terminals 6 through 10. Connected each respective terminal wire (6through 10)from theZone Sensor to the unit J6 terminals 6 through 10. Note: If the system is equipped with a programmable zone sensor, (BAYSENS119*, or BAYSENS023A), the LED indicators will not function while the BAYSENS110* is connected. Resetting Cooling and Ignition Lockouts Cooling Failures and Heating Lockouts are reset in an identical manner. Method 1 explains resetting the system from the space; Method 2 explains resetting the system at the unit. Note: Before resetting Cooling Failures and Ignition Lockouts check the Failure Status Diagnostics by the methods previously explained. Diagnosticswill be lost when the power to the unit is disconnected. Method 1 To reset the system from the space, turn the "Mode" selection switch at the zone sensor to the "Off' position. After approximately 30 seconds, turn the "Mode" RT-SVX22V-EN 71 Troubleshooting selection switch to the desired mode, i.e. Heat, Cool or Auto. Method 2 To reset the system at the unit, cycle the unit power by turning the disconnect switch "Off" and then "On". Lockouts can be cleared through the building management system. Refer to the building management system instructions for more information. Zone Temperature Sensor (ZTS) Service Indicator The ZSM SERVICE LED is a generic indicator, that will signal the closing of a Normally Open switch at any time, providing the Indoor Motor (IDM) is operating. This indicator is usually used to indicate a clogged filter, or an air side fan failure. The RTRM will ignore the closing of this Normally Open switch for 2 (±1) minutes. This helps prevent nuisance SERVICE LED indications. The exception is the LED will flash 40 seconds after the fan is turned "On" if the Fan Proving Switch is not made. Clogged Filter Switch This LED will remain lit the entire time that the Normally Open switch is closed. The LED will be turned off immediately after resetting the switch (to the Normally Open position), or any time that the IDM is turned "Off". If the switch remains closed, and the IDM is turned "On", the SERVICE LED will be turned "On" again afterthe 2 (±1) minute ignore delay. This LED being turned "On", will have no other affect on unit operation. It is an indicator only. Fan Failure Switch When the "Fan Failure" switch is wired to the RTOM, the LED will remain flashing the entire time the fan proving switch is closed, indicating a fan failure, and itwill shutthe unit operations down. Condensate Overflow Switch When the "Condensate Overflow Switch" is closed, a drain pan overflow condition is indicated and it will shut unit operations down. Zone Temperature Sensor (ZTS) Test Note: These procedures are not for programmable or digital models and are conducted with the Zone Sensor Module electrically removed from the system. Test 1 - Zone Temperature Thermistor (ZTEMP) This component is tested by measuring the resistance between terminals 1 and 2 on the Zone Temperature Sensor. Below are some typical indoor temperatures, and corresponding resistive values. Test 2 - Cooling Set Point (CSP) and Heating Set Point (HSP) Table 21. Cooling setpoint and heating setpoint Zone Temperature Nominal ZTEMP Resistance 500 F 10.0°C 19.9 K-Ohms 55o F 12.8oC 15.60C 17.47 K-Ohms 15.3 K-Ohms 60o F 650 F 18.30C 13.49 K-Ohms 700 F 21.1°C 11.9 K-Ohms 750 F 23.90C 10.50 K-Ohms 800 F 26.7oC 9.3 K-Ohms 85o F 29.4oC 8.25 K-Ohms 90o F 32.2oC 7.3 K-Ohms The resistance of these potentiometers are measured between the following ZSM terminals. Refer to the chart above for approximate resistances at the given setpoints. Cool SP = Terminals 2 and 3 Range = 100 to 900 Ohms approximate Heat SP = Terminals 2 and 5 Range = 100 to 900 Ohms approximate Test 3 - System Mode and Fan Selection The combined resistance ofthe Mode selection switch and the Fan selection switch can be measured between terminals 2 and 4 on the Zone Sensor. The possible switch combinations are listed below with their corresponding resistance values. Test 4 - LED Indicator Test, (SYS ON, HEAT, COOL & SERVICE) Method 1 Testing the LED using a meter with diode test function. Test both forward and reverse bias. Forward bias should measure a voltage drop of 1.5 to 2.5 volts, depending on your meter. Reverse bias will show an Over Load, or open circuit indication if LED is functional. Method 2 Testing the LED with an analog Ohmmeter. Connect Ohmmeter across LED in one direction, then reverse the leads for the opposite direction. The LED should have at least 100 times more resistance in reverse direction, as compared with the forward direction. If high resistance in 72 RT-SVX22V-EN both directions, LED is open. If low in both directions, LED is shorted. Method 3 To test LED's with ZSM connected to unit, test voltages at LED terminals on ZSM. A measurement of 32 VDC, across an unlit LED, means the LED has failed. Relative Humidity Sensor Test This component is measured by measuring the mA output signal on the Relative Humidity Sensor. Verify accuracy of the sensor annually. If the output reading is 0 mA, first verify that power is applied to the sensor. A reading of 4 mA corresponds to 0% RH and 20 mA corresponds to 100% RH. RH mA 30 8.8 40 10.4 50 12.0 60 13.6 70 15.2 80 16.8 Note: Measurements should be made from LED common (ZSM terminal 6 to respective LED terminal). Refer to the Zone Sensor Module (ZSM) Terminal Identification table at the beginning of this section. Programmable & Digital Zone Sensor Test Testing serial communication voltage 1. Verify 24 VAC is present between terminals J6-14 & J6- 11. 2. Disconnect wires from J6-11 and J6-12. Measure the voltage between J6-11 and J6-12, should be about 32 VDC. 3. Reconnect wires to terminals J6-11 and J6-12. Measure voltage again between J6-11 and J6-12, voltage should flash high and low every 0.5 seconds. The voltage on the low end will measure about 19 VDC, while the voltage on the high end will measure from approximately 24 to 38 VDC. 4. Verify all modes of operation, by running the unit through all of the steps in Table 11, p. 48. 5. After verifying proper unit operation, exit the test mode. Turn the fan on continuously at the ZSM, by pressing the button with the fan symbol. If the fan comes on and runs continuously, the ZSM is good. If you are not able to turn the fan on, the ZSM is defective. Troubleshooting ReliaTelTr' Refrigeration Module (RTRM) Default Chart If the RTCI loses input from the building management system, the RTRM will control in the default mode after approximately 15 minutes. If the RTRM loses the Heating and Cooling setpoint input, the RTRM will control in the default mode instantaneously. The temperature sensing thermistor in the Zone Sensor Module is the only component required for the "Default Mode" to operate. Unit Operation without a Zone Sensor This procedure is for temporary operation only. The economizer and condenser fan cycling functions are disabled. Hazardous Voltage! Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. 1. Open and Lock the unit disconnect switch. 2. Remove the Outside Air Sensor (OAS) from the condenser section of unit. 3. Use two (2) wire nuts, to individually cap the wires. 4. Locate the RTRM (J6). Connect two (2) wires to terminals J6-1 and 2. 5. Connect the sensor (OAS) using two wire nuts to the two (2) field supplied wires that were connected to terminals 1 and 2 on J6. Unit Economizer Control (ECA) Troubleshooting ReliaTelT11 Control Verify Economizer Status by Economizer Actuator (ECA) LED indicator: • OFF: No Power or Failure • ON: Normal, OK to Economize • Slow Flash: Normal, Not OK to Economize • Fast Flash - 1/2 Second On / 2 Seconds Off: • Error Code: Communications Failure • Pulse Flash: 2 Seconds On / 1/2 Second Off: • Error Code: • 1 Flash: Actuator Fault • 2 Flashes: CO2 Sensor • 3 Flashes: RA Humidity Sensor • 4 Flashes: RA Temp Sensor RT-SVX22V-EN 73 Troubleshooting • 5 Flashes: OA Quality Sensor • 6 Flashes: OA Humidity Sensor • 7 Flashes: OA Temp Sensor • 8 Flashes: MA Temp Sensor • 9 Flashes: RAM Fault • 10 Flashes: ROM Fault • 11 Flashes: EEPROM Fault Electromechanical Control Live Electrical Components! Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. To prevent injury or death from electrocution, it is the responsibility of the technician to recognize this hazard Table 22. Fault detection and diagnostic codes and use extreme care when performing service procedures with the electrical power energized. Cooling Failure 1. Cooling and heating set point (slide pot) on the thermostat has failed. 2. CC1 or CC2 24 VAC control circuit has opened, check CC1 & CC2 coils, and any of the controls below that apply to the unit (HPC1, HPC2, LPC1, LPC2, FrostatT°° ), Resetting Cooling and Heating Lockouts Cooling Failures and Heating Lockouts are reset in an identical manner. Method 1 explains resetting the system from the space; Method 2 explains resetting the system at the unit. Method 1 To reset the system from the space, turn the "Mode" selection switch at the thermostat to the "Off" position. After approximately 30 seconds, turn the "Mode" selection switch to the desired mode, i.e. Heat, Cool or Auto. Method 2 To reset the system at the unit, cycle the unit power by turning the disconnect switch "Off' and then "On". Primary Fault Codes Information Code Mixed Air Outdoor Economizer RTEM Pressure Temp Sensor Airflow Space Unit Fails Unit Damper Failures Temp Temp Actuator Comm Dead band Fail Sensor Fail Press Dead to Economizing Position 0d Sensor Sensor Fault Fail Fail (If Used) (If Used) band Fail Economize When It Indicated Fail Fail (If Used) (If Used) Should Not Damper stuck X X(a) X(a)* X(a) X X at Minimum Damper Stuck X X(a) X(a) X(a) X X Open Mixed Sensor X X Failure Supply Air X X Sensor Failure Outdoor Air Temperature X X Fail Power loss to X RTEM Failed or Power Loss to X X Actuator Mechanical Failure of X Actuator (a) If goes out of range. 74 RT-SVX22V-EN Troubleshooting Table 23. Low leak economizer sensor values Sensor Values Data Temp OF Resistance (K ohms) Temp OF Resistance (K ohms) Temp OF Resistance (K ohms) 40 26.097 54 17.847 68 12.435 41 25.383 55 17.382 69 12.126 42 24.690 56 16.930 70 11.827 43 24.018 57 16.491 71 11.535 44 23.367 58 16.066 72 11.252 45 22.736 59 15.654 73 10.977 46 22.132 60 15.253 74 10.709 47 21.530 61 14.864 75 10.448 48 20.953 62 14.486 76 10.194 49 20.396 63 14.119 77 9.949 50 19.854 64 13.762 78 9.710 51 19.330 65 13.416 79 9.477 52 18.821 66 13.078 80 9.250 53 18.327 67 12.752 81 9.030 Unit Economizer Control (ECA) Test Procedures Electromechanical Control This series of tests will allow you to diagnose, and determine where, and if a problem exists in the system economizer operation. Test 1 determines if the problem is in the Unit, or if it is in the ECA. Test 2 tests sensor inputs. Test 3 tests the resistors and sensors. Conduct the tests in numerical order until problem is found. Test 1 Verifying that the economizer actuator (ECA) is functional: 1. Using the "Test Mode" described in the "System Start - Up" section, put the unit into the economizer mode and verify that the economizer actuator (ECA) drives fully open (approximately 90 seconds). 2. If the ECA is notdriving the dampers, verify that 24VAC is between the ECA terminals TR and TR1 is present. If 24 volts is not present, a wiring or terminal problem exists from the control transformer. Make any necessary repairs, see wiring diagrams to troubleshoot. 3. If 24 VAC is present, adjust the minimum position potentiometer fully clockwise. If the actuator does not drive, the economizer actuator is bad. Replace the ECA. Test 2 Testing the ECA resistors and sensors 1. Testing the Mixed Air Sensor (MAS). Disconnect the wires connected to T and T1 on the ECA, and; a. Measure the resistance of the sensor between the wires 180B and 181 B. b. Measure the temperature at the MAS location. Using the Temperature versus Resistance chart, verify the accuracy of the MAS. Replace the sensor if it is out of range. 2. Testing the Outdoor Air Switch. If the temperature is above 60 degrees, it will need to be chilled. Measure the resistance of the sensor on the ECA SO and +. The resistance should be approximately 390 Ohms. Replace the Switch if it is open. Replace the ECA if it is out of range. 3. Testing the R1 Resistance. Measure the resistance of the sensor on the ECA SR and +. The resistance should be approximately 420 Ohms. Replace the ECA if it is out of range. 4. Testing the R2 Resistance. Measure the resistance of the sensor on the ECA P and P1. The resistance should be approximately 130 Ohms. Replace the ECA if it is out of range. RT-SVX22V-EN 75 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting procedures for Direct Drive Plenum Fan Prior to troubleshooting, verify all wiring and wiring connections. The motor has internal protections that will shut down the motor before damage occurs. A power cycle is required to reset some of the internal protections. Before proceeding, power down unit for minuteandthen power on. Please follow steps sequentially unless directed differently in solution. Refer to RT-SVP08*-EN for a Comprehensive Troubleshooting Guide. 76 RT-SVX22V-EN Unit Wiring Diagrams Numbers Note: Wiring diagrams can be accessed using e-Library by entering the diagram number in the literature order number search field or by contacting technical support. Table 24. Unit wiring diagram numbers Schematic Type Drawing Number Description Control ReliaTelTM 230,460,575V 1213-1640 TSC(036-060)G ReliaTel— controls Control ReliaTellm 230,460,575V 4366-7216 THC(037-067) Control ReliaTelTM 230,460,575V 4366-4568 T(S,H)C(036-060)E/F(1,3,4), ReliaTel Controls, X13 IDM Control ReliaTelTM 230,460,575V 4366-1026 T(S,H)C(036-090)E/F(3,4,W), ReliaTel Controls, Belt -Drive IDM Control ReliaTelTM 230,460,575V 1213-2388 TSC(072-090)H ReliaTel Cooling Control ReliaTelTM 230,460,575V 1213-2390 TSC(092-120)H ReliaTel Cooling Control ReliaTelTM 230,460,575V 4366-1044 TSC(092,102)F(3,4,W), ReliaTel Controls Control ReliaTelTM 230,460,575V 4366-7433 THC(074-102)F(3,4),TSC120F(3,4,W), ReliaTel Controls Control ReliaTelTM 230,460,575V 1213-2406 THC120F(3,4), ReliaTel Controls Control Electromechanical 230,460,575V 1213-1643 TSC(036-060)G Electromechanical Controls Control Electromechanical 230,460,575V 4366-8350 T(S,H)C(036-060)E,F(1,3,4), Electromechanical Controls, X13 IDM Control Electromechanical 230,460,575V 4366-8348 T(S,H)C(036-060)E,F(3,4,W), Electromechanical Controls, Belt -Drive IDM Control Electromechanical 230,460,575V 4366-8347 T(S,H)C(072,090)F(3,4,W), Electromechanical Controls Control Electromechanical 230,460,575V 1213-2413 TSC(072-120)H Electromechanical Cooling Control Electromechanical 230,460,575V 4366-8349 TSC(092,102)F(3,4,W), Electromechanical Controls Control Electromechanical 230,460,575V 4366-8352 THC(074-102)F(3,4),TSC120F(3,4,W), Electromechanical Controls Control Electromechanical 230,460,575V 1213-2405 THC120F(3,4), Electromechanical Controls Power ReliaTel 230V 1213-1636 TSC(036-060)G3, ReliaTel Controls Power ReliaTel 230V 4366-7177 THC(037-067) (230V) Power ReliaTel 230V 4366-4574 T(S,H)C(036-060)E,F (1-Phase) Power ReliaTel 230V 4366-5161 THC(036-060)E,F (3-Phase), X13 IDM Power ReliaTel 230V 4366-1037 TSC(092,102)F Power ReliaTel 230V 1213-2278 (THC074-102, TSC120)F (230V), ReliaTel Controls Power ReliaTel 230V 1213-2406 THC120F, ReliaTel Controls 460V and/or Power ReliaTel 1213-1636 TSC(036-060)G4, ReliaTel Controls 575V 460V and/or Power ReliaTel 1213-1661 TSC(036-060)GW 575V 460V and/or Power ReliaTel 4366-7178 THC(037-067) (460V) 575V 460V and/or Power ReliaTel 4366-5161 THC(036-060)E,F (3-Phase), X13 IDM 575V 460V and/or Power ReliaTel 4366-1037 TSC(092,102)F 575V 460V and/or Power ReliaTel 1213-2278 (THC074-102, TSC120)F (460V), ReliaTel Controls 575V 460V and/or Power ReliaTel 1213-2279 TSC120F (575V), ReliaTel Controls 575V 460V and/or Power ReliaTel 4366-1020 T(YS,H)C(036-090)E3,4,W, ReliaTelTI Controls 575V RT-SVX22V-EN 77 Unit Wiring Diagrams Numbers Table 24. Unit wiring diagram numbers (continued) Schematic Type Drawing Number Description 46OV and/or Power ReliaTel 1213-2406 THC120F, ReliaTel Controls 575V Power Electromechanical 23OV 1213-1636 TSC(036-060)G3, Electromechanical Controls Power Electromechanical 23OV 1213-2405 THC120F, Electromechanical Controls Power Electromechanical 23OV 1213-2273 THC(074-102)F, TSC120, Electromechanical Controls Power Electromechanical 46OV and/or 1213-1636 TSC(036-060)G4, Electromechanical Controls 575V 46OV and/or Power Electromechanical 1213-1661 TSC(036-060)GW 575V 46OV and/or Power Electromechanical 1213-2405 THC120F, Electromechanical Controls 575V 46OV and/or Power Electromechanical 1213-2273 THC(074-102)F4,TSC(120)F4, Electromechanical Controls 575V 46OV and/or Power Electromechanical 1213-2274 TSC120FW, Electromechanical Controls 575V 46O575V and/or Electromechanical 4366-1020 T(YS,H)C(036-090)E3,4,W, Electromechanical Controls Power Electromechanical/ Power ReliaTelTM 23O,46O,575V 1213-2384 TSC(072-120)H Constant Volume IDM Electromechanical/ Power ReliaTelTM 23O,46O,575V 1213 2385 TSC(072-120)H Multispeed IDM, SZVAV, MZVAV Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 1213-1668 TSC(036-060)G3, 230V ReliaTel Controls Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-7336 THC(037) (230V) Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-8243 THC037E, 17 Plus with Multi -Zone VAV Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-7338 THC(047-067) (230V) Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-8245 THC (047,067)E, 17 Plus with Multi -Zone VAV Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-8251 THC(074-120)E, ReliaTel Controls with Multi -Zone VAV Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-4559 T(S,H)C(036-060)E,F (I -Phase), ReliaTel Controls Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-5182 THC(036-060)E,F (3-Phase), ReliaTel Controls, X13 IDM Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-1509 T(S,H)C(036-060)E,F (3-Phase), ReliaTel Controls, Belt -Drive IDM Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-1541 T(S,H)C(072,090)F, ReliaTel Controls Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-7441 THC120F, ReliaTel Controls Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-1534 TSC(092,102)F, ReliaTel Controls Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-7443 THC(074-102)F, TSC120F, ReliaTel Controls Connection ReliaTelTM 23OV 4366-8252 THC(074-102)F, TSC120F, ReliaTel Controls with Multi -Zone VAV 46OV and/or Connection ReliaTelTM 1213-1668 TSC(036-060)G4, 460V ReliaTel Controls 575V 46OV and/or Connection ReliaTelTM 1213-1670 TSC(036-060)GW, ReliaTel Controls 575V Connection ReliaTelTM 46OV and/or 4366-8252 THC(074-102)F, TSC120F, ReliaTel Controls with Multi -Zone 575V VAV 46OV and/or Connection ReliaTelTM 4366-7337 THC(037) (460V) 575V 46OV and/or Connection ReliaTelTM 4366-8244 THC037E, 17 Plus with Multi -Zone VAV 575V 46OV and/or Connection ReliaTelTM 4366-7339 THC(047-067) (460V) 575V Connection ReliaTelTM 46OV and/or 4366-8246 THC(047,067)E, 17 Plus with Multi -Zone VAV 575V 78 RT-SVX22V-EN Unit Wiring Diagrams Numbers Table 24. Unit wiring diagram numbers (continued) Schematic Type Drawing Number Description 460V and/or Connection ReliaTell" 4366-5182 THC(036-060)E,F (3-Phase), ReliaTel Controls, X13 IDM 575V Connection ReliaTel'" 460V and/or 4366-1509 T(S,H)C(036-060)E,F (3-Phase), ReliaTel Controls, Belt -Drive 575V IDM 460V and/or Connection ReliaTelTM 4366-1541 T(S,H)C(072,090)F, ReliaTel Controls 575V Connection ReliaTelTM 460V and/or 4366-7441 THC120F, ReliaTel Controls 575V 460V and/or Connection ReliaTelTM 4366-8251 THC(074-120)E, ReliaTel Controls with Multi -Zone VAV 575V 460V and/or Connection ReliaTelTM 4366-1534 TSC(092,102)F, ReliaTel Controls 575V 460V and/or Connection ReliaTelTM 4366-7443 (THC074-102, TSC120)F, (460V), ReliaTel Controls 575V 460V and/or Connection ReliaTelTM 4366-7445 TSC120F (575V), ReliaTel Controls 575V Connection ReliaTelTM 460V and/or 4366-8253 TSC120F (575V), ReliaTel Controls with Multi -Zone VAV 575V Connection ReliaTelTM 230,460,575V 1213-2662 TSC(072-090)H ReliaTel Connection ReliaTelTM 230,460,575V 1213-2663 TSC(092-120)H ReliaTel Connection Electromechanical 230V 1213-1669 TSC(036-060)G3, Electromechanical Controls Connection Electromechanical 230V 4366-8366 T(S,H)C(036-060)E,F (I -Phase), Electromechanical Controls Connection Electromechanical 230V 4366-8367 THC(036-060)E,F (3-Phase), Electromechanical Controls, X13 IDM Connection Electromechanical 230V 4366-8363 T(S,H)C(036-060)E,F (3-Phase), Electromechanical Controls, Belt -Drive IDM Connection Electromechanical 230V 4366-8365 T(S,H)C(072,090)F, Electromechanical Controls Connection Electromechanical 230V 4366-8368 THC120F, Electromechanical Controls Connection Electromechanical 230V 4366-8364 TSC(092,102)F, Electromechanical Controls Connection Electromechanical 230V 4366-8369 (THC074-102, TSC120)F, (230V), Electromechanical Controls Connection Electromechanical 230,460,575V 1213-2660 TSC(072-102)H Electromechanical Connection Electromechanical 230,460,575V 1213-2661 TSC(092-120)H Electromechanical 460V and/or Connection Electromechanical 1213-1669 TSC(036-060)G4, Electromechanical Controls 575V 460V and/or Connection Electromechanical 1213-1671 TSC(036-060)GW, Electromechanical Controls 575V Connection Electromechanical 460V and/or 4366-8367 THC(036-060)E,F (3-Phase), Electromechanical Controls, X13 575V IDM Connection Electromechanical 460V and/or 4366-8363 T(S,H)C(036-060)E,F (3-Phase), Electromechanical Controls, 575V Belt -Drive IDM Connection Electromechanical 460V and/or 4366-8365 T(S,H)C(072,090)F, Electromechanical Controls 575V 460V and/or Connection Electromechanical 4366-8368 THC120F, Electromechanical Controls 575V 460V and/or Connection Electromechanical 4366-8364 TSC(092,102)F, Electromechanical Controls 575V 460V and/or Connection Electromechanical 4366-8369 (THC074-102, TSC120)F (460V), Electromechanical Controls 575V 460V and/or Connection Electromechanical 4366-8370 TSC120F (575V), Electromechanical Controls 575V RT-SVX22V-EN 79 Limited Warranty Electric Air Conditioner TCD, TCH, TSC and THC (Parts Only) Models Less Than 20 Tons for Commercial Use* This warranty is extended by Trane to the original purchaser and to any succeeding owner of the real property to which the Electric/ Electric Air Conditioner is originally affixed, and applies to products purchased and retained for use within the U.S.A. and Canada. There is no warranty against corrosion, erosion or deterioration. If any part of your Electric/ Electric Air Conditioner fails because of a manufacturing defect within one year from the date of the original purchase, Warrantor will furnish without charge the required replacement part. In addition, if the sealed motor -compressor fails because of a manufacturing defect within the second through fifth year from the date of original purchase, Warrantor will furnish without charge the required replacement compressor. Warrantor's obligations and liabilities underthis warranty are limited to furnishing F.O.B. Warrantor factory or warehouse at Warrantor designated shipping point, freight allowed to Buyer's city, replacement parts for Warrantor's products covered under this warranty. Warrantor shall not be obligated to pay for the cost of lost refrigerant. No liability shall attach to Warrantor until products have been paid for and then liability shall be limited solely to the purchase price of the equipment under warranty shown to be defective. THE WARRANTYAND LIABILITYSET FORTH HEREIN ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND LIABILITIES, WHETHER IN CONTRACTOR IN NEGLIGENCE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN LAW OR IN FACT, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR USE, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL WARRANTOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. Trane 2701 Wilma Rudolph Blvd. Clarksville, TN 37040-1008 Attention: Manager, Product Service G W-606-4800 * This warranty isforcommercial usage of said equipment and not applicable when the equipment is used for a residential application. Commercial use is any application where the end purchaser uses the product for other than personal, family or household purposes. **A 5 year limited warranty is provided for the optional "Low Leak" economizer when combined with the additional FDD (Fault Detection & Diagnostics) option. 80 RT-SVX22V-EN Trane and American Standard create comfortable, energy efficient indoor environments for commercial and residential applications. For more information, please visit trane.com or americanstandardair.com. Trane and American Standard have a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserve the right to change design and specifications without notice. We are committed to using environmentally conscious print practices. RT-SVX22V-EN 02 Apr 2020 Supersedes RT-SVX22U-EN (Mar 2018) ©2020 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance , Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioners Foundation" Gas/Electric 3 to 5 Tons, 60Hz Model Numbers: GBC036-060 Only qualified personnel should install and service the equipment. The installation, starting up, and servicing of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous and requires specific knowledge and training. Improperly installed, adjusted or altered equipment by an unqualified person could result in death or serious injury. When working on the equipment, observe all precautions in the literature and on the tags, stickers, and labels that are attached to the equipment. January 2019 RT-SVX058C-EN ��Ingersoll Rand Introduction Read this manual thoroughly before operating or servicing this unit. Warnings, Cautions, and Notices Safety advisories appear throughout this manual as required. Your personal safety and the proper operation of this machine depend upon the strict observance of these precautions. The three types of advisories are defined as follows Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It could also be used to alert against unsafe practices. Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or property -damage only accidents. Important Environmental Concerns Scientific research has shown that certain man-made chemicals can affect the earth's naturally occurring stratospheric ozone layer when released to the atmosphere. In particular, several of the identified chemicals that may affect the ozone layer are refrigerants that contain Chlorine, Fluorine and Carbon (CFCs) and those containing Hydrogen, Chlorine, Fluorine and Carbon (HCFCs). Not all refrigerants containing these compounds have the same potential impact to the environment. Trane advocatesthe responsible handling of all refrigerants -including industry replacements for CFCs such as HCFCs and HFCs. Important Responsible Refrigerant Practices Trane believes that responsible refrigerant practices are important to the environment, our customers, and the air conditioning industry. All technicians who handle refrigerants must be certified. The Federal Clean Air Act (Section 608) sets forth the requirements for handling, reclaiming, recovering and recycling of certain refrigerants and the equipment that is used in these service procedures. In addition, some states or municipalities may have additional requirements that must also be adhered to for responsible management of refrigerants. Know the applicable laws and follow them. Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state electrical codes. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Required! Failure to wear proper PPE for the job being undertaken could result in death or serious injury. Technicians, in order to protect themselves from potential electrical, mechanical, and chemical hazards, MUST follow precautions in this manual and on the tags, stickers, and labels, as well as the instructions below: Before installing/servicing this unit, technicians MUST put on all PPE required for the work being undertaken (Examples; cut resistant gloves/sleeves, butyl gloves, safety glasses, hard hat/bump cap, fall protection, electrical PPE and arc flash clothing). ALWAYS refer to appropriate Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)/Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and OSHA guidelines for proper PPE. When working with or around hazardous chemicals, ALWAYS refer to the appropriate MSDS/SDS and OSHA/GHS (Global Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals) guidelines for information on allowable personal exposure levels, proper respiratory protection and handling instructions. If there is a risk of energized electrical contact, arc, or flash, technicians MUST put on all PPE in accordance with OSHA, NFPA 70E, or other country -specific requirements for arc flash protection, PRIOR to servicing the unit. NEVER PERFORM ANY SWITCHING, DISCONNECTING, OR VOLTAGE TESTING WITHOUT PROPER ELECTRICAL PPE AND ARC FLASH CLOTHING. ENSURE ELECTRICAL METERS AND EQUIPMENT ARE PROPERLY RATED FOR INTENDED VOLTAGE. © 2019 Ingersoll Rand RT-SVX058C-EN Introduction Follow EHS Policies! Failure to follow instructions below could result in death or serious injury. • All Ingersoll Rand personnel must follow Ingersoll Rand Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) policies when performing work such as hot work, electrical, fall protection, lockout/tagout, refrigerant handling, etc. All policies can be found on the BOS site. Where local regulations are more stringent than these policies, those regulations supersede these policies. • Non -Ingersoll Rand personnel should always follow local regulations. Water Damage! Non -factory penetrations through the base of this unit are not allowed. Any penetration in the base of the unit may affect the water tight integrity of the unit and lead to water leaks into the conditioned space. Failure to follow instructions could result in equipment and property damage. Copyright This document and the information in it are the property of Trane, and may not be used or reproduced in whole or in part without written permission. Trane reserves the right to revisethis publication at anytime, and to make changes to its content without obligation to notify any person of such revision or change. Trademarks All trademarks referenced in this document are the trademarks of their respective owners. Should equipment failure occur, contact a qualified service organization with qualified, experienced HVAC technicians to properly diagnose and repair this equipment. Revision History • Added the Locking Safety Device with Anti -Short Cycle Timer' feature. • Updated the'Generallnformation','Troubleshooting', and 'Wiring Diagrams' section. RT-SVX058C-EN Table of Contents Model Number Description ............... 5 General Information ..................... 6 Unit Inspection ........................ 6 Precautionary Measures ................ 6 Storage .............................. 6 Unit Description ....................... 7 System Input Devices & Functions ....... 7 Sensors .............................. 7 Initiation of Operating Modes - JADE Control- ler................................... 8 Dimensional Data ........................ 9 Unit Weights ........................... 14 Rigging.............................. 14 Installation ............................. 15 Unit Foundation ...................... 15 General Unit Requirements ............ 15 Main Unit Power ..................... 17 Factory -Mounted Unit Options ........... 23 Unit Disconnect (FIYUDC) .............. 23 Through the Base Gas Utility Option .... 24 Pre Start ............................... 25 Verifying Proper Air Flow (Units with Belt Drive Indoor Fan) ..................... 25 Electromechanical Controls Test Procedure ....................... 25 Start Up ............................... 26 Standard Economizer Start -Up ......... 26 LLE Controls Test Procedure ........... 26 Compressor Start -Up ................. 26 Heating Start -Up ..................... 27 Final System Set Up .................. 27 Maintenance ........................... 28 Fan Belt Adjustment —Belt Drive Units .. 28 Monthly Maintenance ................. 28 Final Process ......................... 30 Troubleshooting ........................ 31 Standard Troubleshooting ............. 31 Low Leak Economizer (LLE) Troubleshooting ................. 32 Resetting Cooling and Heating Lockouts ..32 Unit Economizer Control (ECA) ..........33 Wiring Diagrams ........................34 Warranty...............................35 Central Air Conditioner .................35 4 RT-SVX058C-EN Model Number Description Digit 1 — Unit Type G = Packaged Cooling, Gas heat Digit 2 — Efficiency B = ASHRAE 90.1 - 2016 Digit 3 — Airflow Configuration C = Convertible Digit 4, 5, 6 — Nominal Gross Cooling Capacity (MBh) 036 = 3 Tons 048 = 4 Tons 060 = 5 Tons Digit 7 — Major Design Sequence A Digit 8 — Voltage Selection 3 = 208-230/60/3 4 = 460/60/3 W = 575/60/3 Digit 9 — Unit Controls E = Electromechanical Digit 10 — Heating Capacity L = Gas Heat - Low M = Gas Heat - Medium X = Gas Heat - SS Ht Ex - Low Y = Gas Heat - SS Ht Ex - Medium Digit 11 — Minor Design Sequence Digit 12, 13 — Service Sequence 00 = None Digit 14 — Fresh Air Selection3 0 = No Fresh Air A = Manual Outside Air Damper 0-50% B = Motorized Outside Air Damper 0-50% C = Economizer, Dry Bulb 0-100% without Barometric Relief4 E = Economizer, Reference Enthalpy 0-100%without Barometric Relief4 G = Economizer, Comparative Enthalpy 0-100% without Barometric Relief4 J = Downflow Low Leak Economizer, Dry Bulb w/o Barometric Relief4 L = Downflow Low Leak Economizer, Reference Enthalpy w/o Barometric Relief4 N = Downflow Low Leak Economizer, Comparative Enthalpy w/o Barometric Relief4 K = Downflow Low Leak Economizer, Dry Bulb W/ Barometric Relief M = Downflow Low Leak Economizer, Reference Enthalpy, W/ Barometric Relief P = Downflow Low Leak Economizer, Comparative Enthalpy, W/ Barometric Relief Digit 15 — Supply Fan/Drive Type/Motor 0 = Standard Motor 1 = Oversized Motor Digit 16 — Not Used Digit 17 — Condenser Coil Protection 0 = Standard Coil 4 = CompleteCoat'" Condenser Coil Digit 18 — Through The Base Provisions 0 = No Through The Base Provisions A = Through The Base Electric B = Through -The -Base Gasi C = Through -the -Base Electric/Gas Digit 19 — Disconnect Switch 0 = No Disconnect 1 = Unit Mounted Non -Fused Disconnect Switchz Digit 20— Not Used Digit 21— Not Used Digit 22— Not Used Digit 23— Not Used Digit 24— Not Used Digit 25 - System Monitoring Controls 0 = No Monitoring Controls A = Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch Digit 26 - System Monitoring Controls 0 = No Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD) B = Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD)5 Model Number Notes 1. Some field set up required. 2. Must be ordered with Through - the -Base Electrical option. 3. All Factory Installed Options are Built -to -Order. Check order services for estimated production cycle. 4. Factory installed economizers only available in downflow configuration. 5. Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD) is available on Low Leak Economizers only. RT-SVX058C-EN 5 General Information Overview of Manual Note: One copy of this document ships inside the control panel of each unit and is customer property. It must be retained by the unit's maintenance personnel. This booklet describes proper installation, operation, and maintenance procedures for air cooled systems. By carefully reviewing the information within this manual and following the instructions, the risk of improper operation and/or component damage will be minimized. It is important that periodic maintenance be performed to help assure trouble free operation. A maintenance schedule is provided at the end of this manual. Unit Inspection As soon as the unit arrives at the job site: • Verify that the nameplate data matches the data on the sales order and bill of lading (including electrical data). • Verify that the power supply complies with the unit nameplate specifications. • Visually inspect the exterior of the unit, including the roof, for signs of shipping damage. • Visually inspect the internal components for shipping damage as soon as possible after delivery and before it is stored. Do not walk on the sheet metal base pans. • If concealed damage is discovered, notify the carrier's terminal of damage immediately by phone and by mail. Concealed damage must be reported within 15 days. — Request an immediate joint inspection of the damage by the carrier and the consignee. — Do not remove damaged material from the receiving location. — Take photos of the damage, if possible. The owner must provide reasonable evidencethatthe damage did not occur after delivery. • Notify the appropriate sales representative before installing or repairing a damaged unit. Precautionary Measures Fiberglass Wool! Product contains fiberglass wool. Disturbing the insulation in this product during installation, maintenance or repair will expose you to airborne particles of glass wool fibers and ceramic fibers known to the state of California to cause cancer through inhalation. You MUST wear all necessary Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) including gloves, eye protection, a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator, long sleeves and pants when working with products containing fiberglass wool. Exposition to glass wool fibers without all necessary PPE equipment could result in cancer, respiratory, skin or eye irritation, which could result in death or serious injury. • Avoid breathing fiberglass dust. • Use a NIOSH approved dust/mist respirator. • Avoid contactwith the skin or eyes. Wear long-sleeved, loose -fitting clothing, gloves, and eye protection. • Wash clothes separately from other clothing: rinse washer thoroughly. • Operations such as sawing, blowing, tear -out, and spraying may generate fiber concentrations requiring additional respiratory protection. Use the appropriate NIOSH approved respiration in these situations. First Aid Measures • Eye Contact - Flush eyes with water to remove dust. If symptoms persist, seek medical attention. • Skin Contact - Wash affected areas gently with soap and warm water after handling. Storage Take precautions to prevent condensate from forming inside the unit's electrical compartments and motors if: • The unit is stored before it is installed; or, • The unit is set on the roof curb, and temporary heat is provided in the building. Isolate all side panel service entrances and base pan openings (e.g., conduit holes, S/A and R/ A openings, and flue openings) from the ambient air until the unit is ready for start-up. Note: Do not use the unit's heater for temporary heat without first completing the start-up procedure detailed under "Start Up," p. 26. The manufacturer will not assume any responsibility for equipment damage resulting from condensate accumulation on the unit's electrical and/or mechanical components. RT-SVX058C-EN Unit Description Before shipment, each unit is leak tested, dehydrated, charged with refrigerant and compressor oil, and run tested for proper control operation. Direct -drive, vertical discharge condenser fans are provided with built-in thermal overload protection. The stages of capacity control forthese units are achieved by starting the Economizer Control Actuator (ECA). Economizer Control Actuator Electromechanical Control The ECA monitors the mixed air temperature, return air temperature, minimum position setpoint (local or remote), power exhaust setpoint, CO2 setpoint, CO2, and ambient dry bulb/ enthalpy sensor or comparative humidity (return air humidity against ambient humidity) sensors, if selected, to control dampers to an accuracy of ±5 percent of stroke. The actuator is spring returned to the closed position any time that power is lost to the unit. It is capable of delivering up to 25 in•lb of torque and is powered by 24 Vac. JADE Economizer Control (For Low Leak Economizer (LLE) Only) The JADE controller is a standalone economizer controller that provides outdoor air dry-bulb economizer control standard. With optional Sylk Bus sensors, the controller can provide comparative or reference enthalpy control. Dampers are controlled to an accuracy of ±3.2 percent of stroke. The actuator is spring returned to the closed position any time that power is lost to the actuator. It is capable of delivering up to 44 in•lb of torque and is powered by 24 Vac. System Input Devices & Functions The unit must have a thermostat input in order to operate. The descriptions of the following basic input devices used within the unit are to acquaint the operator with their function as they interface with the various features. Refer to the unit's electrical schematic for the specific device connections. The following controls are available from the factory for field installation. Drain Pan Condensate Overflow Switch (Optional) This input incorporates the Condensate Overflow Switch (COF) mounted on the drain pan. When the condensate level reaches the trip point, the COF relay energizes and opens the 24VAC control circuit, disabling the unit. A delay timer prevents the unit from starting for 3 minutes. General Information Phase Monitor The Phase Monitor is a three-phase line monitor module that protects against phase loss, phase reversal and phase unbalance. It is intended to protect compressors from reverse rotation. It has an operating input voltage range of 190-600 Vac, and LED indicators for ON and FAULT. There are nofield adjustments and the modulewill automatically reset from a fault condition. Discharge Line Thermostat Control The high pressure controls and the discharge line thermostat signals are wired in series and connected to the safety input of the LSD. The compressor contactor coil is connected to the 'CC' terminal of the LSD. If the high pressure control switch orthe discharge line thermostat is open, the 24VAC signal to the SI input of the LSD is interrupted and the compressor contactor coil supply is disabled by the LSD. It has an automatic lockout. Power Exhaust Control (Optional) The power exhaust fan is started wheneverthe position of the economizer dampers meets or exceed the power exhaust setpoint when the indoor fan is on. The setpoint panel is located in the return air section and is factory set at 25% (50% for LLE). To configure the LLE controller, set EXH1 SET (or EXH1 L & EXH1 H with two -speed fan) in the SETPOINTS menu. 2- speed fan mode requires AUX2 I set as W. Evaporator Frost Control (Optional) This input incorporates the FrostatT1 control (FOS) mounted in the indoor coil and can be activated by closing a field supplied contact installed in parallel with the FOS. If this circuit is open before the compressor is started, the compressor will not be allowed to operate. Anytime this circuit is opened for 5 continuous seconds during compressor operation, the compressor for that circuit is immediately turned "Off". The compressor will not be allowed to restart for a minimum of 3 minutes should the FOS close. Locking Safety Device with Anti -Short Cycle Timer This device monitors compressor safety switch trips to prevent short cycling, protecting the compressor. A manual reset is required after a fourth safety switch trip within a 6 hour period. Sensors High Temperature Sensor (BAYFRST003* This sensor connects to the Emergency Stop Input on the LTB and provides high limit "shutdown" of the unit. The sensor is used to detect high temperatures due to fire in the air conditioning or ventilation ducts. The sensor is RT-SVX058C-EN General Information designed to mount directly to the sheet metal duct. Each kit contains two sensors. The return air duct sensor (X1310004001) is set to open at 135°F. The supply air duct sensor (X1310004002) is set to open at 240°F. The control can be reset after the temperature has been lowered approximately 25°F below the cutout setpoint. Thermostat (TCONT802AS32DA) This thermostat is a multi -stage 3 heat/2 cool, auto - changeover digital display thermostat. It is a programmable thermostat, and a 7-day programmable stat with night setback shall be available. In addition, it is wall mounted. Thermostat (TCONT402AN32DA) This thermostat is a multi -stage 3 heat/2 cool, auto changeover digital display thermostat. It is a non - programmable, wall -mounted thermostat, and it can be used for economizer operation. CO2 Sensor This optional sensor can be added for Demand Control Ventilation (DCV) functionality. On units with a low leak economizer, configure the JADE controller by setting the following parameters: SETPOINTS Menu: DCV SET = desired CO2 ppm to start DCV VENTMAX = desired maximum position w/DCV & occupied status (2-speed applications require LO & HI settings) VENTMIN =desired minimum position w/DCV & occupied status (2-speed applications require LO & HI settings) ADVANCED SETUP Menu: CO2 ZERO = set to detector's start level CO2 SPAN = detector's max level minus start level Attach the sensor to the CO2 and "R" terminals (at customer connections). Note: When using any 0-10VdcCO2sensorwiththe JADE you will need to set CO2 ZERO to 400 ppm and the CO2 SPAN to 1600 ppm in the ADVANCED SETUP menu. Occupancy Sensor A customer -supplied occupancy sensor can also be added to provide damper control based on occupied/unoccupied conditions. Low Leak Economizer Units To configure the JADE controller, set: SYSTEM SETUP menu: OCC = INPUT Attach the occupancy sensorto the OCC SENSOR wire and "R" terminal (at customer connections). The occupancy sensor must utilize a normally open contact for proper operation. If an occupancy sensor is not used, another option to controlling occupied and unoccupied status is to use the 'G' input (fan is running). Connect the G input to the OCC SENSOR wire (at customer connections). The controller will then operate in the occupied mode every time the indoor fan is running. Initiation of Operating Modes - JADE Controller TheJADE controller is ableto initiate the following modes: Compressor, Economizer, Fans, Heating System, and Cooling System. The Compressor mode is initiated by either the OAT going above the DRYBLB SET setting or by the thermostat initiating a call to cool when the damper is at 100% open. The Economizer mode is controlled by the MAT getting above the MAT SET setting while the OAT is below the DRYBLB SET setting. While the fans are not controlled by the controller, the Fan mode is dependent on what state the system is in (OCC orY1 states will cause the damperto go to a LOW fan speed damper setting, while Y2 or W states will cause the controller to open the damper to the HIGH fan speed damper setting). The Heating System mode requires an input to the AUX2-1 terminal from the thermostat, and the Cooling System mode requires an input to the Y2 IN and/or the Y1 IN terminals from the thermostat. RT-SVX058C-EN Dimensional Data Figure 1, p. 9 illustrates the minimum operating and service clearances for either a single or multiple unit installation. These clearances are the minimum distances necessary to assure adequate serviceability, cataloged unit capacity, and peak operating efficiency. Providing less than the recommended clearances may result in condenser coil starvation, "short-circuiting" of exhaust and economizer airflows, or recirculation of hot condenser air. Figure 1. Typical installation clearance for single and multiple unit applications SIDE BY SIDE NOTE 2 NOTES: 1. FOR HORIZONTAL DISCHARGE UNIT, THIS MEASUREMENT IS REDUCED TO 1' 6" TO MINIMIZE DUCT EXTENSION. 2. WHEN EQUIPPED WITH ECONOMIZER OR BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPER, CLEARANCE DISTANCE IS TO BE MEASURED FROM PROTRUDING HOOD INSTEAD OF BASE. 3. CLEARANCE ISTHE SAME IF ANY UNIT IS ROTATED 180o. 4. ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE REQUIRED WHEN BAROMETRIC DAMPER OR ECONOMIZER IS INSTALLED. END TO END NOTE 2, 3 kf"7 11q 11v .., I 3' 0" WITHOUT ECONOMIZER 5' 8" WITH ECONOMIZER SINGLE UNIT 5' 0" 4, 0„ RT-SVX058C-EN 9 Dimensional Data Figure 2. Gas/electric units — overview . L I I DISCONNECT SWITCH ACCESS J r' GAS CONNECTION CONDENSATE DRAIN CONNECTION e r Figure 3. Gas/electric units — front & side views — 3-5 tons NOTES: 1. THRU-THE-BASE GAS AND ELECTRICAL IS NOT STANDARD ON ALL UNITS. 2. VERIFY WEIGHT, CONNECTION, AND ALL DIMENSION WITH INSTALLER DOCUMENTS BEFORE INSTALLATION. 10 RT-SVX058C-EN Figure 4. Gas/electric units — bottom view — 3-5 tons Figure 5. Foundation units — back view (horizontal configuration) — 3-5 tons SUPPLY 7.393 Dimensional Data in RT-SVX058C-EN 11 Dimensional Data Figure 6. Roof curb —3-5 tons Figure 7. Downflow unit clearance — 3-5 tons standard efficiency CLEARANCE 68" CLEARANCE 36" UNIT OUTLINE 33.936 41.990 CLEARANCE 60 CLEARANCE 48" 12 RT-SVX058C-EN Figure 8. Barometric relief and economizer— 3-5 tons RIGHT VIEW OF UNIT Figure 9. Manual damper — 3-5 tons RIGHT VIEW OF UNIT NOTE: VERIFY WEIGHT, CONNECTION, AND ALL DIMENSIONS WIT INSTALLER DOCUMENTS BEFORE INSTALLATION. Dimensional Data BACK VIEW OF UNIT ......... _...___ ..___ CAKI BACK VIEW OF UNIT RT-SVX058C-EN 13 Unit Weights Table 1. Maximum unit & corner weights (lb) and center of gravity dimensions (in.) cooling with optional electric heat units only Tons Unit Model No. Weights (lb)(a), (b) Corner Weights(c) Center of Gravity (in.) Shipping Net A B C D Length Width 3 GBC036* 574 524 95 111 172 146 42 29 4 GBC048* 616 566 110 119 175 162 40 29 5 GBC060* 636 586 120 125 174 168 39 28 (a) Weights are approximate. (b) Weights do not include additional factory or field installed options/accessories. (c) Corner weights are given for information only. Figure 10. Corner weights CENTER OF GRAVITY LENGTH CENTER OF GRAVITY WIDTH Rigging Heavy Objects! Ensure that all the lifting equipment used is properly rated for the weight of the unit being lifted. Each of the cables (chains or slings), hooks, and shackles used to lift the unit must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the unit. Lifting cables (chains or slings) may not be of the same length. Adjust as necessary for even unit lift. Other lifting arrangements could cause equipment or property damage. Failure to follow instructions above or properly lift unit could result in unit dropping and possibly crushing operator/ technician which could result in death or serious injury. Improper Unit Lift! Test lift unit approximately 24 inches to verify proper center of gravity lift point. To avoid dropping of unit, reposition lifting point if unit is not level. Failure to properly lift unit could result in unit dropping and possibly crushing operator/technician which could result in death or serious injury and possible equipment or property -only damage. Refer to Figure 11 and Table 1 for typical unit operating weights rigging before proceeding. 1. Remove the shipping crate from around the unit. Do not remove the crating from the top of the unit. 2. Rig the unit as shown in Figure 11, p. 14. Attach adequate strength lifting slings to all four lifting brackets in the unit base rail. Do not use cables, chains, or slings except as shown. 3. Install a lifting bar, as shown in Figure 11, to protectthe unit and to facilitate a uniform lift. The minimum distance between the lifting hook and the top of the unit should be 7 feet. 4. Test -lift the unit to ensure it is properly rigged and balanced, make any necessary rigging adjustments. 5. Lift the unit and position it into place. 6. Downflow units; align the base rail of the unit with the curb rail while lowering the unit onto the curb. Make sure that the gasket on the curb is not damaged while positioning the unit. Figure 11. Rigging and center of gravity vim" LENGTH _� 14 RT-SVX058C-EN Installation Unit Foundation Risk of Roof Collapsing! Confirm with a structural engineer that the roof structure is strong enough to support the combined weight of the roofcurb and the unit. Refer to "Unit Weights," p. 14 for typical unit and curb weights. Failure to ensure proper structural roof support could cause the roof to collapse, which could result in death or serious injury and property damage. Water Damage! Non -factory penetrations through the base of this unit are not allowed. Any penetration in the base of the unit may affect the water tight integrity of the unit and lead to water leaks into the conditioned space. Failure to follow instructions could result in equipment and property damage. Notes: • For units with optional Condensate Overflow Switch (COF), the switch will not work properly if unit is not level or slightly sloped toward switch. • Toassureproper condensate flow during operationthe unit and the curb must be level. If the unit is installed at ground level, elevate it above the snow line. Provide concrete footings at each support location with a "full perimeter" support structure or a slab foundation for support. Referto Table 1, p. 14forthe unit's operating and point loading weights when constructing a footing foundation. If anchoring is required, anchor the unit to the slab using hold down bolts or isolators. Isolators should be installed to minimize the transmission of vibrations into the building. For rooftop applications, if anchoring is required, anchor the unit to the roof with hold-down bolts or isolators. Check with a roofing contractor for proper waterproofing procedures. Ductwork Elbows with turning vanes or splitters are recommended to minimize air noise due to turbulence and to reduce static pressure. When attaching the ductwork to the unit, provide a water- tight flexible connector at the unit to prevent operating sounds from transmitting through the ductwork. All outdoor ductwork between the unit and the structure should be weather proofed after installation is completed. Note: For sound consideration, cut only the holes in the roof deckforthe ductwork penetrations. Do not cut out the entire roof deck within the curb perimeter. If a Curb Accessory Kit is not used: a. The ductwork can be attached directly to the factory -provided flanges around the unit's supply and return air openings. Be sure to use flexible duct connections at the unit. b. For "built-up" curbs supplied by others, gaskets must be installed around the curb perimeter flange and the supply and return air opening flanges. General Unit Requirements Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state electrical codes. Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. The checklist listed below is a summary of the steps required to successfully install a commercial unit. This checklist is intended to acquaint the installing personnel with what is required in the installation process. It does not replace the detailed instructions called out in the applicable sections of this manual. • Check the unit for shipping damage and material shortage; file a freight claim and notify appropriate sales representative. • Verify correct model, options and voltage from nameplate. • Verify that the installation location of the unit will provide the required clearance for proper operation. • Assemble and install the roof curb (if applicable). Refer to the latest edition of the curb installers guide that ships with each curb kit. • Fabricate and install ductwork; secure ductwork to curb. • Rigging the unit. • Set the unit onto the curb; check for levelness. • Ensure unit -to -curb seal is tight and without buckles or cracks. • Install and connect a condensate drain line to the evaporator drain connection. RT-SVX058C-EN 15 Installation Factory Installed Economizer • Ensure the economizer has been pulled out into the operating position. Refer to the standard or low leak economizer Installation Instructions for proper position and setup. • Install all access panels. Controller Wiring Schematic - LLE For additional information, go to the Installation Instructions ACC-SVN203*-EN & ACC-SVN205*-EN. Main Electrical Power Requirements • Verify that the power supply complies with the unit nameplate specifications. • Inspect all control panel components; tighten any loose connections. • Connect properly sized and protected power supply wiring to a field -supplied/ installed disconnect switch and to the main powerterminal block (HT131) in the unit control panel. • Install proper grounding wires to an earth ground. Note: All field -installed wiring must comply with NEC and applicable local codes. External Vent Hood Installation Hazardous Voltage! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. 1. Remove and discard the cover plate located on the gas heat panel. Important: • Make sure you read the label located on the cover plate before you discard it. • Do not discard the fastening screws! They will be needed to install the vent hood. Figure 12. Discard cover plate 2. Locate the vent hood inside the indoor blower section. 16 RT-SVX058C-EN Figure 13. Vent hood shipping location 3. Install the vent hood on the gas heat panel using the screws removed in Step 1. Make sure it is properly secured on to the panel. Figure 14. Vent hood installation Condensate Drain Configuration An evaporator condensate drain connection is provided on each unit. Refer to the unit overview figure in "Dimensional Data," p. 9 for the appropriate drain location. A condensate trap must be installed at the unit due to the drain connection being on the "negative pressure" side of the fan. A condensate drain line must be connected to the P-Trap. Pitch the drain lines at least 1/2-inch for every 10 feet of horizontal run to assure proper condensate flow. Do not allow the horizontal run to sag causing a possible double - Installation trap condition which could result in condensate backup due to "air lock". Filter Installation Each unit ships with 2-inch filters installed. The quantity of filters is determined by unit size. Access to the filters is obtained by removing the filter access panel. Refer to the unit Service Facts (shipped with each unit) for filter requirements. Note: Do not operate the unit without filters. Field Installed Power Wiring An overall dimensional layout for the standard field installed wiring entrance into the unit is illustrated in "Dimensional Data," p. 9. To insure that the unit's supply power wiring is properly sized and installed, follow the guidelines outlined below. Note: All field installed wiring must conform to NEC guidelines as well as state and Local codes. Verify that the power supply available is compatible with the unit's nameplate ratings. The available supply power must be within 10 percent of the rated voltage stamped on the nameplate. Use only copper conductors to connectthe power supply to the unit. • Use Copper Conductors Only! Unit terminals are not designed to accept other types of conductors. Failure to use copper conductors could result in equipment damage. Note: If the unit is not equipped with an optional factory installed nonfused disconnect switch or circuit breaker, a field supplied disconnect switch must be installed at or near the unit in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC latest edition). Main Unit Power Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state electrical codes. Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. Standard Wiring The electrical service must be protected from over current and short circuit conditions in accordance with NEC requirements. RT-SVX058C-EN 17 Installation Protection devices must be sized according to the electrical data on the nameplate. • If the unit is not equipped with an optional factory installed nonfused disconnect switch, a field supplied disconnect switch must be installed at or near the unit in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC latest edition). • Location of the applicable electrical service entrance is illustrated in "Dimensional Data," p. 9. Complete the unit's power wiring connections onto either; the main terminal block HT131 inside the unit control panel, the factorymounted nonfused disconnect switch (UCD),or the electric heat terminal block. Refer to the customer connection diagram that shipped with the unit for specific termination points. • Provide proper grounding for the unit in accordance with local and national codes. Optional TBUE Wiring (Through the Base Electrical Option) • Location of the applicable electrical service is illustrated below. Refer to the customer connection diagram that is shipped with the unit for specific termination points. Thetermination points, depending on the customer option selected, would be a factory mounted nonfused disconnect switch (see Figure 19, p. 23) or the main terminal block. • Provide proper grounding for the unit in accordance with local and national codes. Figure 15. Through the base electrical option TBUE LOW VOLT. BUE IGH VOLT. Control Power Transformer The24-voltcontrol power transformers areto be used only with the accessories called out in this manual. Transformers rated greaterthan 50 Vac are equipped with internal circuit breakers. If circuit breaker trips, turn "Off" all power to the unit before attempting to reset it. 18 RT-SVX058C-EN The transformer is located in the control panel. The circuit breaker is located on the left side of the transformer and can be reset by pressing in on the black reset button. Controls using 24 Vac Before installing any connecting wiring, refer to "Dimensional Data," p. 9forthe electrical access locations provided on the unit and Table 2, p. 19 for AC conductor sizing guidelines. • Use Copper Conductors Only! Unit terminals are not designed to accept other types of conductors. Failure to use copper conductors could result in equipment damage. 1. Use copper conductors unless otherwise specified. 2. Ensure that the AC control wiring between the controls and the unit's termination point does not exceed three (3) ohms/conductor for the length of the run. Note: Resistance in excess of3ohms per conductor could cause component failure due to insufficient AC voltage supply. 3. Be sure to check all loads and conductors for grounds, shorts, and mis-wiring. 4. Do not run the AC low voltage wiring in the same conduit with the high voltage power wiring. 5. Route low voltage wiring per illustrations on the next page. Table 2. Electromechanical thermostat 24 Vac conductors Distance from Unit to Control Recommended Wire Size 000-460 feet 18 gauge 000-140 m 0.75 mm2 461-732 feet 16 gauge Installation Figure 16. Conventional thermostat field wiring diagram FM — THERMOSTAT RC HEAT HEAT 1 W1 DOFF t' p HEAT 2 W i COOL ON t` G COOL AFAN DOFFUTO Fill o HEAT RH I C01 I COOL COOL 1 Y1 I DOFF o COOL 2 Y2 HEAT LT61-1 --® 104 LT®4 + 106 LT61-6 107 LT61-7 - - 109 q LT®2 101 LT61-3 - - 111 LT®5 110 RT-SVX058C-EN 19 Installation Gas Heat Data Table 3. Gas heater operating data Heating Input Rate- Btu/h 115,000 100,000 72,000 Minimum Supply Gas 4/11 4/11 4/11 Pressure Natural/LP Manifold Gas Pressure(a) 3.5 3.5 3.5 Combustion Blower Suction -0.50 to - -0.50 to - -0.50 to - Pressure (1st Stage) 0.55 0.55 0.55 Combustion Blower Suction -0.65 to - -0.65 to - Pressure (2nd Stage) 0.70 0.70 Minimum Flame Sensing 5.0 Micro Amps DC Current(b) Normal Sensing Current 8.0 to 16 Micro Amps DC Range Flue Gas Temperature Rise 250 to 350 F Above Ambient Flue Gas Content - % CO2 6.5 to 9.0 % Natural LP 8.0 to 10.5% Minimum Supply Air Temperature Across Heat 40 F Exchanger (a) Staged gas heat units have a positive pressure gas valve. Never ad- just the staged gas pressure valve to a negative pressure. (b) A voltage reading across pens (V+) & (V-) is equatable to the flame sensing current. One volt equals one micro amp. Table 4. Piping Length of Iron Pipe Size (IPS) Inches Pipe (ft) 1/2" Pipe 3/4" Pipe 1" Pipe 11/4" Pipe 11/2" Pipe 15 76 176 345 750 1220 30 52 120 241 535 850 45 43 99 199 435 700 60 38 86 173 380 610 75 77 155 345 545 Note: Capacity of Pipe of Different Diameters and Lengths in Cu. Ft. Per Hr. with Pressure Drop of 0.3" and Specific Gravity of 0.60 Table 5. Specific gravity multipliers Specific Gravity Multipliers 0.50 1.10 0.55 1.04 0.60 1.00 0.65 0.96 Figure 17. Schematic diagram for field gas piping to units 1/8" NPT Teat Plug Field supplied dround 9" MIN \ Union \_ To Gas Train leas supply Line daa shutoff (Field I pplied \ Unit Access Hole outside unit cabinet \ Drip Leg Figure 18. Typical unit gas train configuration Voltage Imbalance Three phase electrical power to the unit must meet stringent requirements for the unit to operate properly. Measure each leg (phase -to -phase) of the power supply. Each reading mustfall within the utilization range stamped on the unit nameplate. If any of the readings do not fall within the proper tolerances, notifythe powercompanyto correct this situation before operating the unit. Excessivethree phasevoltage imbalance between phases will cause motors to overheat and eventually fail. The maximum allowable voltage imbalance is 2 percent. Measure and record the voltage between phases 1, 2, and 3 and calculate the amount of imbalance as follows: % Voltage Imbalance 100XAV-VD where; AV AV (Average Voltage) Volt 1 + Volt 2 + Volt 3 3 20 RT-SVX058C-EN • V1, V2, V3 = Line Voltage Readings • VD = Line Voltage reading that deviates the farthest from the average voltage. Example: If the voltage readings of the supply power measured 221, 230, and 227, the average volts would be: 221 + 230 + 227 = 226 Avg. • VD (reading farthest from average) = 221 • The percentage of Imbalance equals: 100 X 226 - 221 226 = 2.2% The 2.2 percent imbalance in this example exceeds the maximum allowable imbalance of 2.0 percent. This much imbalance between phases can equal as much as a 20 percent current imbalance with a resulting increase in motor winding temperatures that will decrease motor life. If the voltage imbalance isover 2 percent, notify the proper agencies to correct the voltage problem before operating this equipment. Electrical Phasing (Three Phase Motors) The compressor motor(s) and the supply fan motor are internally connected for the proper rotation when the incoming power supply is phased as A, B, C. Proper electrical supply phasing can be quickly determined and corrected before starting the unit by using an instrument such as an Associated Research Model 45 Phase Sequence Indicator and following the steps below: Hazardous Voltage! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury • Turn thefield supplied disconnect switch that provides power to the main power terminal block or to the "Line" side of the optional factory mounted disconnect switch to the "Off" position. • Connect the phase sequence indicator leads to the terminal block or to the "Line" side of the optional factory mounted disconnect switch as follows; Black (phase A) to L1 Red (phase B) to L2 Yellow (phase C) to L3 • Closethefield supplied main power disconnect switch or circuit protector switch that provides the supply power to the unit. Installation Live Electrical Components! During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. • Observe the ABC and CBA phase indicator lights on the face of the sequencer. The ABC indicator lightwill glow if the phase is ABC. If the CBA indicator light glows, open the disconnect switch orcircuit protection switch and reverse any two power wires. • Restore the main electrical power and recheck the phasing. If the phasing is correct, open the disconnect switch or circuit protection switch and remove the phase sequence indicator. Compressor Crankcase Heaters • Compressors Failure! Unit must be powered and crankcase heaters energized at least 8 hours BEFORE compressors are started. This will protect the compressors from premature failure. Each compressor can be equipped with a crankcase heater. The proper operation of the crankcase heater is important to maintain an elevated compressor oil temperature during the "Off" cycle to reduce oil foaming during compressor starts. Oil foaming occurs when refrigerant condenses in the compressor and mixes with the oil. In lower ambient conditions, refrigerant migration to the compressor could increase. When the compressor starts, the sudden reduction in crankcase pressure causes the liquid refrigerant to boil rapidly causing the oil to foam. This condition could damage compressor bearings due to reduced lubrication and could cause compressor mechanical failures. Before starting the unit in the "Cooling" mode, set the system switch to the "Off" position and turn the main power disconnect to the "On" position and allow the crankcase heater to operate a minimum of 8 hours. Before closing the main power disconnect switch, insure that the "System"selection switch is in the "Off" position and the "Fan" selection switch is in the "Auto" position. Close the main power disconnect switch and the unit mounted disconnect switch, if applicable. RT-SVX058C-EN 21 Installation Checklist Use the following checklist in conjunction with the general checklist ("General Unit Requirements," p. 15) to ensure that the unit is properly installed and ready for operation. Hazardous Voltage! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. • Check all electrical connections for tightness and "point of termination" accuracy. • Verify that the condenser airflow is unobstructed. • Verify that the condenser fan and indoor blower turn freely without rubbing and are properly tightened on the shafts. • Check the supply fan belts for proper tension and the fan bearings for sufficient lubrication. If the belts require adjustment, or if the bearings need lubricating, refer to the maintenance section of this manual for instructions. • Verifythat a condensatetrap is installed and the piping is properly sized and pitched. • Verify that the correct size and number of filters are in place. • Inspect the interior of the unit for tools and debris and install all panels in preparation for starting the unit. 22 RT-SVX058C-EN Factory -Mounted Unit Options Unit Disconnect (FIYUDC) Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors! Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors have discharged. For additional information regarding the safe discharge of capacitors, see PROD-SVB06*-EN Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state electrical codes. Important: All phases of this installation must comply with NATIONAL, STATE, and LOCAL CODES. In addition to local codes, the installation must comply with National Electric Code - ANSI/NFPA NO. 70 LATEST REVISION. 1. Field connections are made by first removing the compressor access panel on the front of the unit. Unscrew the assembly around the outside of the disconnect switch. This assembly is located in the condenser section of the unit. For down flow configurations, the hole in the base section is for both high and low voltage power wiring on down flow units. Horizontal units will routethrough the holes in the front corner post where the disconnect enclosure is mounted. The hole is sized for 1 1/2" conduit. 2. If the conduit required for your application is larger, removethe termination plate and connectto the larger hole using field supplied reducing washers. 3. Route the power wires and ground conductor through conduit and into the bottom of the factory installed disconnect switch. Connect the power conductors to the lugs provided. Connect the ground wire to the unit ground lug. Note: Wire size for the length of run should be determined using the circuit ampacityfound on the unit nameplate and the N.E.C. 4. Route low voltage (class II), control wiring through hole in base of unit but not through high voltage conduit (referto Figure 15, p. 18 for high and low volt. conduits location). Feed control wiring through bushing provided on side panel. Route wires through loose wire ties provided. 5. Tighten the wire ties. Secure the excess wire bundle under the wire ties in the outdoor section. Do not leave excess wire in the electrical enclosure. Use the unit wiring diagram to make the low voltage connections. Figure 19. Field wiring routing - factory installed disconnect switch o.o®o W, O O O O O o a o a f RT-SVX058C-EN 23 Factory -Mounted Unit Options Through the Base Gas Utility Option This section contains the instructions for making field connections to the Through the Base Gas Utility Option. Field Installed Connections Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects and discharge all motor start/run capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors have discharged. Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors before servicing could result in death or serious injury. For additional information regarding the safe discharge of capacitors, see PROD-SVB06*-EN Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Required! All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for field wiring installation and grounding as described in NEC and your local/state electrical codes. Failure to follow code could result in death or serious injury. Figure 20. Through -the -base gas piping installation No See detail Important: All phases of this installation must comply with NATIONAL, STATE, and LOCAL CODES. In absence of local codes, the installation must conform with American National Standard-Z223.1a- National Fuel Gas Code latest revision. 1. Field connections are made by first removing the access panel for the heat section on the front of the unit. 2. The gas piping assembly ships inside this section and includes the shut-off valve, a pressure tap for testing, and the necessary unions for field connection. For through the base access, remove the factory -provided cap from the base pan opening. See Figure 20. 3. Route field piping through this hole to the dimension shown in Table 6. Outlet Pressure Check Required! This unit uses a positive pressure gas valve. The outlet pressure should be 3.5" w.c for high stage and 2.4" w.c for low stage. Never adjust the regulator to change the outlet pressure. Failure to follow instructions could result in death or serious injury or equipment damage. 4. Place the assembly through the cabinet opening as shown in Figure 20 and make the union connection to the field piping and to the gas train. Refer to the unit IOM for checkout procedures. Table 6. Piping hole dimension Model Dimension GBC036-060 1.62" 1/2" x 3 1/2" pipe nipple Pipe union 4 1/2" x 3 1/2" pipe nipple 90° elbow Tee W �III 1/2" x 3" pipe nipple nit x 8" pipe pple \1/2" x 31/2" pipe nipple Gas shut-off valve 90° elbow Pipe cap Customer gas supply pipe Grommet 0.600 O DETAIL A 24 RT-SVX058C-EN Pre Start Verifying Proper Air Flow (Units with Belt Drive Indoor Fan) Much of the systems performance and reliability is closely associated with, and dependent upon having the proper airflow supplied both to the space that is being conditioned and across the evaporator coil. The indoorfan speed is changed by opening or closing the adjustable motor sheave. Before starting the SERVICE TEST, set the minimum position setpoint for the economizer to 0% using the setpoint potentiometer located on the Economizer Control (ECA), if applicable. Electromechanical Controls Test Procedure See unit schematic for correct wire numbers. Fan Test and Minimum Ventilation. Connect red thermostat wire (R) to black thermostat wire (G). Economizer Cooling. Connect a jumper wire across OAT on Economizer Control (ECA). Connect red thermostat (R) wire to yellow thermostat wire (Y1). Cool 1. Connect red thermostat wire (R) to yellow thermostat wire (Y1). Cool 2. Connect red thermostat wire (R) to yellow thermostat wire (Y2). Heat 1. Connect red thermostat wire (R) to brown thermostat wire (W1). Heat 2. Connect red thermostat wire (R) to brown thermostat wire (W2). RT-SVX058C-EN 25 Start Up Standard Economizer Start -Up 1. Set the minimum position setpoint for the economizer to the required percentage of minimum ventilation using the setpoint potentiometer located on the Economizer Control (ECA). The economizer will drive to its minimum position setpoint, exhaust fans (if applicable) may start at random, and the supply fan will start when the SERVICE TEST is initiated. The Exhaust Fan will start anytime the economizer damper position is equal to or greaterthan the exhaust fan setpoint. 2. Verify that the dampers stroked to the minimum position. 3. Verify that the dampers stroked to the full open position. 4. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power disconnect switch to the "Off" position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Remove electro mechanical test mode connections (if applicable). LLE Controls Test Procedure See unit schematic for correct wire numbers. Use the CHECKOUT menu in the Installation Instructions to test the damper operation and any configured outputs. Only items that are configured are shown in the Checkout menu. To Perform Checkout Tests: 1. Scroll to the desired test in the checkout menu using the A and Q buttons. 2. Press the *A button to select the item. 3. "RUN?" is displayed. 4. Press 4 to start the test. 5. The unit pauses and then displays "IN PROGRESS". 6. When the test is complete, "DONE" appears. 7. When all parameters have been tested, press (Menu Up) to end the test (e.g. turn off the relay). Notes: • The checkout tests can all be performed at the time of installation or any time during the operation of the system. • JADE will be in "set up" mode for the first 60 minutes after powered. If CA sensor or Sylk Bus device (sensor or actuator) is disconnected during the set up mode, the JADE will not alarm that failure. The MA sensor is a system "critical" sensor, if the MA sensor is removed during the set up mode, the JADE will alarm. After 60 minutes the JADE controller will change to operation mode and all components removed orfailed will alarm in the operation mode. • Upon power up (or after a power outage or brownout), the JADE controller module begins a 5 minute power up delay before enabling mechanical cooling. Compressor Start -Up 1. Attach a set of service gauges onto the suction and discharge gauge ports for each circuit. Refer to the refrigerant circuit illustration in the Service Facts. Using the Service Test Guide, perform the proper test mode connections. Scroll Compressors a. Once the compressor has started, verify that the rotation is correct. If wired correctly the suction pressure should drop and the discharge pressure should rise. If a scroll compressor is rotating backwards, it will not pump and a loud rattling sound can be observed. b. If the electrical phasing is correct, before condemning a compressor, interchange any two leads (at the compressor Terminal block) to check the internal phasing. Refer to the following illustration for the compressor terminal/phase identification. Do not allow the compressor to operate backwards for more than 5 seconds. Operation for a period of time longer than this will result in compressor damage. Copeland (Alliance) will experience failure also. If the compressor runs backward for an extended period, the motor winding can overheat and cause the motorwinding thermostat to open. Note: The Copeland SXA scroll compressors for R-410A units use Trane OIL00094. Compressor types are listed in Table 7, p. 26. The appropriate oil charge is listed in Table 8, p. 26. Table 7. Compressor types Tonnage C1 GB*036 SXA031 GB*048 SXA042 GB*060 SXA051 Table 8. POE Oil recharge amount (fl. oz.) Model C1 GB*036 21 GB*048 38 GB*060 38 2. After the compressor and condenser fan have started and operated for approximately 30 minutes, observe the operating pressures. Compare the operating 26 RT-SVX058C-EN Start Up pressures to the operating pressure curve in the Service Facts. 3. Check system subcooling. Follow the instruction listed on the subcooling charging curve in the Service Facts. 4. Repeat Step 1 through Step 3 for each refrigerant circuit. 5. To stop the SERVICE TEST, turn the main power disconnect switch to the "Off" position or proceed to the next component start-up procedure. Remove electro mechanical test mode connections (if applicable). Heating Start -Up Using the Service Test Guide perform the propertest mode connections. When starting the unit for the first time or servicing the heaters, it is a good practice to start the heater with the main gassupplyturned "Off". Oncethe ignition system and components have been checked, open the main power disconnect switch to reset the unit. Final System Set Up After completing all of the pre -start and start-up procedures outlined in the previous sections (i.e., operating the unit in each of its modes through all available stages of cooling and heating), perform these final checks before leaving the unit: • Program the Night Setback (NSB) panel (if applicable) for proper unoccupied operation. Refer to the programming instructions for the specific panel. • Verify that the Remote panel "System" selection switch, "Fan" selection switch, and "Zone Temperature" settings for automatic operation are correct. • Inspect the unit for misplaced tools, hardware, and debris. • Verify that all exterior panels including the control panel doors and condenser grilles are secured in place. • Close the main disconnect switch or circuit protector switch that provides the supply power to the unit's terminal block or the unit mounted disconnect switch. RT-SVX058C-EN 27 Maintenance Make sure all personnel are standing clear of the unit before proceeding. The system components will start when the power is applied. Fan Belt Adjustment- Belt Drive Units Rotating Components! The following procedure involves working with rotating components. Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in rotating components cutting and slashing technician which could result in death or serious injury. The fan belts must be inspected periodically to assure proper unit operation. Replacement is necessary if the belts appear frayed or worn. Units with dual belts require a matched set of belts to ensure equal belt length. When removing or installing the new belts, do not stretch them over the sheaves. Loosen the belts using the belt tension adjustment bolts on the motor mounting base. Once the new belts are installed, using a Browning or Gates tension gauge (or equivalent) illustrated in Figure 21; adjust the belt tension as follows; 1. To determine the appropriate belt deflection; a. Measure the center -to -center shaft distance (in inches) between the fan and motor sheaves. b. Divide the distance measured in Step la by 64; the resulting value represents the amount of belt deflection that corresponds to the proper belt tension. 2. Set the large 0-ring on the belt tension gauge at the deflection value determined in Step 1b. 3. Set the small 0-ring at zero on the force scale of the gauge plunger. 4. Place the large end of the gauge at the center of the belt span; then depress the gauge plunger until the large O-ring is even with the top of the next belt or even with a straightedge placed across the fan and motor sheaves. Refer to Table 9, p. 28. 5. Remove the belt tension gauge. The small 0-ring now indicates a number other than zero on the plunger's force scale. This number represents the force (in pounds) required to give the needed deflection. 6. Compare the "force" scale reading (Step 5) with the appropriate "force" value listed in Table 9, p. 28. If the "force" reading is outside the range, readjust the belt tension. Note: Actual belt deflection "force" must not exceed the maximum "force" value shown in Table 9, p. 28. 7. Recheck the belt tension at least twice during the first 2 to 3 days of operation. Belt tension may decrease until the new belts are "run in". Figure 21. Belt tension gauge Deflection = Belt Span (in) 64 Deflection = Belt Span (mm) 1 .ri? Force Scale Small_ 0-Ring Large_ Span Scale 0-Ring Table 9. Belt tension measurement and deflection ranges Deflection Force (lb) Super Gripnotch Smallest Gripbelts and Belts and Belts Sheave Unnotched Notched Cross Diameter Gripbands Gripbands Used New Used New Section Range RPM (in.) Range Belt Belt Belt Belt 3.0-3.6 1000-2500 3.7 5.5 4.1 6.1 2501-4000 2.8 4.2 3.4 5.0 1000-2500 4.5 6.8 5.0 7.4 A, AX 3.8-4.8 2501-4000 3.8 5.7 4.3 6.4 1000-2500 5.4 8.0 5.7 8.4 5.0-7.0 2501-4000 4.7 7.0 5.1 7.6 Monthly Maintenance Before completing the following checks, turn the unit OFF and lock the main power disconnect switch open. 28 RT-SVX058C-EN Hazardous Voltage! Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/ tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in death or serious injury. Filters Inspect the return air filters. Clean or replace them if necessary. Refer to the unit Service Facts for filter information. Condensate Overflow Switch During maintenance, the switch float (black ring) must be checked to ensure free movement up and down. Cooling Season • Check the unit's drain pans and condensate piping to ensure that there are no blockages. • Inspect the evaporator and condenser coils for dirt, bent fins, etc. If the coils appear dirty, clean them according to the instructions described in "Condenser Coil Cleaning," p. 29. • Manually rotate the condenser fan(s) to ensure free movement and check motor bearings for wear. Verify that all of the fan mounting hardware is tight. • Inspect the F/A-R/A damper hinges and pins to ensure that all moving parts are securely mounted. Keep the blades clean as necessary. • Equipment Damage! Never turn the motor shaft by hand or with a wrench. Forcibly turning the motor shaft can damage the gear train and motor beyond repair. • Verify that all damper linkages move freely; lubricate with white grease, if necessary. • Checksupplyfan motor bearings; repair or replace the motor as necessary. • Check the fan shaft bearings for wear. Replace the bearings as necessary. • Check the supply fan belt. If the belt is frayed or worn, replace it. Refer to "Fan Belt Adjustment —Belt Drive Units," p. 28 for belt replacement and adjustments. • Verify that all wire terminal connections are tight. • Remove any corrosion present on the exterior surfaces of the unit and repaint these areas. • Generally inspect the unit for unusual conditions (e.g., loose access panels, leaking piping connections, etc.). Maintenance • Make sure that all retaining screws are reinstalled in the unit access panels once these checks are complete. With the unit running, check and record the: ambient temperature; compressor suction and discharge pressures (each circuit); superheat (each circuit); Record this data on an "operator's maintenance log" like the one shown in Table 10, p. 30. If the operating pressures indicate a refrigerant shortage, measure the system superheat. For guidelines, refer to "Compressor Start -Up," p. 26. Note: Do NOT release refrigerant to the atmosphere! If adding or removing refrigerant is required, the service technician must comply with all federal, state and local laws. Heating Season • Inspect the unit's air filters. If necessary, clean or replace them. • Check supplyfan motor bearings; repair or replace the motor as necessary. • Inspect both the main unit control panel and heat section control box for loose electrical components and terminal connections, as well as damaged wire insulation. Make any necessary repairs. • Verify that the electric heat system operates properly. Condenser Coil Cleaning Regular coil maintenance, including annual cleaning, enhances the unit's operating efficiency by minimizing: compressor head pressure and amperage draw; evaporator water carryover; fan brake horsepower, due to increase static pressure losses; airflow reduction. At least once each year, or more often if the unit is located in a "dirty" environment, clean the condenser coils using the instructions outlined below. Be sure to follow these instructions as closely as possible to avoid damaging the coils. Microchannel (MCHE) Coils Coil Damage! DO NOT use any detergents with microchannel condenser coils. Use pressurized water or air ONLY, with pressure no greater than 600psi. Failure to do so could result in coil damage. For additional information regarding the proper microchannel coil cleaning procedure, refer to RT- SVB83*-EN. Due to the soft material and thin walls of the MCHE coils, the traditional field maintenance method recommended for Round Tube Plate Fin (RTPF) coils does not apply to microchannel coils. RT-SVX058C-EN 29 Maintenance Moreover, chemical cleaners area risk factor to MCHE due to the material of the coil. The manufacturer does not recommend the use of chemical cleaners to clean microchannel coils. Using chemical cleaners could lead to warranty claims being further evaluated for validity and failure analysis. The recommended cleaning method for microchannel condenser coils is pressurized water or air with a non - pinpoint nozzle and an ECU of at least 180with pressure no greater than 600 psi. To minimize the risk of coil damage, approach the cleaning of the coil with the pressure washer aimed perpendicularto the face of the coil during cleaning. Optimum clearance between the sprayer nozzle and the microchannel coil is 1 "-3". Final Process For future reference, you may find it helpful to record the unit data requested below in the blanks provided. (1) Complete Unit Model Number: (2) Unit Serial Number: Table 10. Sample maintenance log (3) Wiring Diagram Numbers (from unit control panel) — schematic(s) — connection(s) Refrigerant Circuit #1 Current Ambient Compr. Suct. Press. Psig/ Disch. Press Psig/ Liquid Press Psig/ Date Temp F/C Oil Level kPa kPa kPa Super -heat F/C Sub -cool F/C ok low ok low ok low ok low ok low ok low ok low ok low ok low ok low ok low 30 RT-SVX058C-EN Troubleshooting Hazardous Service Procedures! The maintenance and troubleshooting procedures recommended in this section of the manual could result in exposure to electrical, mechanical or other potential safety hazards. Always refer to the safety warnings provided throughout this manual concerning these procedures. Unless specified otherwise, disconnect all electrical power including remote disconnect and discharge all energy storing devices such as capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power can not be inadvertently energized. When necessary to work with live electrical components, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all of the recommended safety warnings provided, could result in death or serious injury. Standard Troubleshooting The IGN has the ability to provide the service personnel with some unit diagnostics and system status information. Before turning the main power disconnect switch "Off", follow the steps belowto checkthe Ignition Module (IGN). To prevent injury or death from electrocution, it is the responsibility of the technician to recognize this hazard and use extreme care when performing service procedures with the electrical power energized. 1. Verify LED on face of the phase monitor is green. If LED is red, correct supply power fault. 2. Verifythat the LED on the IGN is burning continuously. If the LED is lit, go to Step 4. 3. If the LED is not lit, verify that 24 VAC is present between R and B. If the LED is not lit and 24 VAC is present replace the IGN. If 24VAC is not present, check transformer (TNS1). Proceed to Step 4 if necessary. 4. If no failures are indicated, use the TEST mode procedures described in the "Unit Start -Up" section or thermostat to start the unit.This procedure will allow you to check all of the external controls (relays, contactors, etc) and the IGN. 5. Testthe system through all of the available modes, and verify operation of all outputs, controls, and modes. Refer to the sequence of operations for each mode, to assist in verifying proper operation. Make the necessary repairs and proceed to Step 6 and Step 7. 6. If no abnormal operating conditions appear in the test mode, exitthe test mode byturning the power "Off" at the main power disconnect switch and removing the test mode connections. 7. Refer to the individual component test procedures if other components are suspect. Failures Heating Failure - Low Heat Models Verify heat failure by ignition module. (IGN) LED indicator: • Steady OFF: Check Power or Bad Board • Flashing Slow (the LED flashes on for 3/4 second, then off for 1/4 second): Normal, No Call for Heat • Flashing Fast (the LED flashes on for 1/4 second, and off for 1/4 second): Call for Heat • Continuous On: Internal Error -Replace Control Board • 2 Flashes: 1 Hour Lockout, No Flame • 3 Flashes: Pressure Switch/Inducer Issue • 4 Flashes: Open Temperature Limit Switch or Rollout Limit • 5 Flashes: Flame without Gas Valve • 7 Flashes: Gas Valve Circuit Error • 8 Flashes: Low Flame Sense Heating Failure - High Heat Models Verify heat failure by ignition module. (IGN) LED indicator: • Steady OFF: Check Power or Bad Board • Flashing Slow (the LED flashes on for 3/4 second, then off for 1/4 second): Normal, No Call for Heat • Flashing Fast: Not Used • Steady ON: Normal, No Call for Heat • 2 Flashes: System Lockout: Failed to detect or sustain flame • 3 Flashes: Pressure Switch Problem Detected • 4 Flashes: High Limit Switch Protection Device Open • 5 Flashes: Flame Sensed and Gas Valve not Energized or Flame Sensed and no "W" Signal • 6 Flashes: Flame Rollout Switch Open • 7 Flashes: Thermostat Miswired; W1 & W2 Cooling Failure 1. Cooling and heating set point (slide pot) on the thermostat has failed. 2. CC1 24 VAC control circuit has opened. Check CC1 coils and FrostatT"° status. Check the status of the LED indicator in LSD: a. LED will be flashing to indicate a safety input has opened while a Y call is present. RT-SVX058C-EN 31 Troubleshooting b. Compressor lockout is indicated by a solid (non - flashing) red LED. To reset LSD - Cycle power on "R" input. Simultaneous Heat and Cool Failure • Emergency Stop is activated. Low Leak Economizer (LLE) Troubleshooting 1. The economizer controller provides alarm messages that display on the 2-line LCD. If one or more alarms are present and there has been no keypad activity for at least 5 minutes, the Alarms menu displays and cycles through the active alarms. Note: You can also navigate to the Alarms menu at any time. 2. Once the alarm has been identified and the cause has been removed (e.g. replaced faulty sensor), the alarm can be cleared from the display. Note: If an alarm still exists afteryou clear it, it re -displays within 5 seconds. To Clear an Alarm Once the alarm has been identified and the cause has been removed (e.g. replaced faulty sensor), the alarm can be cleared from the display. 1. Navigate to the desired alarm. 2. Press 4.9. 3. "ERASE?" is displayed. 4. Press 4.9. 5. "ALARM ERASED" is displayed. 6. Press ® (Menu Up) to complete the action and return to the previous menu. Note: If an alarm still exists afteryou clear it, it re -displays within 5 seconds. Low Leak Economizer Fault Codes Low Leak Economizer Alarms: • CO2 Sensor Error • SYS Alarm • Actuator Undervoltage • Actuator Overvoltage • Actuator Stalled The FDD system shall detect the following faults: • Air temperature sensor failure/fault • Not economizing when it should • Economizing when it should not • Damper not modulating • Excess outdoor air The JADE controller is a certified FDD product (HJW10) by California Title 24, Part 6. The FDD system is required for meeting California Energy Commission's Title 24 regulations. Table 11, p. 32 shows the various tests that can be performed (rows) and the five faults that are defined by FDD (columns). The'x' means thatthe test has to be conducted to see if it is causing the fault to occur. Table 11. FDD troubleshooting FAULTS Airtemp. Not Econo- Damper sensor econo- mizing not Excess failure/ mizing when it modula- outdoor fault when it should ting air TESTS should not Damper Stuck O Open x x x Damper Stuck at Minimum x x Bad or Unplugged Actuator x x x Sensor Hard Failure x x x x Actuator Mechanically x x x x Disconnected Resetting Cooling and Heating Lockouts Cooling Failures and Heating Lockouts are reset in an identical manner. "Method 1," p. 32 explains resetting the system from the space; "Method 2," p. 32 explains resetting the system at the unit. Note: Before resetting Cooling Failures and Heating Lockouts check the Failure Status Diagnostics by the methods previously explained. Diagnosticswill be lost when the power to the unit is disconnected. Method 1 To reset the system from the space, turn the "Mode" selection switch at the thermostat to the "Off' position. After approximately 30 seconds, turn the "Mode" selection switch to the desired mode, i.e. Heat, Cool or Auto. Method 2 To reset the system at the unit, cycle the unit power by turning the disconnect switch "Off' and then "On". Condensate Overflow Switch When the condensate overflow switch is closed, a drain pan overflow condition is indicated and it will shut unit operations down. 32 RT-SVX058C-EN Troubleshooting Unit Economizer Control (ECA) Verify Economizer Status by Economizer Actuator (ECA) LED indicator: • OFF: No Power or Failure • ON: Normal, OK to Economize • Slow Flash: Normal, Not OK to Economize • Fast Flash - 1/4 Second On / 2 Seconds Off: — Error Code: Communications Failure • Pulse Flash: 1/30 Second On / 1/4 Second Off: (2 Seconds between pulse sequences) Error Code: • 1 Flash: Actuator Fault • 2 Flashes: CO2 Sensor • 3 Flashes: RA Humidity Sensor • 4 Flashes: RA Temp Sensor • 6 Flashes: OA Humidity Sensor • 7 Flashes: OA Temp Sensor • 8 Flashes: MA Temp Sensor • 9 Flashes: On -board Setpoint Failure RT-SVX058C-EN 33 Wiring Diagrams Note: Wiring diagrams can be accessed via e-Library by entering the diagram number in the literature order number search field or by contacting technical support. Table 12. Wiring diagrams Type of Schematic Diagram Airflow Type Voltage Number Description 12132102 GBC 036-060, 601-1z, 1 STAGE Gas Heat 208-230 12130802 GBC 036-060, 601-1z, 2 STAGE Gas Heat Power 12132103 GBC 036-060, 60Hz, 1 STAGE Gas Heat 460-575 12130803 GBC 036-060, 60Hz, 2 STAGE Gas Heat 12132965 GBC 036-060, 60Hz, 1 STAGE Gas Heat Control 208-575 12132966 GBC 036-060, 601-1z, 2 STAGE Gas Heat Constant Volume Control box 208-230 12133024 GBC 036-060, 60Hz, 1 STAGE Gas Heat 12133026 GBC 036-060, 60Hz, 2 STAGE Gas Heat Connection 12133023 GBC 036-060, 60Hz, 1 STAGE Gas Heat 460-575 12133025 GBC 036-060, 60Hz, 2 STAGE Gas Heat 12132218 GBC 036-060, 60Hz, 1 STAGE Gas Heat 208-230 12132219 GBC 036-060, 60Hz, 2 STAGE Gas Heat Raceway 12132267 GBC 036-060, 60Hz, 1 STAGE Gas Heat Connection 460-575 12132268 GBC 036-060, 60Hz, 2 STAGE Gas Heat 34 RT-SVX058C-EN Warranty Central Air Conditioner GBC Units (Parts Only) Models Less than 20 Tons for Commercial Use* This warranty is extended by Trane, to the original purchaser and to any succeeding owner of the real property to which the Air Conditioner is originally affixed, and applies to products purchased and retained for use within the U.S.A. and Canada. There is no warranty against corrosion, erosion or deterioration. If any part of your Air Conditioner fails because of a manufacturing defect within one year from the date of the original purchase, Warrantor will furnish without charge the required replacement part. If the heat exchanger fails because of a manufacturing defect within five years from the date of start-up, Warrantor will furnish without charge a replacement heat exchanger. In addition, if the optional, factory installed, stainless steel heat exchanger fails because of a manufacturing defect within ten years from the date of start-up, Warrantor will furnish withoutcharge a replacement heat exchanger. Any local transportation, related service labor and diagnosis calls are not included. In addition, if the sealed motor -compressor fails because of a manufacturing defect within the second through fifth year from the date of original purchase, Warrantor will furnish without charge the required replacement compressor. Warrantor's obligations and liabilities underthis warranty are limited to furnishing F.O.B. Warrantor factory or warehouse replacement parts for Warrantor's products covered under this warranty. Warrantor shall not be obligated to pay for the cost of lost refrigerant. No liability shall attach to Warrantor until products have been paidforand then liabilityshall be limited solelytothe purchase price of the equipment underwarranty shown to be defective. THE WARRANTYAND LIABILITY SET FORTH HEREIN ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND LIABILITIES, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR IN NEGLIGENCE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN LAW OR IN FACT, INCLUDING BUT NOT SPECIFICALLY LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR USE, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL WARRANTOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. Trane 2701 Wilma Rudolph Blvd. Clarksville, TN 37040-1008 Attention: Manager, Product Service GW-602-4800 * This warranty is for commercial usage of said equipment and not applicable when the equipment is used for a residential application. Commercial use is any application where the end purchaser uses the product for other than personal, family or household purposes. *A 5 year limited warranty is provided for the optional Low Leak Economizer, including the JADE control system (controller, actuator and sensors). RT-SVX058C-EN 35 (polAngersoll Rand Ingersoll Rand (NYSE:IR) advances the quality of life by creating comfortable, sustainable and efficient environments. Our people and our family of brands —including Club Car®, Ingersoll Rand®, Thermo King® and Trane®—work together to enhance the quality and comfort of air in homes and buildings; transport and protect food and perishables; and increase industrial productivity and efficiency. We are a global business committed to a world of sustainable progress and enduring results. 417R)IngersollRand- T THERMO KING 0 rJZWE° ingersollrand.com Ingersoll Rand has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. We are committed to using environmentally conscious print practices. RT-SVX058C-EN 11 Jan 2019 Supersedes RT-SVX058B-EN Aug 2017 ©2019 Ingersoll Rand Submittal Split System Heat Pump 208-230V MODEL 4TWA4036A3000A Note: "Graphics in this document are for representation only. Actual model may differ in appearance." Only qualified personnel should install and service the equipment. The installation, starting up, and servicing of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous and requires specific knowledge and training. Improperly installed, adjusted or altered equipment by an unqualified person could result in death or serious injury. When working on the equipment, observe all precautions in the literature and on the tags, stickers, and labels that are attached to the equipment. November 2016 4TWA4036A-SUB-3A-EN J 1F Ingersoll Rand 0 TRANE' Outline Drawing SERVICE PANEL ELECTRICAL AND REF COMPONENT CLEARANC PER PREVAILING COD TOP DISCHARGE AREA SHOULD BE UNRESTRICTED FOR AT LEAST 1524 (5 FEET) ABOVE UNIT. UNIT SHOULD BE PLACED SO ROOF RUN-OFF WATER DOES NOT POUR DIRECTLY OFROMyy��N UNITN, AND ALL SURROUNDING SHRUBBERY ONULD BE AT LEAST 305 ) TWO SI ELI, AD OTHER T,0 SIDES UNRESTRICTED. ELECTRICAL SERVICE PANEL 22.2 (7/8) DIA. HOL LOW VOLTAG 28.6 ll-1/8) DIA, K.O. IT 22,2 (T/8) DIA, HOLE IN CON RO BOX BOTTOM FOR LECTRICA PO ER SUP PL E K 25 (I1 A E H L r H F �ja� LIQUID LINE SERVICE VALVE, "E" I.D. FEMALE BRAZE CONNECTION WITH I/4" SAE FLARE PRESSURE TAP FITTINGS, `K, OFOR ALTERNATE ELECTRICAL ROUTING GAS LINE I/4 TURN BALL SERVICE VALVE, "D' I.D, FEMALE BRAZED CONNECTION WITH W,, SAE FLARE PRESSURE TAP FITTING, Model Base A B C D E F G H 7 K 4TWA4036A3 4 741 946 870 3/4 3/8 143 83 206 70 508 (29-1/8) (37-1/4) (34-1/4) (5-5/8) (3-1/4) (8-1/8) (2-3/4) (20) Sound Power Level A -Weighted MODEL Sound Power Full Octave Sound Power(dB) Level [dB(A)] 63 Hz* 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz 8000 Hz 4TWA4036A3 75 72 72 71 69 70 62 57 52 4TWA4036A-SUB-3A-EN �ja� LIQUID LINE SERVICE VALVE, "E" I.D. FEMALE BRAZE CONNECTION WITH I/4" SAE FLARE PRESSURE TAP FITTINGS, `K, OFOR ALTERNATE ELECTRICAL ROUTING GAS LINE I/4 TURN BALL SERVICE VALVE, "D' I.D, FEMALE BRAZED CONNECTION WITH W,, SAE FLARE PRESSURE TAP FITTING, Model Base A B C D E F G H 7 K 4TWA4036A3 4 741 946 870 3/4 3/8 143 83 206 70 508 (29-1/8) (37-1/4) (34-1/4) (5-5/8) (3-1/4) (8-1/8) (2-3/4) (20) Sound Power Level A -Weighted MODEL Sound Power Full Octave Sound Power(dB) Level [dB(A)] 63 Hz* 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz 8000 Hz 4TWA4036A3 75 72 72 71 69 70 62 57 52 4TWA4036A-SUB-3A-EN Sound Power Level A -Weighted MODEL Sound Power Full Octave Sound Power(dB) Level [dB(A)] 63 Hz* 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz 8000 Hz 4TWA4036A3 75 72 72 71 69 70 62 57 52 4TWA4036A-SUB-3A-EN 4TWA4036A-SUB-3A-EN 0 TRANE° Product Specifications OUTDOOR UNIT (a) (b) 4TWA4036A3000A POWER CONNS. — V/PH/HZ (c) 208-230/3/60 MIN. BRCH. CIR. AMPACITY 13 BR. CIR. PROT. RTG. — MAX. (AMPS) 20 COMPRESSOR CLIMATUFF@- SCROLL NO. USED — NO. STAGES 1 — 1 VOLTS/PH/HZ 208-230/3/60 R.L. AMPS (d)— L.R. AMPS 9.9 — 70 FACTORY INSTALLED START COMPONENTS (e) NO INSULATION/SOUND BLANKET NO COMPRESSOR HEAT OUTDOOR FAN PROPELLER DIA. (IN.) — NO. USED 27.6 — 1 TYPE DRIVE — NO. SPEEDS DIRECT— 1 CFM @ 0.0IN. W.G. M 3440 NO. MOTORS — HP 1-1/8 MOTOR SPEED R.P.M. 825 VOLTS/PH/HZ 200-230/1/60 F.L. AMPS 0.8 OUTDOOR COIL — TYPE SPINE FIN — ROWS — F. P. 1. 1-24 FACE AREA (SQ. FT.) 19.1 TUBE SIZE (IN.) 3/8 REFRIGERANT CONTROL EXPANSION VALVE REFRIGERANT LBS. — R-410A (O.D. UNIT) (9) 7 LBS., 1 OZ FACTORY SUPPLIED YES LINE SIZE — IN. O.D. GAS (h) (i) 7/8 LINE SIZE — IN. O.D. LIQ. 3/8 CHARGING SPECIFICATIONS SUBCOOLING 10°F DIMENSIONS H X W X D CRATED (IN.) 34.4 x 38.7 x 35.1 WEIGHT SHIPPING (LBS.) 240 NET (LBS.) 208 (a) Certified in accordance with the Air -Source Unitary Air -conditioner Equipment certification program, which is based on AHRI standard 210/240. (b) Rated in accordance with AHRI standard 270. M Calculated in accordance with Natl. Elec. Codes. Use only HACR circuit breakers or fuses. (d) This value shown for compressor RLA on the unit nameplate and on this specification sheet is used to compute minimum branch circuit ampacity and max. fuse size. The value shown is the branch circuit selection current. (e) No means no start components. Yes means quick start kit components. PTC means positive temperature coefficient starter. Optional kit shown. M Standard Air — Dry Coil — Outdoor (9) This value approximate. For more precise value see unit nameplate. (h) Reference the outdoor unit ship -with literature for refrigerant piping length and lift guidelines. Reference the refrigerant piping software pub # 32-3312-xx or refrigerant piping application guide SS- APG006-xx for long line sets or specialty applications (xx denotes latest revision). 0) Trane outdoor condensing units are factory charged with the system charge required for the outdoor condensing unit and 15 feet of tested connecting lines. If connecting line length exceeds 15 feet, then final refrigerant charge adjustment is necessary. Each additional foot over 15 feet requires 0.6 ozs of refrigerant. See the Installer's Guide for full charging instructions. 4TWA4036A-SUB-3A-EN 0 TRANE Mechanical Specification Options General The Outdoor Units are fully charged from the factory for up to 15 feet of piping. This unit is designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 115°F. Cooling capacities are matched with a wide selection of air handlers and furnace coils that are AHRI certified. The unit is certified to UL 1995. Exterior is designed for outdoor application. Casing Unit casing is constructed of heavy gauge, galvanized steel and painted with a weather -resistant powder paint finish on all louvered panels and the fan top panel. The corner panels are prepainted. All panels are subjected to our 1,000 hour salt spray test . The base is made of a CMBP-G30 weatherproof material to resist corrosion. Refrigerant Controls Refrigeration system controls include condenser fan, compressor contactor and high pressure switch. High and low pressure controls are inherent to the compressor. A factory supplied liquid line drier is standard. Some models may require field installation. TRANS° Compressor The compressor features internal over temperature, pressure protection and total dipped hermetic motor. Other features include: Centrifugal oil pump and low vibration and noise. Condenser Coil The outdoor coil provides low airflow resistance and efficient heat transfer. The coil is protected on all four sides by louvered panels. Low Ambient Cooling As manufactured, this system has a cooling capacity to WE The addition of an evaporator defrost control permits operation to 40°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control with TXV permits low ambient cooling to 30°F. Thermostats —Cooling only and heat/cooling (manual and automatic change over). Sub -base to match thermostat and locking thermostat cover. Evaporator Defrost Control — See Low Ambient Cooling. ETA us (ISTED Intertek Globally Recognized. Industry Respected. Ingersoll Rand (NYSE:IR) advances the quality of life by creating comfortable, sustainable and efficient environments. Our people and our family of brands —including Club Car@, Ingersoll Rand@, Thermo King@ and Trane@—work together to enhance the quality and comfort of air in homes and buildings; transport and protect food and perishables; and increase industrial productivity and efficiency. We are a global business committed to a world of sustainable progress and enduring results. For more information, visit www.ingersollrand.com. Ingersoll Rand has a policy of continuous product and product data improvements and reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. The AHRI Certified mark indicates Ingersoll Rand participation in the AHRI Certification program. For verification of individual certified products, go to www.ahridirectory.org. ©2016 Ingersoll Rand All rights reserved GJW)4TWA4036A-SUB-3A-EN 11 Nov2016 IIngersoll Rand.. Supersedes (New)